RECORDS =

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. VII, No. 1

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

(Herbert M. Hale)

AbELAIDE, OcToBER 27, 1941

PRINTED AT THE HASSELL PRESS, 104 CURRIE STREET

RESULTS OF THE HARVARD-ADELAIDE UNIVERSITIES

ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION, 1938-1939

TASMANOID TRIBES IN NORTH QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALE AND JOSEPH B. BIRDSELL

Summary

During 1938-39 field-work was carried out for fourteen months under the joint

auspices of the Division of Anthropology, Harvard University, and the Board for

Anthropological Research at the University of Adelaide. This work, sponsored by the

Carnegie Corporation of New York whose generous grants have made possible the

field work and the elaboration of the data, has been assisted further by contributions

from the South Australian Government and the University of Adelaide.

RESULTS or tHe HARVARD-ADELAIDE UNIVERSITIES

ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION, 1938-1939

TASMANOID TRIBES ty NORTH QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALK ann JOSEPH B. BIRDSKLL.

Plates tiv,

Durie 1938-89 field-work was carried out for fourteen months ander the joint

auspices of the Division of Anthropology, Harvard University, and the Board

tor Anthropological Research at the University of Adelaide. This work, sponsored

by the Carnegie Corporation of New York whose generous grants have male pos-

sible the field work and the elaboration of the data, has heen assisted further by

contributions from the South Australian Government and the University of

Adelaide,

TNTRODUUTION,

The expedition traversed 16,000 miles; 2,458 full and mixed blood peoples in

Australia were studied, aud their sovial backeroands amd present status examined.

Several papers have been published and others are in course of preparation.

Certain matters of immediate theoretical interest regarding the Australian

full bloods are diseussed in the present contribution. While early speculations

regarding the origins of the Australian aborigines generally have postulated two

waves of different ethnie type, reaching and populating the mainland of the

Continent, and this idea has never beeu conpletely abancdoned—recent anthro-

pometrie work among the living aborigines of Central Australia has tended to

support another hypothesis that this interesting race is very homogeneors. A

corollary to the latter statement is that the Tasmanians left little or no distinguish-

able imprint upon the continental peoples, and aecording to Wood Jones (1984),

inay have reached their historie location as the result of a lengthy sea voyage, or

voyages, originating im the islands to the north-east of Australia.

Principal measured series of Australian aborigines in Australia have been

obtained hitherto from Central and Northern Australia, and no mass of data

has been available for the Bastern coastal areas, which are cut off from the rest

of Australia by the Great Dividing Range, and divided into pockets by the moun-

lainous terrain of the coastal ranges. That the eastern anc south-eastern coast

may have becn a refuge area has been recognised by enltural anthropologists, bit

little information bas been available abont. physical types.

Our studies demonstrate that iv the eastern coastal and mountain region near

Cains ig an area where exist several small tribes of a people characterized by a

high incidence of relatively and absolutely small stature, crisp carly hair, and a

tendeney toward yellowish-brown skin eolow. All of the tribes appears to be

mixed in greater or lesser degree with the Anstralian aboriginal type, but preserve

in their nixed eondition characters recognizable as belonging to the Tasmanian

aborigines. This may prove to be a {\indamental discovery in Australian anthro-

pology,

Our field observations have led to the further conclusion that the Australian

aborigines are not derived from a single ethnie group, but result from the blending,

in varying proportions, of three diserete ethnic elements, which tentatively may

be called ‘‘Southern,’’ ‘*Northern,’’ and 'Tasmarnoid,’?

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MuseuM

~

For the purposes of this paper, it is not intended fully to deseribe and define

the tree types—bot to record brietly the existence of a Tasmanoid group on the

mainland, paying most atteution to their oecurrenee on the Atherton Plateau region

of Northern Queensland, Pull descriptions and analyses of the three ethnie eronps

are being prepared for publicition ; these are based ow the statistical examination

of the data on approximately one thousand full-blooded aborigines, studied in

Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia, and the southern’ half

of Western Australia, inelniing full series of each of the three types. With the

exception of South Australia, 10 valid series on the living have yet heen pitblished

from these areas.

Between these three primary ethnie strains, intermixture has lone continued

on & generous seale, but it is still possible. in peripheral areas, to find bloes of

tribes, where the majorily of the individuals approxitate in their traits to the

protoly pep.

No correlation between language and physical type is postulated ; nmforma-

tion obtained about lauguage and culture in the area point, to a marked perjod

of isolation of some of the peoples in the Atherton rain jungles. One of the

languages, Barbaram, seems to be of such a relatively isolated type, that it Wany

be regarded as having been linked with the Tasmanoid people of the Atherton

Tableland for a relatively long period of time,

The Atherton Tableland and the coastal region inland trom Cairns was first

opened for white settlement abont 1880, aud after 1890 began to carry a laree

settled white population engaged in dairy-and-general-farming on the plateau,

and siigar-eane farming on the coast. Although large areas remain of meleared,

rough wountain terrain, in large measure the natives have been lod to abandon

their nomadic habits and their dependence on hunting. Many of them have been

compulsorily segregated on mission aid eoverninent settlements at Yarrabah,

Monamona, and Paln Tsland. <A few of them, who bave only heen brought in

from the dense jungle areas above Cardwell within the past six years, are still

unable to speak any but their native tongne, These late arrivals claim that at

least one family is sfill living in a completely wild nomadic condition in the rain

jungles of the Cardwell hinterland. Several photographs taken by Mr. A, Atkin-

son in the early days of white settlement indicate the former appearanee of these

people, Li one instance a child appearing in an old photograph, now an old man,

was one of the subjects of our anthropometric studies.

The first detailed acconnts of the life of people of the vain jungles of Queens-

land were those of the naturalist and traveller Lamholtz (1889), whose explora-

tions were principally made on the Herbert River and m the area to the south; his

published yoeabularies show aver 70 per cent. of Warelkaniai words, and the others

are principally of Warnngu aud Neweyi origin, Tis main observations iid not

therefore extend to the relatively unmixed pyemaid eroups. Nevertheless his

statements indicate be appreciated the discreteness of the rain forest tollk and hail

observed the great variability in stature evident in the peripheral tribes; his

accounts have Wot tutherto been treated with the reapeet due to thens.

JATRIB ON OF UPA LASMANOT RIBS.

D RUTION OF TRE TASMANOLD TRIBE

The distribution of the tribes as given, is perforce that of a period before

tribal disruption ail decay had set in with the growth of white set{lement.

There is a central blog of a dozen small tribes of the Tasmanoid people

ooenpying an area one hundved miles wide (from Cape Gratton in the east to

Lappa -lunetion in the west) aml 180 miles lone (from the hearchwaters of the

Annan River in the north to near Cardwell and Ravenshoe in the south).

TINDALE AND BIRDSELL—TASMANOID TRIBES IN QUEENSLAND 3

Negatjan [yatjen|—belonging to the country from Atherton to Russell River,

Mamu ['Mazuu}—from the coast at Russell River south to M urdering Point.

Wanjurn ['Wanjuru|—anouth of Russell River.

Tjapukai |Tjarpukaij—on the broken table-top countiy from Mareeba

and Kuranda to Port Douglas,

Barbaram [‘Ba:beren |—Great Dividing Range from north of Mareeba nearly

to Mount Garnet.

Tdindji ['Tdindji]—from Malanda and Lake Barrine to Gordon Vale.

Kongkandji | Konkandji|—Cape Grafton, and Peninsula.

Buliwvai [“Buluwai]—in the mountain serubs south of Krranda.

Djiru | Djirw: |—at Clump Point.

Djirubal ['Djirubal]—Herberton to Ravenshoe and down the Wild River

to beyond Tirtabella Station,

Julngai |'Gulgaij—Murray and Tully Rivers.

Kerainai [’Keramai|—At Kirrama and south of the inland serubs of Murray

River,

The details of the tribal boundaries are shown by Tindale (1940) on a may

in a previous paper of this series, Population statistics have been gathered

indicating the former presence of a population of about, one thousand five hundred

of these people. Grouped im a halt-cirele, and enclosing the area, except along

the sea front, are other more mixed peoples, who include some pygmoids, They

form a transitional type between the nuelens of Tasmanoid tribes and the more

normal Australian ones.

[n this group belong the;

Bandjin [‘Bandjin|—Hinehinbrook Tslatd,

Newegi ['Newegi]—Seaview Rauge above Ingham and southwards.

Agwamin |E‘wamin|—tead waters of Einasleigh and Copperfield Rivers.

Wakaman [‘Wakamen|—Chillagoe to Mt, Surprise on the western side of

the Great Dividing Range.

Muluridji [‘Muluridji|—uorth of Mareeba on the head waters of the

Mitchell River.

Djanlain |‘Djankun]—head waters of Walsh River as far west as Almaden

and Chillagoe,

Trukandji [‘Trukandji]—on the coast north of Cairns as far as Port Doulas.

A second belt of tribes, the members of whieh are, in their characters, essen-

tially Australian aborigines of types met with in inland Queensland, touches

the voast in the north near Cooktown, and, running down the western side of

the Great Dividing Range, mects the coast at Townsville, thus completely

enelosing the apparent refuge area and its transitional belt. Onthers of the

Tasmanoid groups seem to occur, and in this category may perhaps be placed

the Wulpura |’Wulpure] about whom insufficient data is yet available; traces

of probable mixed pygmoid tribes appear in more southern coastal districts as

far as New South Wales.

Within the relatively large Atherton jungle area the people thus tend to differ

in various degrees from the Australian norms in physieal characteristics. In

points of their material culture, linguisties, and social organization there are

suggestions that, although isolated for a long period in theit specialized vain

jungle environment, contact with other Anstralian tribes bas led to their absorp-

tion of mueh whieh is culturally that of the surrounding Australians. There

aye indieutions that the additions which have been made to ther fundamental

culture are those characteristic of people who now inhabit southern Australia

rather than those of the present inhabitants of north-central and northern,

Queensland,

4 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ENVIRONMENT,

Much of the area occupied by the Queensland Tasmanoids is noted for its

high, and relatively tniform, rainfall, and a great deal of it is covered in dense

tropieal jungle, mterspersed with belts of Savannah forest in which species of

Bucalyplus dominate, The rain jungles, more correctly shelter jungles, are

locally known as ‘‘serubs’’ and occasionally as “brushes,’’ Strictly speaking

they are not vain forests. ‘Tall trees, o£ which some of the dominant nienibers

are Ayathis, Fieus, Flindersia, and Padorarpus, form a high canopy of Foliage,

shitting sunlight trom the vine and palm-stem entaneled floor of the junele,

The shelter jungles and the intervening belts of Eucalyptus savannah extend

from the coast at sea level to a height of almost five thousand feet on the summits

of Bartle Frere and Bellonden Ker. The general elevation of Atherton Platean

is two thousand feet, while that of the Herberton Plateau is nearly a thousand

higher, and these are, or were covered with broad belts af jingle interspersed

with savannah,

The inean temperature of the eoldest month at Ravenshoe (2,957 feet) is

GU", while at sea level it is 70°, Rainfall varies from 50 inehes at Atherton to 143

imehes at Innisfail, The heavier rains oceur in summer deluges, and there is a

relatively dry winter period of about two montlis, when the average fall is below

1-5 inches per month,

As in Malaya and the Philippine Islands, the jnngles and mountain platearx

constitute a Special environment, and iy coujinetion with the rngged ranges

which enclose the region they have buen eminently snited ag refuge areas, On

their inland side, the jungles are backed by high, often sterile, eranitic momitains

of the Dividing Range from which deeply entrenehed rivers ran westwards

towards the Gult of Carpentaria. In the rugged country aboot this Dividing

Range, rainfall is leas heavy, and the vain jungles have contracted.

Soil seems to play a dominant part in the formation of the various ty pes

of forest. Sheltered areas, especially those covered with rich basaltic soils, have

produced dense forests, whereas in the poorer, granitic areas the junele is much

impoverished, Usually there is a complete overhead canopy, and it is chieily

in the drier patches on relatively barren soils that the open parkland intervenes.

Some of the open savannah is believed to be the result of man "s uctivitios and

to have been cansed by the fires of past generations of the native inhabitants.

PuystcaL CHARACTERISTICS,

A historical resume of the problem of Australian and Tasmanian origins

is to be given elsewhere. Towitt (1898) detailed early opinions and theories and

Davidson (1937) has recently presented a useful summary of current drends

of thought on physical and enltural relationshi ps.

It is of some importance to consider the scope and geographical range of

previously published work on the anthropometry of the living Australian

aborigines. With the exception of several very small series from New South

Wales, publications have been limited to the substantial series by Campbell,

Gray, and Haeket) (1936), based upon data collected by a number of University

of Adelaide expeditions, over a period of years; by Barston (1918); and by

Warner, published by Eowell (19387). These three major contribytions are limited

to data collected from Contral Australia and North Australia respectively,

At first sight this coverage may seen) ample, but in reality these series are

drawn from roughly but one-seyenth of the continent, and do not inelude thoge

regions which might be interpreted as the most important refuge areas, loealities

TINDALE AND BIRDSELL—TASMANOID ‘TRIBES IN (JURENSLAND 5

in whieh any lower layers of ethnie stratigraphy, should they oeeur, would most

reasonably he expected to survive. Lt has been our good fortume that the major

sim of the present expedition, the study of Australian hybrids, Jed lo extensive

attention being paid io the peripheral areas which hitherto had heen neglected.

A thonsand full-bloods, of both sexes, have been examined anfhropometrically,

and over seven hundred blood grouped, both for the A+B series and the M-N

derives Of agglitinogens (Birdsell and Boyd, 1940), Approximately fur liimdred

of these measured are frou Queensland, the reniainder spread over New South

Wales, Vietoria, South Avstralia, and Western Australia,

In general, it may be said that the Tasmanoid bloc of tribes now reported

trom the Atherton area, represents a distinethy aberrant type of Australian

aboriginal, whieh although undoubtedly mixed, is none the less relatively homo-

veneous Within the given area, and as a physical type, is distinet from the;

surrounding peoples. Those traits in which they deviate from the Australian

worms, as to date established by published niaterial, all trend iu one direction

fowatd the characterises of the extinct Tasmanians,

Before deseribing in a general way the traits in which this aberrancy is

noted, it shod be stated that, although little anthropometric work has heen

published from Queensland, for a number of years writers have com mented upon

the 'trizaly’? hair of some of the uatives of coastal North Queensland, Lombholtz

(1889) explained this aberraut hair form as originating in Melanesian contacts,

and the problem was thus easily dismissed. Mrom evidence at our disposal, i

seems some relatively recent Melanosian influence can be detected m the natives

of the northern part of Cape York Peninsnla; the tribes in the Cairns region

show none of this, There is ample data to indicate that the historic importation

of Melanesians to work the canefields has no bearing wpon this problem, and

the authors conclude, fvom the study of known Fy and Py generation Melanesian-

Australian hybrids, that late prehistoric Melanesian contacts way likewise be

rmled out as a major factor im this area.

The Tasmanuids i the Atherton Tableland area, when compared with the

surrounding tribes, show significant diminutions m stature and body weight.

Their extremities are notably gracile. Although straight and low wave hair

forms are present, there is a relatively high incidence of crisp deep-wave, aud

erisp cutly hair. No true frizaly hair is present. The nasal structure is dberrant

in certain features, ancl the region of the upper integimmental lip is usually

relatively long aud convex, Skin eolour tends to he somewhat light, and reddish

aud yellowish tones are more common than among the durrouncding peoples,

Tecth show some interesting differences that cannot here be deserihed in detail.

The prelimmary results of blood grouping tend to substantiate the distinctness

of the bloc af tribes. Tr the authors’ views, these people may be classed as

originally similar to fhe Tasmanians, althongh through infiltration by and

alnixture with a principally ‘Southern’? type of Australian aboriginal, they

are now modifled to a status which renders them cistinet from either, Inub lying

clearly between the norms of the two ancestral types. Tt is for this reasou we

have ehusen to call them ‘!Tasmmanoids."’

The analyses of the data appear to substanbate the above statements, arul

if, seoms elear that the ancestors of the Tasmanians were at one time well astab-

lished upon the Australian mainland, ‘Traces of their characterisiics may

reasonably be anticipated to survive in other marginal areas on the continent.

Hyidence in Wand in indieative of this, and we conelude that the negrite

Tasmanians represent part of an early wave of peoples who entered the con-

tinental area, Under the impaet of succeeding waves of people of cilferent

ethnie type, they have been modified, While the virtually pure type survived

6 Recorps oF THE S.A. MusEUM

in Tasmania \witil historic times, on the vest of the continent they were largely

submerged, physically and eulturally, by later arrivals,

Tf this hypothesis be correct, it is obvious that the Australian aboriginal no

longer may be considered as a pure race of unusual homogeneity, but a well-

blended group of at least dihybrid and probably tritybrid origin,

CucrurkaAL RELATIONSHIPS,

I is not Hitended to claborate bere the cultural data gathered about these

people. A few general indications may be given,

The social organization of the Atherton Tasmanoids seems to have been

influenced by both dual people along the coast and by four-elass patrilineal people

with named moieties froin the plains in the west, Both these types of organization

appear to be accretions of relatively recent date,

The Tjapukai and tdindji have patrilineal moiety systems with the (erms

|‘ Kurabana} and |'Kuvaminja|; in the Konvkandji, these beeome | Korabana |

and [‘Koraknlu|. These dual systems seem to be the oldest ones surviving tm the

area, and have links with similar oreanizational types known in more southern

parts of coastal Queeusland. Barbaram, which Lingnistieally seems to be one

of the most characteristic of the tribes, has a four-class patrilineal organization

clearly derived from tribes to the west. This has named moieties which sre names

of totems :

Kuritala (eagle) moiety: Tjikundji and Tyilandji subelasses,

Karak (night bird) moiety: Kupnndji and Karpandji subelasses,

Marriage in Barbaram is normally by exehange of sisters, and the narriage

is arranged throngh the mother and mother’s mother, Wite’s mother and

father’s sister are both avoided, and the prohibition extends wp in each ease to

the mothers of these individnals. A man also refrains from speech with his

son's Wile and sister's daughter,

Barbaram folk were formerly, according to tradition, a people without

uutiation ceremonies, Their youths, aceording to this belief, were taken by

the Wakaman people, who live to the southavest and by them subjected to rites

which ineluded the cutting of sears (civatrices) on the chest. Cirenmeision is,

of course, unknown in this part of Queeusland.

The rites, which were in more recent tines also carried out by the Barbaram

and allied tribes (themselves, are occasions for danees and singing. These conlinue

by relays of men over a period of several days, the performers being divided, for

this purpose into two groups, the |An'gor wok] or Sun men, and the [Ano “mole |

or Night men, During the rituals, the youth is |‘japreir| (lit. set apart, almost

sacred, perhaps corresponding to the [’nerambe] of the natives of the Tanga-

vekald and Jarildekald tribes in South Australia), and his feet tay not touch

water, all his reqnirements being supplied from a dish: if a stream has to be

crossed or followed he must be carried on the shoulders of others,

Burial customs include the smoking aud partial mmmmification of the body

by treatment, with red vehre; subsequent disposal of the hody is by eremation

alter a series of vites of remembrance. The lower jaw of the deceased is often

carried for a further period before being destroyed. Food eamnibalism was

rife, and many who mot their deaths at the hands of strangers, were eaten, In

consequence of the practices of eremation and cannibalism, skeletal material

of the Tasmanoids from the Cairus region is rare; fewer than a dozen erania

are present in Australian collections, The principal examples ave being

examined and will he made the subject of separate studies,

TINDALE AND BIRDSELL—TASMANOLD TRIBES IN QUEENSLAND 7

LAN@uaan.

Comparative voeabnlaries indicate that, while the peripheral and inter-

mediate zones of pygmoid peoples have languages allied to those of them taller

neighbours, there ig a cenfral area where the languages appear 1 be unelear

und to have been strougly isolated. Barbaram seems best to represent this

archaic type: Wakaman and Agwamin, whieh adjoin, show marked influences

from the west, The northern and north-eastern Taswianoid tribes reveal the

influence of northern languages of the Koko buudji type (Koko-yimidir of Roth).

in Tjapukai, for example, the original Barbaram elements have been obscured

and overlaid, surviving only in modified fori,

Barbaram, which is regarded in this preliminary statement as most typical

of the area of isolation, is characterized among other things by many mouo-

syllabie words with vousonantal endings: [’kan) tree, |‘mok| man, [kok]

wate. In words of fwo or more syllables, principal stress is often placed on the

second syllable: [a’ro] a species of kangaroo, [avrunda] head, |a:tja| three,

In'katla] leg, [al’mark] meat, [a’bo| growid, [awa] mother, Jan’be:ra| grass

baaleet,

A glottal stop [‘] is evident in some words, and in others this is so marked

‘hat it seems to have almost the effeet of a eliek, asin [n‘gara.

Terminal vowels are often indeterminate, and ihe voice may he raised a tone

[nd"|, fatj"|, [ke], [k*]. The last-named word is an example in whieh the

terminal vowel is very short,

Short texts and grammatical notes have been obtained from two of the tribes

in this area, ati parallel yovabularies from each of them, They will be the subject

of a more detailed separate study,

Marertay CULTURE,

Cultural elements whieh seem to belang essentially to this area include the

'japukai practice of carrying the skulls and the jaw bones of the deceased as

ornaments upon the body for a lengthy period before disposal by burning.

The use of large decorated fighting shields made from the buttresses ot Pious

{revs is confined to the area. These shields are ttsed in conjunction with a stugle-

handed, flat-bladed and Img, wooden, fighting sword, which elsewhere occurs

only among the Kandjn people of Coen and among some people who similarly

inhabit rain forests near Brisbane, where recur some cultural, and not a few

physical, characters of the 'Tasmanoids.

Clothing was confined to the use of beaten bark blankets, whieh seems to be

au adaptation to wet elimates of the custom of wearing anitnal sking, which is so

highly characteristic of the marginal peoples along the eastern ancl southern coasts

of Australia,

Cane baskets of several highly characteristic forms are made; the designs of

these ave coufied to the inner group of Tasmanoid folk, so that their association

with them may be rather old, Some ot them ave based on local models, being

translations into basket ware of prototypes made from sewn fig tree bark. The

Barbaram, Tijapukai, aud Idindji make half-hitch coiled grass baskets closely

similar i their appearance and technique of manntactire to those of the Tas-

manians. ‘The details of the processes of manufacture are recorded in the 16 m.m.

film library of the South Anstralian Museum.

Several specialized techniques of food gathering such as would develop ina

dense rain-forest environment ave characteristic of these people. Mood of the rain

jungle tribes consists larvely of roots, seeds, fruits, and honey, there being a general

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

scarcity of meat except for an oevasional cassowary, scrub wallaby, tree kangaroo,

and flying fox, Human flesh was consumed as a luxury meat. Many of the seeds

and nuts eaten contain actively poisonous alkaloids, which are eliminated only by

special washings, leachings, roastings, and by termentational methods, Many of

the mits and the bees’ nests are very inaccessibly placed on high trees, and methods

are practised of tree-climbing with a cane loop held in the hand, the climber appear-

ing to run up the tree trunk by cleverly synchronized alternating steps and lifting

movenients of his knotted climbing cane, A motion pieture (16 mn, record) of

(his practice is also preserved in the film library of this Museum,

Stone axes are employed ; the people on the coastward side of the area having

trimmed and edge-ground eanc-hafted axes, and those on the inland margin use

axes which have heen symmetrically trimmed by pecking and battering and ground

ou the edge. The principal funetion of the axe was in honey gathering from trees

in the open savannah between the jungles. According to native tradition, the

making of axes was formerly unknown, and they were brought front jhe west

and traded by newcomers. Stone knives were made from irreeular flakes of

qharta; the handles are pieces of beeswax. Large stone slabs containing eireular

pits of approximately 2+ em, diameter are used in the breaking of the exceedingly

hard Queensland Nut, whieh yields an important food item,

SUMMARY.

This is a report on one aspect of the work of the combined Harvard

and Adelaide Universities Anthropological Expedition of 1938-39, finaneed hy

the Carnegie Corporation of New York,

The presence, in the Atherton Tableland, of a people of relatively small

stature and erisp curly hair, is vecorded. These people are identified as modified

descendants of a 'Tasmanoid stratum on the Australian maiuland., They inhabit

an area of dense rain jungle and highland plateau in the wettest area of North

Queensland. Their physical form appears to have been preserved, through

isolation, in a relatively inaccessible and Whinviting environment, not sought by

the usnal Australian tribes.

Iu their burial customs these people present some features veminiseent of

the Tasmanian aborigines. Their essential cultural relationships are recognized

as heing rather with the people of Tasmania and of Southern Australia than with

the folk of the northern tribes who surround them,

REFERENCES CITED,

Jammboltz, ©. (1889): Among cannibals, London.

Gurston, R. (1918): Records of the anthropometric measurements of 102 Australian aborigihals,

Wood Jones, M. (1934); Australia's vanishing race. Sydney,

Camphell, T.D., Gray, J. 1. and Hackett, (, 7. (1986) : Physical Anthropology of the aborigines

of Central Australia. Oceunia, vii-viii,

Howitt, A, W. (1898): Sust. dasoe. Adv, Sei. Proe.

Dividson, D. 4. (1987): Relationship of Tasmanian and Austrilian cultures, Twenty-tiftth

Anniv. Studies; Philadelphia Anthrop, Soc, p. 47,

Howells, W, W. (1937); Anthropometry of the natives of Arnhem Land and the Australian race

problem. Papers of Peabody Mus. Harvard University, xvi (1),

Tindale, ny B. (1940) Distribution of Australian abotiginal tribes. Trang, Roy. Soe, 8 Lael,

Ixiv (1).

Birdsell, J. B, and Boyd, G, (1940): Blood Broups in the Avstralian aborigines. omer Journ.

Phys, Anthropology, xxvii (1).

TINDALE AND BIRDSELL—TASMANOID TRIBES IN QUEENSLAND 9

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate i.

Camp scene on edge of rain jungle; huts roofed with wild banana leaves; Cairns District; period

1.

a po

1890, photo A, Atkinson.

Plate ii.

Tdindji tribespeople near Babinda, about 1893 (the figure 5th from the left then was approxi-

mately 10 years of age; he was measured, at 55 years, under the number N. 822 by this

Expedition; the figure at left holding a |‘paku:r] or wooden sword-elub was a leading man,

Burumbu, of Mulgrave River; 4th from left is Torunga of Warukeinju, a Korabana man,

father of our N.1108). The design of the shield [biku:n] held by the central standing

figure relates to a species of fruit; the second shield from right bears a frog design.

. Idindji women with cane baskets of types based on sewn bark originals.

. An Idindji leading man, Jabulum, about 1890; father of Mandinggarabai (N. 611) who is

shown in Plate iy, 1 and 2; he is wearing a [’butju:1] ornament of white cockatoo feathers.

Photos, A. Atkinson.

Plate iii.

. Tjapukai youth, 18 years (measured as N. 483 of this expedition),

Buluwai girl, 11 years (measured as N. 581).

. Tjapukai man, 68 years (measured as N, 444).

. Muluridji man wearing [’meramba] a Tjapukai dancing ornament of sulphur-crested-cockatoo

feathers, affixed to hair with beeswax. Photos, N. B. Tindale.

Plate iy.

. Idindji man in position of defence with sword-club and a shield bearing a turtle and fish design.

. Idindji man with shield and sword-club held in a position for attack (subject measured as

N. 611, aged 55 years; stature 155 ¢m.; son of Jabulum, plate ii, fig. 3).

. J. B. Birdsell and the shortest Kongkandji man, 24 years (N. 669; stature 140 cm.).

_N. B. Tindale and Barbaram man (estimated age 60 years, measured as N, 482; stature

151 em.).

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM:

Vor. VII, PLATE I.

f)

v]

NC i V ]

CAMP

JUNGLE

NSLAND RAIN

JURE

¢

(

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM. Voc. VII, PLATE Il,

IDINDIT JUNGLE FOLK

Rec. S.A, MUSEUM. Vor. VII, PLATE LIT.

NORTH QUEENSLAND TASMANOLDS

Rec. §.A. MuseEUM. Vor. VIL, Plate IV

NORTH QUEENSLAND TASMANOIDS

IMPROVED METHODS OF COLLECTING MARINE

ORGANISMS

By KEITH SHEARD

Summary

As much of the present-day study of marine organisms is concerned with the

recording of associations, and with the relationship existing between animals and the

physical condition of their environment, it follows that the value of such work is

largely dependent on the thoroughness of the collecting methods used.

During recent years, work on marine crustacea carried out at the South Australian

Museum has led to adaptations of various methods, resulting in a great increase in the

number of species and total quantity of animals secured.

IMPROVED METHODS or COLLECTING MARINE

ORGANISMS

By KEITH SHEARD,

Fig. 1,

Ag much of the present-day study of marine organisms is concerned with the

recording of associations, and with the relationship existing between animals

and the physical condition of their environment, it follows that the value of such

work is largely dependent on the thoroughness of the eolleeting# methods used.

During recent years, work on marine crustacea earried out at the South

Australian. Museum has led to adaptations of various methods, resulting in a

wreat increase in the number of species anid total quantity of animals secured,

One result of the employment of these methods has been to indicate that

members of Orders such as Amphipoda, Cumacea, and Ostracoda, together with

the various Sub-orders of the Isopoda, are much more abundant and are far

ereater factors in the food chains of fishes than has been appreciated by workers

on this subject. Actually, there is some evidence to show that the occurrence of

the larger pelagic fishes in any one locality is, fo some extent, dependent on the

distribution of organisms which are usually regarded as bottom living, In other

words, while the general distribution of the Nekton may be determined by that

of the Plankton, a factor of its particular oeeurrence may be the character of the

underlying Benthos, On this point mueh enquiry is necessary.

The improvements detailed below cover the following techniques: full-speed

plankton netting, submarine light methods, reet collecting, and dredging.

Fuu-seeep Nets.

(Rie. 1).

The position with regard to these is well summarized in. the B,A.N.Z,.A.R.E.

reports (Johnston, T. T,, 1937, p.6). In the majority of the nets, the mouth open-

ing is of necessity small, and in addition the frontal wave at speed is so great that

active swimmers and larger organisms have little difficulty in evading the net,

Yet high speed nets are desirable, as even with efficient low speed nets of the

‘Discovery?’ type the frontal wave is large in comparison with the speed obtained,

so that again the more active forms escape.

For the last twelve months | have been using a modification of the N70 type,

which is towed at up to six knots, catching material ranging from large diatoms to

Blue Sprats (Slolephorus robustus) of 75 ems. in length, During that time the

net hag suffered 0 apparent damage afier covering about two hundred miles at

a high speed. The organisms collected were little damaged. The net itself proved

remarkably stable during towings.

DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION.

Dr. Harold Thompson, of the C.S, & 1.R., Division of Fisheries, kindly pro-

vided a net of the general N70 type (see Kemp and Mardy, 1929, p. 181, fig. 6),

This net had a mouth opening of 61 cm. The first section was of canvas 1 foot

12 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

9 inches long; the second of No, 40 bolting cloth, 3 feet long, while the third was of

No, 74 bolting cloth, 3 feet 6 inches lone.

To adapt this for high speed work, a ring of 1 inch eane was made as a tow

ring; the canvas section was removed and replaced by + inch shrimp net, while a

lvass ving 3 inches in diameter was fitted to the bueket end of the net, three baskets

being vove on to this, the bueket itself heing dispensed with.

The bucket end of the net was then turned in on itself and drawn up, so that

the brass ring came abont half-way up the No, 40 bolting cloth. A second brass

ring, 11 inches in diameter, was then slid down the inside of the net. to keep the

lind end distended. This was secured from the outside with brass clips. Three

light marlin leads, each of a breali ng strain of 164 pounds, were threaded from

the heckets of the small brass ring and attached to the eane towing ring, (This

marlin could be lighter if w ereater safety margin were desired, )

Fig. 1. Scetion through Tigh Speed Net. A, Tow ring. B, Small brass ring, C, Large

brasa ring, Dotted lines indicate original position of hind end of net,

The completed net was towed at the end of about ove hundred feet of light

rope in order that the elasticity in this length would counter sudden jerks, oA

light accninulator could be used with a ereater sa fety margin at speeds in excess

of five knots, the strain at that speed being about 300 pounds.

The action of the net is an application of Bernoulli's Principle. The increase

in speed of the water column in passing through the varrow orifice results in a

lowering of pressure immediately behind it, consequently giving the net a greater

filtering capacity, In addition, the swift, uninterrupted flow of a proportion of

the water through the net eliminates the frontal wave, making it diffieult for even

fast Swimming organisms to escape,

At slow speeds, the eatehing power is comparable with that of the standard

net. increasing with the speed, The only diffienlty occurs in removing organisms

from the net, as the addition of an orthodox collecting device undnly increases the

total strain. However, | have not tound this to bea serious disadvantage.

The principle could easily be extended, and it should he possible by suitably

varying the relative size of the large and small orifices to build nets whieh would

tow, efficiently, at any reasonable speed, thus answering the objection raised by

Marr (Marr, 1938) to the use of large plankton nets,

Supmarine Lictr Mernops.

Work done by Mr. H, M, Hale at Selliek Beach led us to consider whether the

apparent inequality in distribution, and preponderance of males in certain areas,

recorded in literature, might not be due to the bias given by current collecting

inethods.

Accordingly, | experimented with a modifieation of submarine light collecting

methods. It was found that, by suitably decreasing the intensity of a light held

SHuRARD—MarRINne COLLECTING METHODS 1]

near a glass jar containing a iniseellancous assortment of marine organisms, the

bull of these could be attracted toward the source of light. Further experiments

at sea showed that the best all-round results were obtained when a light of low

intensity was hime insice the mouth of a net a little above the sea hottont at about

half au hour after sun-down, The light and net were left am position for thirty

niinutes,

One trial was made in the daytime at a depth of 180 metres. Fair results

were obtained, Through the courtesy of Dr. A. L, Tostevin, it was possible to make

4 collecting trip on his yacht, “Nyroea’’, and in one sample taken at night at the

Page Island (off Kangaroo Island) in nine fathoms of water on 12/4/41 between

7 and 7.50 p.m, representatives of the following groups of organisms were

obtained »

Radiolaria, two species. Ctenaphora, one species, Chaetognatha, one Species ;

Annelida, three species, Ophiuridea, one species. Larvae of a reef.dwelling

Tyochid. Nebaliacea, one species; Cladocera, two species; Mysidae, one

species; Evphausiacea, two species; Decapoda, both adult and larval, five

species; Ostracoda, three xpeeies; Tsopoda, three species ; Amphipoda, nine

species; Cumacea, a dozen species; Copepoda, eight apecies. Tumieata, one

species. Fishes, Stolephorus robustus and Engrawlis austrolis. Tn size, the

organisms rauged from 0-5 mm, fo 48 mm.

Ty preparing this apparatus, a short wire was soldered to the contact of a

gingle comtaet 2°5 volt torch globe; the upstanding brass strip of a flat, 3 volt bat.

tery was then turned over fo wrap around the metal stem of the plobe, and the

looxe end of the wire was elipped on to the side strip of the battery to complete the

circuit. ‘The lighting wit was then placed into a quart elip-top preserving jar,

together with some lead weights,

Ln nse this Hebt was hung with marlin so fhat it fell about 12 inches: below ihe

ring of ant N70 Lype net, of whieh the first 21 inches was 4 ineh mesh shrinp net,

This net was weighted in order to sink in any reasonable eurrent, and lowered so

the light and shrimp netting were clear of the bottom.

Ii a munber of hanis, the only datiawe sustained was when a large shark,

attacked the apparatus, biting off (he bucket and large weights as the net was being

hauled inboard,

Reew and Bortom CounneTina Meriiops,

This procedure was adapted trom a suggestion made by Dr. K. H. Barnard,

South Atrican Museum, in a letter to My. TL. M. ITale (Hale, LL. M.,, 1929, p. 9:

1936, p, 404). Tt is as effective for removing small organisms from seaweed as it is

from the erevides of rocks.

Stones, ele, brought cavefully from the bottom so that the sand film is bttle

disturbed, were immersed in a solntion consisting of one part of com mereial formna-

lin to forty parts of sea water, t.e,a 1 per cent. solution. [t is essential to have the

eoneentration of formalin so low that the animals do not die immediately, yet

strong enongh to drive them from the evevices. After about fifteen minutes’ im-

mersion, the rocks or seaweed were shaken in the water and removed, The liquid

was strained, the sirainings together with the sediment from the bottom being

bottled for examination,

Material dredged from deeper water was treated in the same manner. Tn this

case the xesults were not quite as good sive, in the long haul to the surface, KOme

of the sand flan on the roelks was lost. Llowever, even with ibis disadvantage, the

increase in the number of speeimens obtained from dredgings was considerable in

comparison with those gathered by the usial methods of hand picking and sieving.

14 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Only too often in the course of marine expeditions has the best part of the catch

been allowed to wash overboard again through the scuppers.

A further device for securing plankton forms living near the sea floor is de-

tailed by Dakin and Colefax (1940, p. 17). This consists of a sled type of net

which could possibly be adapted to work over a broken bottom, thus supplementing

the submarine light catches.

LITERATURE.

Dakin, W. J. and Colefax, A. N. (1940): Pub. Univ. Sydney, Dept. Zool., Mon. i.

Hale, H. M. (1927): Crustacea of South Australia.

Hale, H. M. (1936): Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., v, No. 4.

Johnston, T. H. (1937): B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. Rept., i.

Kemp, 8. and Hardy, A. C. (1929): Discovery Rept., i.

Marr, J. W.S. (1938): Discovery Rept., xviii, pp. 105-120.

Sheard, K. (1937): 8. Aust. Nat., xvi.

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS! (LEPIDOPTERA

HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART IV

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

In the course of the revision of the Australian Hepialidae it has become desirable to

pay attention to genera and species from several other natural regions. The scope of

the study is therefore widened. The presence in southern South America of genera and

even species closely related to Australian ones, and the existence of other somewhat

more distantly related ones, in the Gondwanan and Himalayan areas of India, has

raised generic problems, while the archaic nature of these strange moths necessitates

wide study of their relationships. In the present contribution attention is given

amongst others to several Asiatic genera, and a new sub-family division is proposed.

REVISION or tHe GHOST MOTHS! (LEPIDOPTERA

HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART LV,

Ry NORMAN B. TINDALP. BSe,, Sour Ausrranian Museum.

Plates v-vii, and Text-fig. 1-51,

Ty the course of the revision of (he Australian Tepialidae it has become desirable

(0 pay attention to genera and species from several other natural revions, The

scope of the study is therefore widened, The presence in southern South America

of genera and even species closely related to Australian ones, and the existence of

uther somewhat more distantly related ones, in the Gondwanan aud Himalayan

areas of Lodia, has raised generie problems, while the archaie nature of these

strange moths necessitates wide sludy of their relationships. In the present con-

tribution attention is given amonest others to several Asiatic genera, and a new

snb-family division is proposed. ’

Since the prepatation of earlier parts one yew member of the Australian genus

Trietena and another of Bordeia have cowie Wifler notice, and these are deseribed.

For some years it has been difficult to identify species of Hepialidae from

countries outside Europe and the United States. One problem has been scarcity

of material, even of species which ave of considerable eeonomic importance to

forester and farmer. I[{ is also unfortunate that types of the species are widely

geattered in collections, and, ina gronp stich as Hepialidae where the older deter-

riinations, unchecked by studies of the genitalia and venation, are subject to many

doubts, research workers have been ehary of deseribing thei material.

Opportunities afforded in 1936-7 by the Carnegie Corporation of New York

and by the Australian National Research Council, enabled the writer to spend

brief periods in examining types of species preserved in the Berlin Museum; the

Senckenbere Museum (Frankfurt-am-Main); the United States National Musevim

(Washington); American Museum of Natural History (New York); Tring

Museum; British Museum (South Kensington), as well as im some smaller collec-

tions in the United States of America, Canada, Ilolland, and Belgium.

T am indebted to Mr, W, EH. T. Tams for his assistance in the study of type

material in the British Museum, and to Professor A, Seitz, Drs. G. D. TL, Carpenter,

W. Forbes, M. Mering, K. Jordan, J, MeDunnough, W. Schans, E, P. Yan Duzee,

and Messrs. T. Bainbridye Pletcher, T, 1. Bell, J. C. M. Gardner, and F. C. Wat-

su, Who have been kind cnough to provide material of this group for study, Types

of several new species described in this revision are to be lodged in the British

Museum ; others are in the South Australian Mnseam, where, so far as is possible,

a paratype series is also preserved, Through the courtesy of collectors and others

it has been possible to bring together at Adelaide one of the most extensive extant

series of Hepialidae.

The importance of the study of the genitalia, in both sexes, must be stressed ;

lack of attention to details of these urvans has been one of the primary eanses of

(he diffienlty experienced in the recognition and classification of the insects, The

vomplex genital arinature of the female has been mistaken for that of the male,

and int consequence the types of some species have masqueraded under wrong sex

designations.

(1) Part 5, entitled Revision of the Anstralian Ghoat, Moths, was published in Ree. §. Aust.

Mus, ¥, 194, pp, 275-382.

16 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The homologies of the female genitalia in the Hepialidae have not hitherto

been worked out. For the study of Endacltla and allied genera it is desirable to

attempt to identify or define some of the principal parts.

It would appear that, for example, in B, wadulifer, the seventh sternite is

specialized to Lorm a hood over the genitalia (fig, 1-2). Its posterioy margin is

strongly notched, evidently to enable the eighth sternite to be folded farward

when extruded in the act of copmlation. The eighth sternite or subgenital plate is

itself drawn out posteriorly, and the lateral margins are folded over 10 form a

hollow trough; this may serve as a guide to the intromittent organ of the male,

sternite 6

HaHeeHue

il

inte

female

anterior ns -

‘gonapaphyses

posterior .

me osoeé

ponapophyses

anus

Mig. 1-2. Hadvelita wndutifer (Walker), 1 Ventral view of female gonitilin. 2, Lateral

view, composite sketeh.

The copulatory opening is concealed beneath the eighth sternite on the marein

between the eighth and ninth. Attached to the lateral margins of the eighth ster-

nite are hollow, eylindrieal pointed processes, one on each side, which may be

homologous with the anterior gonapophyses of more primitive insects. Posterior

to these are large swollen, strongly chitinized convex plates (perhaps homologous

with the posterior gonapophyses) one on each side of an elongate cloaea-like median

cavity leading to the oviporus, Posteriorly from these chitinized plates are

curious concertina-like folded protuberances, which may represent rudiments of

the lateral gonapophyses, The posterior and lateral gonapophyses ean be con-

sidered to form an apparatus tor carrying the newly extruded eee towards the

posterior extremity of the body, There is an anal opening situated at the extremity

of the abdomen.

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 17

In the interpretation of the wing veins it is now recognized that the 1A of

Comstock and Needham (1898, 1899, American Naturalist 32, 53) should, follow-

ing Snodgrass (1935, Principles of insect morphology) be regarded as a separate

vein, the post-cubitus, while the following anal veins should be distinguished as

vannal veins. The venatioual diagrams are marked accordingly; those reading

earlier parts of this Revision should make the necessary adjustments.

ZENOPHASSINAE subfam. nov.

ZENOPHASSUS gen, nov,

Plate v, fig. 52; Text-fig, 3-6.

Head with antennae evlindrieal, tapering to apex, composed of about 28 seg-

ments. A supposed post-antennal organ, composed of a single club-shaped mem-

ber present at the anterior angle of the clypeus, Mouth parts with mandibles pre-

wa Ms

Cu.

Post antenna

: ' Gug Cup Ms

‘

clypeus

Fig. 3-6. Zenophassus schamyl (Christoph), male, Kuban, Caucasus, 3, Ventral view of

head. 4. Antenna, 5, Mouth parts from dorsal aspect of hypopharynx. 6. Venation.

sent, rudimentary, but strongly chitinized, some obscure traces of dentition. Hypo-

pharynx large, about as wide as long. Labial palpi two-segmented, oecasionally

seements almost fused, the division then only visible in microscope mounts. Max-

illae present, reduced, at least five visible segments. Posterior legs in male with

specialized tibial tuft. Forewings with Sey present as a strong vein; Ry and Ry

before apex; Rg well separated from Se; Re from Ry near apex; Ry from Ry

before ran vein; Cus a weak vein but reaching to margin; Peu apparently obso-

‘

18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEuM

lete; 1V a sirong vein to posterior angle; 2V absent, Mindwing with Se; present

as a strong vein to costa; Cuy a strong vein; Pea aud two vannal veins apparently

fusing near hase, with 1V extending to hind margin,

Genotype: Hepialus schamyl Christoph. (1888, p. 8309; 1889, p, 198),

Only one species has so far been recognized in this strange genus which seems

to combine one or two specializations usually associated with genera like Phassus

and Sthenopis with some of the most primitive features yet found in the Lepidop-

tera. The latter warrant its separation ag a new subfamily, the Zenophassmae.

The mandibles, apparently non-functional yet rather well developed, and the

maxillae, are features whieh could he expected to oceur in a primitive member

of this arehaie family, although they have oly been noticed as traces in such

species as Fraus polyspila, Nhe supposed post-antennal organ, a single eluh-

shaped segment, has apparently not hitherto been found i a lepidopterous insect,

although such organd have been reeorded for insects of other more primitive orders.

The presence of Sey in both wings is auother archaic feature. This vein is

(e.g. Philpot! 1926) sometimes considered to be absent in the MWepialidae, hat may

be seen in the forewing of members of several genera, its presence or absence being

a useful diagnostic character for genera allied to Sihenopisx, tn no other Hepialid,

so far as they have been examined), does il seem to be so strongly developed as in

this genus.

Deegener and Schaposehnikow (Zeitselim wiss. Zool., bexviii, pp. 245-260,

pl. xiv) haye deseribed scent organs present on the posterior legs of the male of

4. schamyl, while Slastshevskiy (1929, pp. 189-199, fig, 1929a, pp, 39-56 and

1929h, pp, 61-60) has deseribed its biology, ‘The one known species oeenrs in the

Caneasns Mourtaing, the specimens examined heing from Kuban (July), Majkop

(Sept.), and Elisabethpol, :

Subfamily Heprainak,

Enpocurra Felder 1874,

Lnacachita Felder, 1874, ty, pl. Ixxxi, £3, Badoelytia elder, 1875, v, Evkliir., p. 4

(similis). Hypophassus Le Gert, 119, xxv, p. 470 (siynifor), new synonymy.

Antennae sparsely clothed with hairs. eylindrieal, short, tapering, with

about 22 seyments (fig. 7). Labial palpi reduced, composed appareitly of a

siivle sewment, With some indieations uf a second marked by a line aud not

a‘tieulated (fig. 8). Posterior legs of wale with tibiae clothed with a large tuft

of specialized hairs. Forewings with Se, present as a braneh to the costa: often

a lobular expansion opposite S¢, (not evident in genotype); Ry forking with Ry

well before the middle of wing; Ry and KR; forked; Cuy becoming obsolete at one-

half; Pen and 1V anastomosing beyond middle aud extending ty margin; 2V

present near base. Hindwings with Se unbranched, Ry from well before middle.

Genotype: (Hnduchita similis) Pelder = Phussus damor Moore.

The spelling of the generic name as Hnduclita is aeeepted. This appeared on

plate Ixxxi of part IV of Felder’s worls which was published in November, 1874.

The Erklarung’’ published with part V (about July, 1879) gives an alternative

spelling (Bndaeiyta). ny the Zoological Reeord for 1874 and in the supplemen-

tary list of new genera, Endoclita is disgnised under the misprint of Sudoctiter.

The original figure, with generic and specitic name as given in 1874, cali be aceep-

ted asa valid indication according to the International Rules for Zoological women-

clature. (See also Hemiuiing, Generic names of Tlolarectic Butterflies, 1984, p.

8-9). In Pelder’s ''Erklarung”’ the lirief deseription ** Endoclyta me. (Hpiale

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GuHosT MoTHS 19

affine; pedeo validi, corpus longum, al. post angulus internus expressus) simalis

F. ¢ Himalaya (Stoliezka)’’ gives no reason for an alteration in spelling.

Hypophassus is a valid name but it must be regarded as a synonym of Eindo- .

clita unless it is later on established that HZ. signifer can be separated generically

from #. damor.

labial patp

\ ae PCus iV

female 4, 2V

r

forewing:

M.

Cuz Cu, Mas Cu.

10

Fig. 7-10. £ndoclita damor (Moore), female, Mussoorie. 7, Antenna, 8, Labial palpi,

9, Venation. 10. Venation of portion of forewing (much enlarged),

In the species placed in Hypophassus the costa of the forewings at Se; is

dilated, forming a lobular expansion; the condition reaches its climax in #. creni-

limbata Le Cert, from China, but is well marked in numbers of others, including

Ff. signifer. It is absent in the genotype of Endoclita. When present it is about

equally developed in the sexes, and may be of generic significance, but in the ab-

sence of a well-defined line of demarcation it is difficult to apply. If Hypophassus

is regarded as a subgenus it will embrace signifer, erenilimbata, gmelina, and

other, as yet undescribed Hast Indian species possessing a swollen costa; 2. chaly-

beata is an intermediate form. Fourteen species are at present known from

India, Burma, and Ceylon, and several are important timber pests.

Members of a group within this genus, embracing E. punctimargo, buettneria,

metallica, rustica, aurata, and chrysoptera appear to have valid specific differ-

ences separating them, for in addition to rather striking variations in size, wing

proportions, distribution of markings and of ‘‘metallic’’ scalings on the wing,

there are observable differences in the genitalia. Nevertheless the genitalia show

by their similarity that the differences may be of a lesser order than those separat-

ing some other members of the genus. An explanation which occurs to me is that

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MuSEUM

these represent a complex of relatively lately evolved species, developed in the

highlands of the Eastern Himalayas. Other more widely divergent members of

the genus may belong to older forms representing survivals from earlier periods

of species formation. In the Hepialidae, which are generally considered to be

primitive and relatively stable, actively evolving groups may be observed in

several different geographical areas, for example in the mountains of Papua, where

many diverse, and yet related, forms of Oxycanus and of Oenetus appear, in the

south of Australia (Oxycanus, Ocnelus and Oncopera), and in the southern ex-

tremity of Africa,

Key vo Principal Sprcins oF Enpocura.

(Based partly on the genitalia.)

a, Males,

b. Tegumen with a posterior, ventrally directed spine,

c. Spine long, extending beyond rest of tegumen,

d, Highth sternite deeply notched ou posterivr margin .. -. damear

dd. Wighth sternite not deeply notched on posterior margin =... maryinenvlatus

cc. Spine short, extending no further than tegumen .. ma -. Wh per

bb. Tegumen without a posterior, ventrally directed spine.

& Posterior margin of eighth sternite with a median projection .. chalybeata

ce. Posterior margin of cighth sternite without a median projection.

f. Tegumen, in lateral view, with margin entire and conyexly

dilated.

g. Margin of teguinen in ventral view diverging posteriorly.

h, Posterior margin of tegumen strongly transverse

and only slightly exeavated a's -. gmelina

hh. Posterior margin of tegumen strongly excavated purprescens

gg. Margins of tegumen in ventral view, not diverging

posteriorly.

i, Seventh sternite deeply notched on posterior margin — signifer

ii. Seventh sternite transverse on posterior margin .. albosignala

ff, Tegumen in lateral view with only posterior half dilated,

j. Posterior margin of eighth sternite with a median noteh rustiea

jj. Posterior margin of eighth sternite transverse, and

without median notch.

k. Hindwings clothed with metallic scales oo netatlion

kk, Hindwings not clothed with metallic seales.

1, Expanse over 50 mm.

m. Forewings chocolate brown .. a

mm, Horewings yellowish-brown and gol-

den-yellow .. om hh vs ehrysoplera

I Expanse under 50 mm, ate He .. anata

buellnerta

aa, Females,

n. Posterior margin of seventh sternite with deep median noteh .. ve wndulifer

un, Posterior margin of seventh sternite without deep median novell,

o. Anterior gonapophyses with apical spine. Penultimate tergite

with antero-yentral margin produced.

p. Highth sternite narrow, with parallel sides... a o. Ueieroseripta

pp. Highth sternite broad, sides not parallel.

q, Seventh sternite much wider than long... 0 ve plnetimearge

qq. Seventh sternite as long as wide .. oa buettrerta

60, Anterior yonapophyses without apieal spine, Penultimate torgite

with antero-ventral margin not produced.

t Anterior gonapoplyses a broad plate, uot digitiform,

s. Eighth sternite swollen at apex of posteriorly

produced portion,

t. Bighth sternite narrowly spatulute .. .. signifer

tt. Eighth sternite broadly apatulate .. .. Chalyboata

ss, Eighth sternite not swollen at apex,

u. Kighth sternite with margins parallel

sided... avy me te .» damor

uu. Highth sternite swollen near base, not

parallel sided a e's +A

ry. Anterior Ronapopliyses digitiform oot expanded inte

au browd plate as = os ve oe gineline

PULPHUPERCENE

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 21

Enpocuira pAMoR (Moore).

Plate v, fig. 58-54, and Text-fig. 7-14.

Phassus damor Moore, 1859, ii, p.437. Endoclita sinilis Felder, 1874, iv, pl. Ixxxi,

fig. 3. Phassus damor Butler, 1886, vi, p. 31, pl. eix, f. 3; Hampson, 1892, i,

p. 319; Pfitzner and Gaede, 1933, x, p. 843, pl. Ixxvil b.

@ Antennae pale ochreous; head, sides of thorax and abdomen, pale brown;

thorax above slightly paler; hind tibiae ornamented with large tuft of dull och-

reous hairs. Forewings pale subhyaline brown, with a dull golden tinge, orna-

mented with obseure brown, silvery-grey, and white lunular markings; the brown

of wing forms a broad oblique zigzag fascia free from silvery markings across dis-

eoidal area, starting from costa near base, and running across to termination of

Fig. 11-14. Endoclita damor (Moore). 11. Male, Kangra Valley, genitalia, ventral aspect.

12. Male lateral aspect. 13. Female, Mussoorie genitalia, ventral aspect, 14, Female, lateral

aspect,

Cu.» where it is margined below by a clearly defined semi-circle of silvery-white

markings enclosing a brown spot, and thence to costa at four-fifths, after making

an angle to avoid an obscure trianeular wedge of silvery-grey markings at two-

thirds costa. Hindwings greyish-brown, darker towards apex, costal margin just

before apex tinged with brown and bearing two obscure silvery-grey markings.

Expanse 65 min.

2 Sinilar to male, but colour darker olivaccous brown, markings well de-

fined, siinilar to male. Flead and thorax above dull whitish-oliyaceous ; posterior

tibiae without specialized hair tufts. Expanse 68 mm.

Loc. Sikkim: Darjeeling (type a female, expanse 88 mm. labelled **Dar-

jeeling, Paris Exhib. 60-51 E.I.C.’' in British Museum).

United Provinces; Mussoorie. Punjab; Kangra Valley (4.400 ft.), 6. One

male, three females.

The male degeribed is from Kangra Valley, the female from Mussoorie, The

differences in colour exhibited between the few examples examined suggests that,

22 ReEcoRDS OF THE S.A. Museum

like many Australian Hepialidae, there may be considerable range in the shades

of colour present on the wings,

The Mussoorie female, from ovr collection, has been closely compared with

Felder’s type of Endoclita similis in the Tring Museum, The latter is a female,

expanse 63 mm., labelled ‘Lidia Sept. type Endoelita similis, no, 6 in tab. Felder

Coll.”” The no, 6 is evidently an error for ‘‘no, 87°, The genitalia of this type

specimen, as far as may be seen without dissection, agree closely with the one

figured.

The type of damer, of which Butler’s figure is a representation, is also a

female; i is larger than our deseribed specimen, but the markings are similar.

The genitalia ave so badly affeeted with mould that it was not possible to make a

lose examination of them. The figure in Seitz is an inferior copy of Felder’s

plate, and does not greatly resemble the original. Specimens of this apecies are

present tn the British, Trine, and Sonth Australian Museum collections.

The male genitalia, which have been examitied without dissection (fig, 11-12)

have the tegumen, viewed from the side, somewhat evenly convex and smooth mar-

gined, There is a long-pointed cylindrical spine rising from its postero-lateral

margin. The posterior margin of the eighth sternite is deeply notehed, and the

postero-lateral extremities are strongly rounded and chitinized,

The female genitalia, also drawn without dissection (fig. 13-14) show a

rowided triangular seventh sternite, a strongly chitinized, narrow, straight-sided,

end-notehed, well-rounded eighth sternite; curious irregular flat, racket-like an-

terior goulapophyses are present, and the supposed posterior gonapophyses appear

as rounded, subglobose, lateral lobes.

ENpocuira MARGINENOTATUS (Leech).

Plate vii, fig. 68 aud Text-fig. 15,

Phassus marginenotatus Leech, 1898, p, 356,

The type of this species is firured, together with a representation of the male

genitalia for comparison with species such as E, chrysoptera, which is superficially

similar. The type example in the British Museum is from Western China and is

labelled '* Omei-Shan 3,500 feet, wative collector, June and J tly, 1890, Leech Coll,

1900-64".

Tum indebted to Mr, W. H. 'T. Tams for the photograph (pl. vii, fig, 68) and

for his confirmation of my opinion that this species belongs to Hndoclitu, Te

wrote (13th Dee, LT): In marginenatatus, the venation is almost identical

with that of P. signifer. Vein 3A in the forewing seems very weak, but I have

looked at a specimen you labelled Phassus signifer and 1 saw that the condition

was similar, 'here seems to be only a minor point of difference, and that is the

slope of Se, in the forewing. This is much more acute in P. signifer.”

The male genitalia (fig, 15) huve the teguinen, in lateral view, evenly rounded

aul ihere is a posterior, ventrally produced, Jong cylindrical spine of character-

istic shape.

Ewpocntra WNDULIFER (Walker).

Plate v, fig, 55 and Text-fig, 1-2, 16,

Phassus wululifer Walker, 1869, p.102, Phassus signifer Hampson, 1892, i, p.

320 (nec Walker). Phassus damajanti Pfituner and Gaede, 1983, x, p. 843,

pl. ixxvi d.

2 Tead, thorax, abdouwn, and legs dull ochreous brown. Forewings slightly

Aenieat apex, costa not dilated, dull ochreous brown with darker markings; a rich

TINDALE—KEVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 23

brown, highly characteristic undulating mark from near apex to near base; traces

of dull silvery-white marks, a large one at r-m vein, several near junction of M and

Cu, and small ones among M, and near apex. Hindwings dull greyish-brown, a nar-

row ochreous suffusion along termen from apex, most evident at hinder angle,

where it terminates rather abruptly. Expanse 56 mm.

9 Similar to male, larger, silvery-white spot just before ran vein well defined.

Expanse §4 mm,

Loc, United Provinees: near Benares (type, a female; expanse 92 mm., lab-

elled ‘*Benares, John Graham, 1935-288’ in British Museum). Sikkim: Senchal

Range, Darjeeling 8; Assam: Khasia Hills 10 (allotype male [. 18987 mS, Aust,

Museum); Upper Burma: Nanhlaing Res. Shwebo, 9, 10. Seven males, seven

females.

15

N.B.T.

Fig, 15-16, 15, Andoclila marginenolalus (Leech), male genitalia, lateral view, from a

freehand sketch of type in British Museum, 16, Lndoclita wndulifer (Walker), Shwebo, mile

vonituia, dissected, ventral view.

The type of this species was for many years in the Devon and Exeter Albert

Memorial Museum, but in 1935 it passed into the British Museum collection.

The species is a distinct one, and has nothing to do with E. signifer, under

which name Hampson, in the absence of the type, sought to place it,

The type of damajanti, a female expauding 72 mm. from the Khasia ITills, in

the Senckenberg Museum, indicates the name is a direet synonym. Unfortunately

the figure in Seitz is scareely veeoenizable. The example is much worn, but agrees

in markings and in the structure of its venitalia with typical material of #, wadu-

lifer in our collection.

Specimens of BE. wadulifer are preserved at the British, Tring, Senckenberg,

aud South Australian Museums.

The posterior legs of the male of this species, unlike other members of the

venns, lack the specialized tuft of golden-coloured tibial plumes. It thus stands

a little apart from its congeners, but it seems undesirable to use this secondary

male sex character for generic separation, especially as in other respects it is too

¢lose {oO Warrant separation,

The male genitalia (fig. 16) have the tegunien divided into a sub-quadrate,

anterior, dilated portion with smooth edwes, and a separate strongly chitinized,

ventrally produeed posterior spiny process, which docs not project beyond the

a4 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

line of the rest of the tegumen; in dissected genitalia the harpes are seen as simple

digitiforim lobes, swollen at the apex, and bearing sensory hairs; the vineulum is

of usual form,

The female genitalia are drawn in slightly diagrammatic nanner in fig, 1-2,

which are composites built ap from observations on two specimens. The seventh

sternite is sub-rectangular with a deep notch on the posterior margin; the eighth

sternite has its posterior margin produced into 4n acute median spine; the anterior

yonapophyses ave angled spine-like processes; the posterior gonapophysis is a fat

lamellate member, which is followed by several less well-chitinized folded plates

forming the lateral gonapophyses. The following reared specimens haye been

submitted for determination by the Forest Research Institute, Dehra Din:

WR, Lie No, hoc. Srx, LAwn. Hosy TREE.

a7 Darjeeling Male 2nd August, 123 Alnus nepalensix

V7 Shwebo, Burnt 4 3rd October, Wt Buetineria pilose

18 ” ‘fi 7 Sth October, 1936 Buetineria pilosa

19 v, it mi lat October, 1936 Puvlineria pilosa

20) n iy 53 29th Septemher, 1936 Buettreria pilose

28 ‘ 8 Female 12th Octaher, 1936 Buettneria pilosa

26 ’ ” ” 28th September, 1935 Callfearpia urboren

ENboCnita CHALYBEATA (Moore),

Plate v, fig, 98-59 and Text-fig. 17-20.

Phassus chalybeatus Moore, 1879, p. 412. Phassus signifer Lampson, 1892, i, p,

820, fig. 219 (partim).

4 Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs pale yellow; posterior legs with tibiae

ornamented with large tutits of ochreons hairs. Forewings with costa not markedly

swollen at Se; ; yellowish-brown with white snffusions; a series of six brown spots

along costa; the middle of wing is occupied by a large brown avea whieh partly

encloses, al one-third, a sub-eostal paler area, posterior to vein Cuz), whieh is suf-

fused whitish-ball; a large brown area in diseoidal region and another from costa

near apex to Cuy) ave margined with obscure arenate marks; there is a white

streak at ram vein and traces of another just beyond it. Tindwings pale flesh-

cologred, with traces of a paler marl on costa before apex. Expause 80 mm.

@ Slightly paler and duller in colons than male, markings slightly more de-

lined, brown areas reduced, and white sutfnsed areas somewhat larger; the white

spot parallel torn vein larger, with traces of another on each side of it, Kxpanse

B2 qi.

Loe, Sikkim: Darjecling (type, a female, expanse 83 min,, labelled '' Dar-

Jil, Moore Coll, 4-106" in British Museum, Assam: Khasia Wills 3 (allotype

male, 1, 18935 in 8. Aust, Musenm), Sylhet 3. Burma; Namtu 5. Sandoway 4,

Katha 4. 8, Tonogeo 5, Five males, seven females,

Moore's type, when examined in 1986, was found to have lust the abdomen ;

the Darjecliig female example deseribed herein compares so well in other respects

hut the genitalia of i) may be regarded as typical of the species.

The example figured by Hampson as the male of 2. sigafar may be a male of

(his species. It has nothing to do with true #. signifer. Untortunately Hamp-

son’s specnuen could not be found when exumining the British Museum collections.

It appears desirable therefore to describe as allotype male of Ey chalybeata an

oxatple from Assam, Which van be confidently associated with the type female,

and the genitalia of which may be studied.

Pip, 18 is of the apex of the abdomen of the neo-allotype male, and fig. 17

shows a slide preparation of the genitalia of another exanuple from Katha

(Mohnyin). The genitalia are seen to have the eighth sternite shield-shaped aud

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 25

the posterior margin slightly concave on each side of the middle, which is slightly

acutely terminated. The tegumen bears many serrations, rather evenly set and

posteriorly directed ; the harpes are reduced to simple, small, irregular, hair-beset

digitiform processes. The ultimate tergite is bluntly rounded.

Fig. 17-20. Endoclita chalybeata (Moore). 17. Male, Mohnyin, genitalia, dissected, ventral

aspect. 18. Male, yentral aspect in situ. 19. Pemale, Darjeeling, genitalia, ventral aspect.

20, Female, Jatera! aspect.

From £. signifer, with which it has been confused, the male differs widely in

the form of the posterior margin of the eighth sternite, in the differently shaped

tegumen, in the absence of a carina on the harpes, as well as in the blunter appear-

ance of the ultimate tergite.

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The female venitalia (fig. 19-20) have been drawn from the deseribed gpeci-

men, without dissection, The posterior margin of the seventh sternite is produced

into astrongly ehitinized spatalate process whieh is slightly coneaye on its ventral

surface, and in lateral view is seen to be acutely pointed, The anterior PONApO-

physes are rounded plates; the posterior ones are carinate ronnded lubes, while

the ultimate tergite forms a double hood over the genitalia.

In the largest female examples examined, the eighth sternite appears to be

hypertrophied as compared with more typical examples, "his ig probably a ease

of relative enlargement dite to positive heterogonie erowth of the female eenitalin,

A pupal shell of a female of 2. chalybeata has been preserved, but unfortu-

nately lacks the facial mask; it is 67 mm, in length, 11 mm, in diameter, and of

typical TMepialid torn,

A fertilized example of the egg of this species was found attached at the open-

ing of the vviporus of the deseribed female example. When relaxed in dilote

caustic soda it measured 0-58 mn, in diameter, was spherical, smooth, and slate-

grey in eolowur,

E. chalybeata is of importance as a pest. of young teak saplings, and hag heen

reared From Tectona grandis and Gmelina urbarea,

Up to the present this is the oly species known to attack teak wood in Burma

aud Assim. The superficially similar but generically distinct Sahyadrassus mala-

buricus (Moore, 1879, p. 40, new combination ) is ulso a teak feeder, bul is strictly

eottfined to the Western Chats.(2)

Ai present a belt of dry country some 600 miles wide divides the areas oecen-

pied by the two forms. Only ove specics of Iepialid is common to both regions,

and it is evident that the separation between the Hepialid faunas of the Himalayas

and the Western Ghats must have been along one, Lt is of some academic interest

{) speculate why these (avo superficially sinvilar species, both teak feeders, should

be so alike awd yet structurally distinct.

Tf the loss of Sey in Sakyadrassus malibarieus is a apecialization we may cun-

clude that £. chalybeate represents more nearly an ancestral form (or arehetype)

from which both 8. walaburivus and EB. chalybeata may have been developed , and

that the time interval since the two faunules last commingled has been sifficiently

long for differences of generie rank to have become established, { haye been in-

formed that this is also true of other borers of teak: Malayan and Himalayan

species do not extend into the Peninsula. It would he interesting to see whether

some differences may tot also Gecur in the host plant species of teak inhabiting

these two areas; the systematic botanist seems at present to regard then as beng

specifically identical.

IENHOCLLUA GMELINA Sp. Tby.

Pate vii, Ay. 72 and Text-fig. 21-22.

é Heal, thorax, anterior lees, and abdomen dark eveyish-htowi, sides of

thorax black, fringes of anterior legs und the median anil posterior lees brownish-

black ; posterior legs with an ochreotis tibial tuft. Morewings broad, faleate, costal

margin strongly expanded at Scy; brown with darker markings and suffiusions, a

series of about six markings along eosta; a very dark pateh near base of discaidal

area enclosing two silversy-white spots the larger of which is bi-sected by My .0;

posteriorly from this and just above and beyond distal jnnetion of LA and 2A is

a V-shaped black spot from which a dari suffused svea extends to the paw vein

(#) Sahyadrassus ia x new genus, in Which Se, of forewing ia alent; the forewings have

Ry separate from Ro; Ry and R; branching before ov at the in voin and Pen forming a Y fork

with the vannial vein, Genotype Phavyne malabnricus Moore, The genus Will be more fully

described in Pav, V,

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 27

where there is a cluster of three silvery-white spots; pale ochreous spots of small

size lie in two irregular series parallel to and inwards from termen, while a dark

suffused longitudinal streak lies between R; and My, and runs nearly to termen

Where it terminates at a small silvery-white spot. Hindwings wide, short, very

shortly subfaleate at apex, greyish-brown with traces of brown markings along

termen and at the apex. Forewings beneath with costal markings as above; those

of hindwing even more prononneed than above, Expanse 90 mm.

2 Larger than male; markings and colour similar; the black V-shaped mark

of forewing broken into a series of three spots, two of them conjoined. Expanse

122 mm,

NBT.

Pig. 91-22. Endoclita gmelina Tindale. 21. Paratype male, Panyhai, genitalia, ventral

aspect, 22. Allotype female, Panyhai, genitalia, ventral aspect,

Loc, Burma; Panyhai Res. Namtu 5 (type, a male, 22 May, 1931, and allo-

type female, 10 May, 1931, colleeted by M. TH. Desai, in British Museum ; paratype

male, 13 May, 1931, I. 18950 in 8. Aust. Museum), Two males, one female. The

three known examples were reared from Gmelina arborea at Namtu.

Another species sometimes found in Gimetina wood is BE. chalybeatu. From

{his it differs widely in proportions, in the colouring of the wings, and in the form

of the genitalia. The species is apparently not close to any other deseribed one.

Tn both sexes of this species the costal expansion at Se, is very marked. In

this character it is closest to £. signifer, from which it is otherwise distinet ; it may

also be compared with ZL. crenilimbuta trom China.

The male genitalia, drawn without dissection (fig. 21) have the vinenlum

furnished with cylindrical, posteriorly directed processes, one on each side; the

tegumen is a curious shovel-shaped object, wide posteriorly, narrow anteriorly,

with its ventral margins strongly chitinized and rather irregularly formed. There

is a strongly chitinized lateral piece on the outer margin of the tegumen, Super-

28 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

ficially the tegumen is similar to that of EZ. purpurescens, but it markedly different

in details.

The female genitalia (fig. 22) are extraordinarily different from those of

other described members of the genus; the seventh sternite is transverse, the an-

terior margin bent into a notched fold (which may be accentuated in the dried

specimen) while the posterior margin is slightly convex; the eighth sternite is a

convex rounded median process which appears to lie ventrally from a broad, much

larger chitinized plate, concave in ventral view and with the side portions of its

posterior margin bent over; this may be a further portion of the eighth sternite;

the anterior gonapophyses are digitiform processes, angled before the apex and

with the lateral margins beset with stout hairs (as on the internal margins of the

male harpes of many species of Hepialidae). To satisfactorily determine the

homologies of the posterior parts of the genitalia it would be desirable to have

further material for dissection.

ENDOCLITA PURPURESCENS (Moore).

Plate v, fig. 56-57, and Text-fig. 23-26.

Phassus purpurescens Moore, 1883, ii, p. 156, pl. exliii, f. 4. Phassus purpurascens

(sic) Hampson, 1892, i, p. 319. Phassus purpurascens Pfitzner and Gaede,

1933, x, p. 848, pl. [xxviii d.

g Head, thorax, abdomen, and anterior and median legs dull brown with a

faint purple tone, posterior legs with tibiae clothed with tufts of deep orange-

coloured hair. Forewings dull brown with a purple tone (probably somewhat

brighter in freshly-captured specimens) ; faint brown lunulate markings cover

ereater part of wing, except in a broad, brown, irregular band across diseoidal

region and a less well-defined strip running across from four-fifths costa to near

hind margin; a yellowish-white spot just inside r-m vein and two minute ones

external to it; another near base of wing; a series of minute black spots along

costa, and several others near the posterior margin. Hindwings slightly darker

than forewings, unicolorous greyish-brown with a faint purple tinge. Wings

beneath pale uniform greyish-brown. Expanse 94 mm.

? Markings similar to male; the broad oblique brown band across discoidal

region of forewing terminates in a clear-cut line near hinder margin with an L-

shaped angular band of very pale purplish-brown; the posterior legs are not orna-

mented with orange plumes, and are concolorous with the other pairs. Expanse

118 mm,

Loc. Ceylon (type, a female; expanse 112 mm., described as a male, labelled

‘*Phassus purpurescens Moore type’’ 52-62, in British Museum) ; Punduloya 5,

6; Maskeliya 1; Haputale 1; Dimbula 4. Four males, 10 females.

The species appears to be confined to Ceylon; the Perak record by Hampson

is doubtful. Specimens are to be found in the British, Tring, Colombo, and South

Australian Museums. Examples identified as this species at the Berlin Museum

belong to other species.

Moore’s type proves to be a female; at the time of its first description it was

unique, His figure differs from the type only in the greater emphasis placed on

the costal markings of the forewing ; this is probably an artist’s error for, in other

respects, it is a good figure of the type specimen. The figure in Seitz Macrolepi-

doptera (le. pl. Ixxviiid) does not resemble the type in any particular, and may

apply to one of the numerous Malayan species of this genus.

The venation of the male agrees closely with that of E. damor. Sc, is present

in the forewing, but absent in the hindwing. There is no expansion of the costa

at Sey. The posterior legs of the male are clothed with a large tuft of specialized

orange-coloured hairs; these are absent in the female.

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 29

N.B,T.

Fig. 23-26. Endoctita purpurescens (Moore), 23. Male, Punduloya, genitalia, yentral

aspect. 24, Male, lateral aspect. 25, Female, Ceylon, genitalia, ventral aspect, extremity broken

off. 26. Female, lateral aspect.

From an oblique angle the hindwing appears to be tinged with a purple

sheen, hence the name purpurescens; this feature is not nearly so well displayed

as in some of species from Malaya, which have been confused with it.

[ am indebted to the Director of the Colombo Museum (P. P. Deraniyagala)

for study material.

The male genitalia (fig. 23-24) have the posterior margin of the eighth ster-

nite coneave and further notehed in the middle; the tegumen, viewed from the

side, is evenly rounded, with its entire margin armed with fine teeth, a line of less

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

evident serrations forms a carina on outer surface of the te¢umen; this line fares

away posteriorly. The harpes are not apparent in the undissected specimen.

The female genitalia, in the one example available for drawing (fig, 25-26)

have the seventh sternite somewhat like an inverted shield, the posterior margin

being concave on cach side of the middle; the eighth sternite is large and bulbous

with a median ventral groove; it is also notched along the side; the bases of what

are probably the anterior gonapophyses are visible and appear to he dilated to-

wards their apices.

Enpoeiita siawmur (Walker),

Plate vi, fig, 60-61 and Text-fig. 27-30,

Phassus signifer Walker, 1856, vii, p, 1568: Butler, 1386, vi, p. 30, pl. eix, fie, 2:

Hampson, 1892, i. p. 320 (partim). Hypophassus stqnifer Le Gert, 1919, xxv,

p. 470. Phassus signifer Pfitaner, 1912, Seitz Maerolep, ii, p. 438, pl. liva;:

1934, x, p, B42 (partim).

a Head, thorax, anterior and median legs ochreous brown, abdomen dark

greyish-brown, ochreous-tinged at apex, posterior legs reduced in size, ochreous,

irnamented with specialized tuft of bright ochreous hairs, Porewings with costa

swollen at 8e;, apex sub-taleate, ochreous-brown with whitish-brown suffusious,

seven roimded brown spots along costa, arranged in three pairs and marwined war-

rowly with black and pale brown rings; a broad V-shaped pateli of brown with its

apices touching Se at one-quarter and at three-fifths and enclosing, near cach apex

of the V, one or more white spots, narrowly margined with dark brown: suh-

terminal and hind marginal areas paler, marked with transverse brown lines be-

tween the veins, and with obseure, usually paired tiny black spots. THindwings

dark greyish brown on basal half, costal margin with pattern as on forewings,

termen dull brown with traces of the forewing pattern, Expanse 105 mm,

@ Markings somewhat as in male but rather more conspievous; ground colowr

dull olivaceous-hrown with pale brown areas well defined, Hindwings with base

suffused with gveyish-brown pobeseence, apex marked as in forewing ; these mark-

ings merge posteriorly into a series of obscure dull grevish-brown patehes running

parallel to termen. Expanse 120 mm.

Lac, Assam: Sylhet (type, a femule; expanse 154 mm., labelled ‘Silhet, 47—

367’ in British Museum); Khasia Hills (allotvpe male 1, 18934 in S, Aust,

Museum) ; Jaintia Hills; Cherrapunji, Nine males, 11 feiales,

The swollen costa at Se, of forewing is noteworthy, and reappears in several

Indian, Malayan, and Chinese species. If sub-generie division is desired, this

species may be placed in TZypophassus.

The figvn'ed male is the allotype, aud the temale is a second exan ple from,

Khasia Hills also in the 8, Aust, Museuin collection,

Walker’s type of this apecies, of which Butler's figure is a good veidering, is

a female from Sylhet; oar example is smaller but agrees closely in other details,

The other specimens associated with the type of E. sigmfer by Walker himself are

not con-specific, and there has always been considerable doubt and eornfusion about

the identity of the species, A review of the earlier litevature shows that af ane

lime or other most of the commun Oriental species of the composite Phassus group

have been regarded as synonyms under the name.

E. signifer is listinet from all other members of the zenus by the combination

of the sub-faleate fovewings, repetition of portion of the patteri of the forewing

ou the hindwing, and hy the peculiar genitalia, Hanpson appears to have been

confused about this species, and the figure given by him agrees best with that of

the male af BE. chalybeata.

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 31

Fig. 27-30. Endoclita signifer (Walker). 27. Allotype male, Khasia Hills, genitalia, ventral.

aspect. 28. Allotype, lateral aspect. 29, Type female, Sylhet, genitalia, ventral aspect. 30. Type

female, lateral aspect.

In Seitz Macrolepidoptera, Pfitzner has copied Butler’s figure of the type

female. Following Hampson, he and Gaede have grouped as races several rather

widely different Oriental species, some belonging to the Hndoclita series without

the costal swelling, and others belonging to the subgenus Hypophassus in which

the costa is expanded at Se;. It is the writer’s present opinion that EL. signifer is

a species confined to Assam, and that no races have yet been established to exist

outside India.

The male genitalia, examined in situ in the allotype male (fig. 27-28) have

the harpes as a simple, slightly angled, smooth, cylindrical process with traces of a

32 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

carina on the ventral surface, The tezumen in lateral view is evenly convex, the

margin slightly bent outwards and irregularly serrated; serrations fine; the pos-

terior margin of the eighth sternite is excavated in wide V-fashion.

The species is represented in the British, Senckenbere, Tring, and South Ans-

tralian Museums.

The genitalia of the type female have been drawn, without dissection (fig, 29-

30). The seventh sternite has the posterior margin transverse and searcely

notched in the middle. The eighth sternite is produced into a long, tapering, up-

turned process ; its ventral side is grooved apically where it ends in a slight spatu-

late swelling. Nearer the base the process is seen to be produced laterally as a thin

membrane which is folded into several transverse rugae. The anterior gonapo-

physes take the form of flat lateral plates, with sinnate apical mareins, which

partly overlie the rugose part of the eighth sternite. The posterior gonapophyses

are large, strongly chitinized, rounded, swollen plates.

ENbDOCLITA ALBOSIGNATA sp. nov.

Plate vi, fig, 62 and Text-fig. 31-82.

a Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs pale brownish-fawn ; posterior tibiae with

orange-brown tufts of hairs. Forewines brownish-tawn with paler sulfusions and

traces of numerous scattered white spots faintly margined with dark brown; a

31

Fig, 31-32. Endoclita albosignata Vindale. 31. Type, a male, unique, Assam, genitalia,

ventral aspect. 32. Male, lateral aspuet.

N.B.T,

white inverted T-shaped mark along M, and r-m yein, Windwings dull greyish-

brown with costal margin and termen brownish-fawn. Expause 68 mm.

Loc. Assam: type, a male, unique I, 18942, in 8. Aust. Museum.

This species differs markedly from its congeners. In the general form of the

tegumen it is nearest to &. signifer, from which it differs in the absence of the

costal expansion of forewing and in many other characters. With its rather nar-

row wings it is at first glance like Sahyadrassus albofasciatus (Moore, 1879, p.

413), but the presence of Se, in forewing and an examination of the genitalia im-

mediately separates them.

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 33

The male genitalia, drawn without dissection (fig. 31-32) show the eighth

sternite with the posterior margin tranusyerse, the tegumen, in lateral view

expanded, and with the auterior two-thirds evenly convex, the posterior portion

somewhat abruptly angled. and the ventral margin slightly turned outwards and

freely and evenly serrated; in ventral view the sides of the tegumen are seen to

be swollen, smooth and with a lateral carina; the harpes are present, digitiform

and clothed with reversed hairs on their internal faces,

ENDOCLITA RUSTICA Sp. HOV.

Plate vi, fig. 68, 66, and Text-fig. 33,

8 Head and thorax rich brown, antennae and legs darker; abdomen dull

grey; posterior tiblae with ochreous yellow tufts. Forewines rich brown with

golden-brown suffusions and traces of many short transverse dark brown streaks

between the veins; traces of some white spots along termen and along outer half

N.B,T.

Pig. 38-34, 38. Endoclita rustica Tindale, type, a male, Shillong, genitalia, oblique aspect.

i4. #. metallica Tindale, type, a male, Darjeeling, genitalia, oblique aspeet.

of 1V; traces of a golden-brown snffusion in a band from near base to termen

at one-half. Tlindwings dull grey, at apex narrowly tipped brown. Expanse

oG mm.

Loc, Assain: Shillone 9 (type, a imale, 1. 18943, in 8S. Aust. Museum) Khasia

Ihilis (paratype male in Tring Musenm), 2 males.

This rather distinet species, with its rich chocolate brown forewings and dull

ervey hindwings, is one of a group of allied species inhabiting the wet rain forests

of Upper Assam and the Tlimalayas, and is more especially related Lo

EB. chrysoptera, from Sikkim. Fvom the latter it differs in the narrower fore-

wings, different coloured hinchwings, and in the shape of the eighth sternite,

The male genitaha (fig. 53) have the posterior margin of the eighth sternite

concave, and slightly notched in the middle; the tegumen has the posterior half

dilated into a subreetangular lamella whose margin is serrated.

34 RECORDS oF THE S.A. MusEUM

ENDOCLITA METALLICA sp. nov.

Plate vii, fiz, 71 and Text-fig, 54.

é Head, thorax, and legs dark chocolate brown, posterivr tibiae with orange-

yellow tufts; abdomen dnll brown. Forewings choeolute brown with traces of

darker transverse bars between the veins; two large dark brown suffused spots,

oue along course of My before ram and one just afters a while sealed triangular

spot at jimetion of rm vein and M,; from a very oblique angle two opalescent.

blue fasciae appear, ihe first from near apex to hind margin at fourtitths, the

second from costa at three-fourths parallel to its as far as uy); the bind margin

broadly tinged with same bue. Hindwings greyish-bronze with a strong metallic

lustre, Bxpanse 54 mm.

Loe, Sikkim: Darjeeling (type, a male, ‘‘ Darjeeling No, 69 Atkinson Coll.”'

in Tring Museum ; paratype male, ditto, L. 18944 in 8. Aust, Museum), 2 males.

I am indebted to Dr, K, Jordan for permission to deseribe this species; the

two known examples have had a varied history, having been incorrectly identified,

at various times, as Phassus punctimargo Hampson and us P. aboe Moore. They

passed from the Atkinson collection to Elwes and thenee to Tring, The speeies

is related lo EL. rustica, but differs iv the dull metallic bronze lustre of the sealing

of the hindwings, in the dark choeolate colour of forewings and in the relatively

transverse eighth sternite as well as the similar, but differently armed tezumen.

The paratype has the forewings darker than the type, but is otherwise similar,

The male genitalia (fig. 84) have the eighth sternite transverse and its pos-

terior margiu straight; the tegumen has the posterior half dilated into a lamella,

portion of the serrated ventral margin of which is bent. outwards; the serrations

and denticules on the anterior half of tegumen appear itt several rows.

ENDOCLIA BUETTNERIA 8p, nV,

Plate vii, fig. 75 and Text-fig, 84-36,

3 Head, thorax, and legs dark brown, abdomen greyish-brown; posterior

tibiae with a small oehreous tuft of hairs. Morewings relatively short, apparently

rounded at apex (slighthy injured in both specimens available for study), eosta

straight without any expansion at Sey; davk brown with paler brown indefinite

markings and suffusious which are still brighter near apex, in patches along costa,

and in the middle of the wing; traces of a white spot at van vein and two taint

brown lines of suffision from costa to bind margin, the first extending from just

before apex to hinder angle, and the other from three-fourths costa to three-fifths

hind imargin—these, when viewed from an oblique angle, glow with seiutillating

ereebish-blie metallic colour, while from the same angle traces of similar colon

may be seen to rm alone the hind margin. Windwings dull greyish-brown with

traces of a dull bronze lustre. FExpanse 62 nim,

® Larger than iale, with colour markings, so far as preserved, similar to

those of males. Hxpanse (estimated) 90 mam,

Loc. Buta: Nanhlaing Res. Shwebo. (type, a male, Tih September, 19236,

and allotype female, 25th September, 1956, collected by R. Ia Oh, in British

Museum; paratype inale, expanse 68 mm., 24th September, 1986, 1, 18938 in

5S. Aust. Museum).

The male genitalia are drawn without) disseetion from the igpe example (fig.

40); the posterior margin of the eighth sternite transverse, the tewtinen with

the anterior half strongly chitinized and its ventral margin serrated, the posterior

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 35

half expanded into an angulate, laterally concave lobe, also strongly chitinized,

and with the margin serrated ; the ventral margin of this lobe is transverse or even

slightly coneave in outline when viewed from the side.

The female genitalia (fig. 36) have the seyenth sternite more than three-

fourths as long as wide, the eighth sternite is a rounded projection, whose sides

are not constricted ; and there is a swollen @lobose anterior portion largely con-

cealed below the seventh sternite; the anterior gonapophyses are acute spines,

rather dilated near base; in other respects the genitalia are similar to those of

BE. punctimargo.

N.B.T.

Fig. 35-36. Endoclita buetineria Tindale. 35. Type, a male, Nanhlaing, genitalia, oblique

aspect. 36. Allotype female, Nanhlaing, genitalia, ventral aspect.

The three known specimens were reared from Buecttneria pilosa and were

submitted for identification by the Forest Research Institute at Dehra Dun, who

have requested that the type specimens be lodged in the British Museum.

This species is allied to 2. punctimargo, of which only the female is well

known. It differs from that species in its darker and different markings, and.

in the form of the genitalia. The wider anterior gonapophyses, differently pro-

portioned seventh sternite, and the wider eighth sternite (which is not constricted

as in §). punectimargo) are good distinguishing characters. The males resemble

E, metallica, but are larger, have well-defined transverse markings on fore-

wings, lack the dull metallic mirror-like surface to hindwings, and have the ventral

margin of the posterior half of the tegumen straight or slightly concave rather

than evenly rounded as in that species.

36 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

ENDOCLITA CHRYSOPTERA Sp. nov.

Plate vi, fig. 67 and Text-fie, 37,

¢ Head, thorax, abdomen, and anterior and median legs dull yellowish-

brown, posterior legs clothed with tuft of dull ochreous specialized hairs. Kore-

wines golden-yellow with pale echocolate-brown markings; costa with a series of

seven well-defined wedge-shaped brown marks; a broad band of brown (oeea-

sionally fleckecl with minute patches of intensely white scales) extending from

base of wing obliquely to inner margin at one-half, thence irregularly towards

upex, where it is dilated to form an irregularly cireular brown bloteh just before

apex; the large brown area is flecked with somewhat larger patches of white

seales, a larger group thun usnal beine associated with the junetion of mm and

My; subeostal area froin base to one-half golden-yellow with obseure brown

markings; subterminal area dull golden-yellow with faint brown fleeks and

inarkings; termen with a narrow band of intensely blue-white scales between the

veins. Hindwings rather uniformly pale fawn ; apex tinged ochreous, termen with

white scales between the veins. Expanse 63 mm.

ss

N.BT chon

Fig, a7-a9. a7, Budochita chrysoplera Tindale, type, a male, unique, Senchal Range, geni-

talia, oblique aspect. 38-39 H. aurata (Tlumpson). 48, Male, Bernardmyo, genitalia, ventral

aspect. 39. Male, a slightly oblique lateral view.

Loc. Sikkim: Senchal Range, Darjecling 8 (type, a male, unique, reared

August 3, 1923, from Machilus edalis, by J, C. M. Gardner; in British Mvseum).

Fig. 37 is an oblique view of the apex of the abdomen of the type male the

genttalia of which have been drawn without dissection. The eighth sternite is

rather evenly concave on the posterior margin and the tegumen is evenly and

minutely serrated, the anterior hall is straight and the posterior half is strongly

cilated as a rounded rather flattened disc. The harpe is a simple digititorm

process. This species is similar in general appearance and markings to

A. marginenotatus (Leech, 1898) from Omei-Shan, China (at 3,500 feet in June or

July), but differs in having the dark brown and golden-yellow areas differently

disposed. The genitalia also are quite distinct, for the tezumen of the Chinese

species is semi-circular in outline when viewed from the side and the posterior

extremity of the tegumen is furnished with a long downwardly directed eylindrical

process on each side, This is more than twice as long as the similar one in found

KE, undulifer. in EF. chrysoptera there is no trace of such a spine,

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MoTHS i7

Enpoenrra AURAYA (Hampson ).

Plate vii, fig. 69 and Text-fig, 38-39.

Phassts auratus Wainpson, 1892, Fauna Brit. Ind, Moths. i, p, 821,

Phassus auratus Pfitzner and Gaede, 1933, p. 848, pl, Isxvi d.

@ Tlead, thorax aud anterior and inedian legs brown, abdomen paler, pos-

terior les with brownish-yellow tibial tufts, Forewings rounded at apex, costa

straight, without swelling at Se, ; brown, with obscure darker brown transverse

markings; a sub-metallic volden suffusion along basal half of costa and another

at apex; traces of two dull grey fasciae parallel to fermen in outer half of wing;

when viewed from an oblique angle the hind marginal third of wing, the two

fasciae and a subeostal patch glow with an opalescent blne suffusion, Tind-

wings subhyaline, greyish-fawn, Expanse 44 mm,

Loc. Burma: Bernardinyo, 5,500-7,000 feet (type, a male, expanse 39 mun.,

labelled *‘May, 1890, W, Doherty, Collection I. J. Elwes’? in Tring Museum).

Assian: Khasia Hills, 4 mates,

The type expands only 39 nun, not 42 twin., as indicated in the original

description. The specimen deseribed above was taken with the type example aud

agrees closely with it,

The figure in Seitz is based on an example in the Senekenberg Museum doubt-

fully identified with this species; it is almost unrecognizable, for the markings

are misplaced and the colouring is poor. The species is not a common one, and

nothing is known of its life history. Its small size, rather angwate wings, and

inarkings ave distinctive.

The male genitalia (fig. 88-39) have the eighth sternite with the posterior

margin transverse; the tegumen strongly chitinized; anterior half not dilated,

and straight-margined, posterior half expanded into a semicireular portion; the

whole of the ventral margin of tegumen is serrated with laterally set small blunt

teeth.

ENDOCLITA MICROSCRIVTA ap. nov.

Text-fie, 40--41,

@ Head, thorax, and legs brownish-fawn, abdomen slightly darker. Fore-

wings browiish-lawn, almost completely covered with fine curved transverse lines

between the veins; traces of four darker e@ostal marks, the first at one-half

followed by three smaller ones towards apex; traces of several lines of faint

white spots between the veins, the first from near apex to hind margin at four-

fifths, the second parallel and internal to it, from costa at fiye-sixths to My ; 4 faint

series also from r-m vein to hind margin at one-hal!, and a zigzag series between

there and the base. Hindwing erey, the apex and termen narrowly tinged with

fawn. Expanse 88 nm,

Loc, Madras: (type, tiniqne, T. 18939 in S. Aust. Museum),

The female genitalia, drawn without dissection (fig, 40-41) have the seventh

sternite trausverse, the posterior margin sinuate, projecting in the middle; the

eighth sternite is a conspicuous parallel-sided process, its posterior extremity is

entire but with a depression before the apex ; in lateral view if is seen to be slightly

upturned at apex. ‘The anterior gonapophysis is a broad plate with the apex

drawn out into a spinous proeess; the penultimate tergite has ventral processes

projecting towards the midline.

38 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This is the only true Hndoelita so far recorded from the east coast of penin-

sular India; one species is known from Ceylon. It is a distinet form. The gveni-

talia are characteristic, with an eighth sternite which is nearest in form to species

such as KH. damor, but with anterior gonapophyses more like those of

E. punelimargo and its allies.

NLB.T.

Fig. 40-41. Endoclita microscripta Tindale. 40. Female, Madras, genitalia, ventral aspect.

41. Female, lateral aspect.

ENpocLiTa PUNCTIMARGO (Swinhoe),

Text-fig, 42-43,

Phassus punctimarga Swinhoe (Hampson m.s.), 1892, i, p. 291 (November).

Hampson, 1892, i, p, 319 (December). Pfitzner and Gaede, 1933, x, p. 843.

9 Head, thorax, and lees dull reddish-brown, abdomen dull greyish-fawn,

Forewings reddish-brown with faint traces of yellowish-brown on costa; two

parallel greyish-white post-median fasciae parallel to termen from costa, near

apex, to posterior angle; each of these is bordered internally by a wide band

of scales which, when viewed from an oblique angle, haye a dull metallic sheen,

Tlindwings dull greyish-fawn. Expause 108 mm.

Loc, Sikkim: Darjeeling, Senchal Range 8. 4 females.

Superficially examined, females of this species appear to bear considerable

resemblance to Newina aboe (Moore), und in the absence of autheutically deter-

mined females of NV. aboe and of males of E. punctimargo it might at first appear

that they were merely the sexes of one species. Closer examination shows that

in B. punctimaryo Cus of forewing is connected to 1V by a strong oblique vein

Peu, InN. aboe this is absent. It therefore seems certain that they are distinct.

Swinhoe anticipated Hampson’s name (he has a month’s priority). Both

authors described the same specimens, and at least three examples were known to

them. To of these, both females, haye been examined by the present writer. One

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 39

example, 92 mm. in expanse, labelled ‘‘ India, No, 1349, Phassus punctimargo

Hampson”’, is in the Oxford University Museum, and is the example listed as

specimen ‘‘a’’ in Swinhoe’s catalogue. The other female is in the British Museum ;

it is 108 mm. in expanse, and is labelled ‘‘75-25 Phassus punctimargo Hampson

type female’, Swinhoe stated that his type was in the Elwes collection. On the

evidence, the type is the example, expanding 54 mm., whieh Swinhoe rewarded as

a male, Unfortunately this specimen has not been traced, hence determinations

ean only be based on the two female examples associated with it. The British

Museum example, 108 mm., may be regarded as the allotype female. Sketehes of

the genitalia of the Oxford female were prepared. The example described and

figured in the present paper is closely similar. It isa rather battered female from

the Forest Researeh Institnte at Dehra Dum, labelled ‘‘Senchal Range, Darjiling,

6th August, 1923’', and reared by Mr. J. C, M. Gardner from Cryptomerta

jupomed.

Fig. 42-43, Endoelita punctimaryo (Swinhoe). 42. Female, Senchal Range, genitalia, vent-

ralaspect. 43, Female, lateral aspect.

Female genitalia (drawn without dissection from the above-mentioned Sen-

chal Rauge specimen, fig, 42-48) have the seventh sternite swollen at base, and

drawn out into a process whieh is constricted in the middle and at first down-bent,

but upturned at apex; in ventral view the process is seen to be expanded into a

wide spadelike appendage; the anterior gonapophyses are sinple, eylindrieal,

tapered processes, the posterior gonapophyses are seni-ciretlar, laterally com-

pressed lamellae overlying and slightly posterior to the eighth sternite. The inner

told of the ultimate tergite has its lateral margin drawn out and covered with ir-

regularly disposed hairs so that from one oblique angle it appears as a digitiform

process.

Examples of this species are to be found in the British, Tring, Oxford Univer-

sity, and South Australian Museums.

NEVINA gen. nov.

Male with antennae simple, ¢ylindrieal, tapering gradually towards apex,

composed of about 22 segments, each segment armed with a few setae; palpi two-

40 RECORDS OF THe S.A. Muskum

segmented, each about twice as long as wide. Potewings with Se, present; Ry

from before middle of wile; Re from Rg; RK, from Rs before r-m vein: My + Ma

and My + M, separate at. origin; Cuy not extending to margin; Peu absent ; 1V

and 2V strongly Y-forked near base and extending to hind margin as a single vein.

Thindwing with Sey absent; R veins as in lorewing; ouly one vannal vein present.

Genotype: Phassus abae Moore.

Tn this genus archaie features snch as the separate origins of My + Me and

My + My appear side by side with specializations; Cus is recluced, while Pev

appears to have been entirely lost unless it is represented hy the small yein forming

attapparent cu-a. TV and 2V appear as in Endoclite aud anastomose, continning

to hind margin asa single vein, Only one species bas been recoonized,

NEVENA AOE (Moore),

Plate vii, fig. 74 and Text-fie. 4448.

Phussus aboe Moore, 1859, ii, p, S87. Fhassus salsettensis Moore, 1879. p. 412, yl,

xxxiv, £5. Phassus uboe Butler, 1886, vi, p, 80, pl. cix, f. 1; Hampson, 1892,

i, p. 318,

é Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs dull chocolate-beowns; posterior tibiae

armed with orange-eoloured plumes. orewings dull chacolate-brown with davker

sulfusions and numerons short transverse dark brown bars between the veius, each

margined, on the inner side, with pale brown; more conspicuous ones arranged in

several irregular lines, the one from costa at seveu-eighths to hinder angle, an-

other fron three-fourths costa to two-Lhirds inner margin, and traces of a third

from costa at one-half; the first two of these are margined internally by a wide

suffused band of pale hrown; a similar suffasion covers most of the wing below

Cuz); a small white spot appears at rm vein, Hindwings dull grey, subhyaline

when worn. Expanse 46 mm.

Loe. Sikkim: Darjeeling (type, a male, 71 t1m., labelled ‘‘Darjeeling Kast

India Company 60-15 Pavis Exhibition’ in British Mnseum). Assain: Khasia.

Mills 6. Bombay Presideney: Bombay (allotype female, expanse 64 1m. Moore

Coll, 94-106"* in British Museum), Kodaikanal (7,000 f.). Thirteen males, three

females.

The type example was found. without definite type indication, in the British

Museum collection, and has been marked, after cheeking with catalogue numbers

with the original deseription, and with aceounts given by Hampson. The allotaype

female, described under the name sulsettensis by Moore, probably belongs to the

swine species although it was taken at Bombay, a great distanee from the original

locality, This species seems 10 have a rather wide distribution from Southern

Tia to the Himalayas, bit it is possible that the study of better series may in-

dieate specific differences, Although superficially close to Kndoclita metallica

This species is structurally distinet and not closely related to any others,

The example figured in Seitz is a male, expanse 78 mm., from Khasia Mills:

in the figure of the fernale given by Moore (1879, pl. xxxiv, f, 5) the uarkings ave

rather poorly indicated. Fora formal description T have only males betore me at

Adelaide, The bodies of the males are strikingly distinet with their lon spine-

like rearward projection of the eighth sternite, Examples studied included one

from the type locality Darjecling ; the other figured oue is from Assan,

The male genitalia (fig. 47-48) drawn from the Assam example, have the

eighth sternite with the posterior margin deeply excavated and the sides produeed

posteriorly ax long spines; the tegnmen has the ventral margin chitinized and

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 41

labial palp

male

jugum

NBT

48

Fig. 44-48. Nevina aboe (Moore), Assam. 44, Labial palpi. 45. Antenna. 46. Venation of

male. 47. Male, genitalia, ventral aspect. 48. Male, slightly oblique, lateral aspect.

armed with several rows of spines; the two sides diverge posteriorly, and the arma-

ture is less marked ; the anal extremity of the tegumen is produced ventrally into a

blunt recurved spine,

Examples of this species may be found in the British, Tring, Berlin, Seneken-

here, and South Australian Museums.

Sruenopris Packard.

Sthenopis Packard, 1864, iii, p. 390.

Antennae short, eylindrical, tapering, composed of about 23 segments. Hypo-

pharynx large, shield-shaped, labial palpi small, composed of two segments, first

42 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

twice as long as wide, second much smaller and globose, densely clothed in pubes-

cence; maxillary palpi vestigial. Forewings with Se, present, Ry, from before

middle, Ry and Rs branching; Re to apex, Ry from R; before r-m vein; Cus not

reaching to margin; Peu and 2V not developed; 1V a strong vein to hind margin,

Tlindwings with Se; absent; Ry much reduced, Ry and Reg long-stalked.

Genotype: Sthenoms argenteomaculatus Harris, 1841.

The only member ot this essentially Nearetie genus which has been recognized

as belonging to the Kastern Hemisphere is 8S. regins from Tibet. Sthenopis differs

from Phassus in the presence of Ses, and in the two-segmented labial palpi. From

Endochita and Nevina it is distinguished by the absence of 2V in the forewings,

which, in both the latter genera, forms a Y-fork with 1V.

STHENOPIS RUGIUS (Staudinger).

Plate vii, fig, 70 and Text-fig, 49-51,

Hepialus regius Staudinger, 1893, viii, p. 301, pl. v, fig. 11. Phassus regius Pfitz-

ner, 1912, ii, p. 438, pl. liv b.

8 Head, thorax, abdomen excluding base, and legs pale fawn, base of abdo-

men with pink suffusions; posterior legs with tibiae ornamented with specialized

plumes, Forewings browuish-grey with white transverse bands; all the markings

oa

(ZieSSNeRe

49

female

labial palp

50 51 Pc M

NBT Cuz Cu, Ms+Cu

Fig. 49-51. Sthenopis regius (Staudinger). 49. Female, Tibet, antenna. 50, Labial palpi.

51. Venation.

3

Ya

edged with metallie golden colour, Tindwings with traces of white and brown

markings at apex, otherwise white with a pink suffusion, rather variable in degree.

Expanse 50 mm.

? Sinular to male, posterior tibiae withont specialized plumes. Expanse

52 min,

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MoTHS 43

Loe. Tibet: between Lop Nor and Kokonor (type nol seen), Kokonor 6;

Amdo. Kansu Provinee; Sining-fu. Szechwan Province; Ta-tsien-lu, Three

males, three females,

Fie, 70 depicts a male from Amdo (in the Senekenberg Musevm) ; this has

the hind wings almost white; im other examples the roseate hue is more intense.

The species is an exeeedingly rare one, the few specimens examined. being distri-

buted among the Berlin, Senckenberg, United States National, and South Anis-

(ralian Museums, I have been unfortunately unable to see the types whieb are,

according 10 published measurements, larger than in those available for

deseriplion,

Prassus Walker,

Plate vii, fig, 73,

Phassus Walker, 1856, vii, p. 1566; Druce, 1887, i, p. 853; 4, 1898, p. 451; Kirby,

1892, i, p. 889 CP. argentiferus) ; Tlampson, 1892, i, p. 818 (PL hibnert) ;

Le Cerf, 1919, xxy, p, 469,

Antennae slender, simple, tapering, composed of about 28 seements, Labial

palpi conrposed of three well-developed segments, each longer than wide, Maxil-

lary palpi present but much reduced, Posterior legs, in male, with a tuft of

specialized tibial hairs, usually oranwe-coloured ; these are absent in female. Fore-

wings with Se simple, Ry branching trom Rg well before iwiddle of wing; Ro and

Ry short stalked; Ry from R; before r-m vein; Cus not reaching to margin; Peu

obsolete; LV astrong vein to hind marein;2V absent. Hindwings with Se a simple

vein; R ancl Mas in forewings; Cus present; Peu absent or represented by a short

transverse vein to Cug; 1V and 2V present.

Genotype Phissus argentiferus Walker, 1856, nominated by Kirby, 1892.

As first noticed by Le Cerf the genus Phassus of older authors is a hetero-

eeneous collection of Hepialids. The genotype was nominated by Kirby, whose

selection of P. argenliferus has priovity over that made hy Hiupson, The generic

name belongs to a well defined group of Central American species associated with

P. argentiferus Walker, while the Indian and other Old World species formerly

placed under this name appear to belong to rather distinet genera, several of which

are defined in the present paper.

Phassus ss. is nearest to Sthenopis, but differs from it in the possession of

three-seginented labial palpi, The reduetion of Se to a simple vein appears to be

a recent specialization which has not extended to all the American species at

present erouped under Phassus. The genotype is figured (pl. vii, fig. 73),

Additions to earlier parts of this revision are as follows:

TRICTHNA BARNARDI §p. nov.

Plate vi, fig. 64,

6 Head, with face and palpi greyish-hrown, vertex slate-erey, Antennae

vreyish-brown, tripeetinate, peetinations long and subequal. Thorax slate-grey

with pale fawn wndercoat ; legs slate-grey and fawn, Abdomen grey, Morewings

subhyaline vrey, with numerous seriplose and watermark-like jmpressions; a

ereyish-white irregular longitudinal fascia from near base, and an oblique silvery-

white, blaek- and white-bordered irregular streak from near apex to Cuy),; par-

allel and internal to this a series of black spots extending from apex to Cuyu: a

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusSEUM

similar shorter series from three-fourths costa to Mg. Hind wings opaque brown-

ish-grey. Expanse 110 mm.

Loc, Western Australia: bake Grace 4. (Type, a male, in Barnard Coll, at

the Queensland Museum; paratype male L. 18946 in 8. Aust. Museum.) Two males.

The examples were taken by the late Mr. W. B. Barnard, whose death is a

great loss to those interested in the collecting of these primitive Lepidoptera. His

collection ix now in the (Queensland Museum, Brisbane.

The two examples differ in size, that ficured being 110 mm, in expanse, and

the other 129 mm,

At first sight the species might be taken for a form of Trictena argentata

( Lerrich-Sehaeffer, 1855, p, 5), to which it bears some resemblance in size and

niarkings, but i is atructurs ly distinet in the venitalia. In members of this genus

the male genitalia have the tegumen large and rather weakly chitinized; except

where distorted by post mortem changes it is of rezular form, and may serve to

distinguish the three known species, as Follows :

a, Tegumen, in lateral view, distinetly lobed .. re = 2 appyroatioha

aa, Tegumen in lateral view ‘br oudly rounded, not lobed.

b. Tegumen subquadvately produced zs Pan ss t: .. argentata

bh. ‘Texumen rather evenly rounded , - ' ; . 1. harnarat

TRICTENA ARGENTATA (EHerrich-Schaeffer, 1855)

Trictena argentata Tindale, 1982, iv, p. 500,

Several males and a female were taken, in early June, by Dr, C, 'T, Madigan’s

party, at the Hale River, on the western margin of the Arunta (or Simpson)

Desert,

BORDAIA KARNKA sp, Hoy,

Plate vi, fie, 65,

$ Head with face and palpi black; palpi short, not projecting, vertex black.

Antennae long, pectinations long and slender, minutely ciliated. Thorax and les

long and slender, smoke-black, with a more greyish tone beneath, Forewings.

opaque, greyish-black with faint seriptose markings and watermarks best evident

along termen. An arenate silvery-white faseia from base to middle of wing, broken

toward middle; a faintly black margined series of conjoined white spots forming

a band from near apex to Cuy,. Tlindwings greyish-black, paler towards hase,

venation with Re and Ry rather long-stalked, Expanse 7 mm,

Lae, Western Australia; Lake Graee, 4. (Type, iniqtie, in Barnard Col-

lection at Queensland Musevin ; male genitalia 1. 18945 in 8. Aust. Museutn,)

In the key to species of Bordaia Tindale (1932, p, 907), this species falls into

seetion a, in which the forewings possess conspicuous silvery-white bands. The

arrangement of the wing markings is like that of Trictena arqyrosticha Turner

(1929, p. 3807). In form of antennae it is nearest to B. pice Tindale (1932), the

antennal rami being even more slender than in that species.

In the male genitalia the form of the tezumen is distinetive in lateral view,

having the anterior margin excavate and tollowed by a low rounded eminence,

hehind which the margin is concave, being unlike that of any of its three eon

veniers, The venation “differs from the genotype in the | ength of the stalking of

Rs and Rs of hindwing, but is otherwise similar. The palpi of this species are

much less couspicuously placed than in A, maesia Tindale, 1932, in which species

they are visible from above,

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS

REFERENCES CITED IN PART IV.

Butler, A. G. (1886): Ill. Lep. Brit. Mus., vi.

Christoph, H. T. (1888): Hor. Soc. Ent. Ross., xxii.

Christoph, H. T. (1889): Romanoff, Mém, Lep. v.

Deegener, P. and Schaposchnikow, C. (1904): Zeitschr. wiss, Zool., Ixxvili, pp. 245-260,

Druce, H. (1887): Biol. Centrali-Amer. Het., i.

Druce, H. (1898): bid., ii.

Felder, R. (1874): Reise Novara Lep., iv.

Felder, R. (1875): Lbid., v, Eklar.

Hampson, G. F, (1892): Fauna Brit. Ind. Moths, i (published December).

Harris, T. W. (1841): Rep. Ins. Massachusetts, Bost.

Herrich-Schaeffer, G, A, (1855): Lep, Exot.

Kirby, W. F. (1892); Cat. Lep. Het., i.

Le Cerf, F. (1919): Bull. Mus. Nat. d’Hist. Nat, Paris, xxv.

Leech, J. H. (1898): Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond.

Moore, F. (1859): Cat. Lep. Mus. FE. TI. House, ii.

Moore, F. (1879): Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond.

Moore, F, (1883): Lep. Ceylon, ii.

Packard, A. S. (1864): Proc. Ent. Soc, Philad., iii.

Philpott, A, (1926): Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., pp. 531-535,

Pfitazner, R. (1912): Seitz Macrolep., ii.

Pfitzner, R. and Gaede, M. (1983): Ibid., x.

Slastshevskij, P. (1929): Rev. russe Hnt., xxiii.

Slastshevskij, P. (1929a): Rev. Zool. Russe, ix.

Slastshevskij, P. (1929b): Ibid., x.

Staudinger, O. (1895): Deutsche Ent. Zeitschr. Lep., viii.

Swinhoe, C. (1892): Cat. Lep. Oxford, i (published November).

Tindale, N. B. (1932): Rec, S. Aust. Mus., iv.

Turner, A. J. (1929): Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Aust., liii.

Walker, F. (1856): Cat. Lep. Het. Brit. Mus., vii.

Walker, F. (1869): Char, Undeser. Lep.

45

46

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Pig.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES.

Plate v.

Zenophassus schamyl (Christoph), male, Kuban, Caucasus Mountains, 83 mm,

Endoclita damor (Moore), male, Kangra Valley, 63 mm.

Endoclita damor (Moore), female, Mussoorie, 68 mm.

. Endoclita undulifer (Walker), allotype male, Khasia Hills, 56 mm.

Endoclita purpurescens (Moore), male, Punduloya, Ceylon, 94 mm.

Endoclita purpurescens (Moore), female, Maskeliya, Ceylon, 118 mm.

. Endoclita chalybeata (Moore), allotype male, Khasia Hills, 80 mm.

. Endoclita chalybeata (Moore), female, Darjeeling, 82 mm.

Plate vi.

Endoclita signifer (Walker), allotype male, Khasia Hills, 105 mm.

Endoclita signifer (Walker), female, Khasia Hills, 120 mm,

Endoclita albosignata Tindale, type, a male, Assam, 68 mm.

Endoclita rustica Tindale, type, a male, Shillong, 56 mm.

Trictena barnardi Tindale, type, a male, Lake Grace, 110 mm,

Bordaia karnka Tindale, type, a male, Lake Grace, 79 mm.

Endoclita rustica Tindale, paratype male, Khasia Hills, 64 mm,

7. Endoclita chrysoptera Tindale, type, a male, Senchal Range, 53 mm.

Plate vii.

Endoclita marginenotatus (Leech), type, a male, Omeishan.

. Endoclita aurata (Hampson), male, Bernardmyo, Burma, 44 mm,

. Sthenopis regius (Staudinger), male, Amdo, Tibet, 50 mm.

Endoclita metallica Tindale, type, a male, Darjeeling, 54 mm.

Endoclita gmelina Tindale, type, a male, Namtu, 90 mm,

. Phassus argentiferus (Walker), male, Jalapa, Mexico, 112 mm,

Nevina aboe (Moore), male, Assam, 62 mm.

. Endoclita buettneria Tindale, paratype male, Shwebo, 68 mm.

Rec, S.A. MUSEUM. Vou. VIL, PLATE V.

CAUOCASTAN AND INDIAN HEPIALIDAK

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM. Vor. VII, PLATE VI.

INDIAN AND AUSTRALIAN HEPIALIDAE

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM, Vou, VIL, Plate VII.

TIBETAN, INDIAN AND CENTRAL AMERICAN HEPIALIDAR

LIFE HISTORY OF A CONVOLVULUS FEEDING MOTH,

AEDIA ACRONYCTOIDES (GUENEE 1854):

LEPIDOPTERA HETERONEURA, FAMILY NOCTUIDAE

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The lesser Bindweed (Convolvulus arvensis Linn.), originally perhaps a native of

Europe and Asia, is a troublesome weed, now spreading widely in the settled districts

of South Australia. Recently it has been rapidly dispersed by being included in the

soil of nursery stock. In irrigation settlements it tends to choke water channels, and in

city gardens may form dense mats of summer vegetation strangling all other plants in

its vicinity.

In March, 1941, Mr. H. M. Hale first noticed the bindweed in his garden being

heavily defoliated by a Noctuid larva, and specimens secured were reared at the South

Australia Museum. The species proved to be Aedia acronyctoides (Guen.), the larva

of which had not been previously described.

LIFE HISTORY or a CONVOLVULUS FEEDING MOTH,

AEDIA ACRONYCTOIDES (GUENEE 1854): LEPIDO-

PTERA HETERONEURA, FAMILY NOCTUIDAE

By NORMAN B. 'TINDALE, B.Sc,, Sourm Ausrranian Museum,

Fig, 1-1.

Tre Lesser Bindweed (Convolvulus arvensis Lim.), originally perhaps a native

of Europe and Asia, is a troublesome weed, now spreading widely in the settled

districts of South Australia, Recently it has been rapidly dispersed by being in-

eluded in the soil of nursery stoek. In irrigation settlements it tends to choke

water channels, ald in city gardens may form dense mats of summer vegetation

strangling all other plants in its vicinity.

In March, 1941, Mr, 11, M, Tale first noticed the bindweed in his garden

heme heavily defoliated by a Noetuid larva, and specimens secured were reared

at the South Australian Museum. The species proved to be Aedia acranyctoides

(Guen.), the larva of which had not been previously deseribed.,

Several Palaearctic species of the genus Aedia Huebner, 1825 (formerly

Calephia Treitsehke, 1826), including the genotype A, lewcomelas (Linn, 1758)

and A, funesta (Esper 1787) are already known as feeders on members of the

plant genus Convolvulus. Lt is not therefore surprising to find that. the present.

species has similar habits. A. acronyctoides appears to be a native of Australia,

but it oceurs also in South Hastern Asia and possibly Atriea, It has been recorded

oecasionally in this State since about 1881; no information has been available as

to its life history or host plant. On general grounds the Australian bindweed

(Convalvulus erubescens) may be suspected as a possible endemic food. The pre-

sent observations are based on exainples reared on (he introduced species, and it

will be of interest in the future to note whether or not A, weranyctoides will exert

any measure of control over this pest weed.

In preparing these notes opportunity is taken to clarify and revise the generic

synonymy and to give reasons for the adoption for members of the genus of the

name <ledia rather than Cutephit.

Appia (Huebner).

Aedia Wuebner (1824), p. 261 (genotype lewcomelas Linn.) ; Catephia Ochsen-

heimer (1816), iv, p. 94 (non deser.) ; Treitseche (1826), v (3), p. 320 (geno-

type deucomelas Linn.) ; TTampson (1894), ii, p. 482; Aedia Swinhoe (1900),

ii, p. 129; Catephia Hampson (1926), p, 4.

Hampson eoutinued the use of the name Cutephia in preference to Aedia on

the assumption that Huebner’s work did not appear until 1827, but Sherborn and

Prout (1912, p. 175) give 1825 as the publishing date of the portion of the work

containing this description. Hemming (1934, p, 16) imcieates that the work was

complete by 1826, It thns seems necessary to accept the term Acedia in preference

to the more frequently used Catephia.

48 KECORDS OF THE S.A. MusSEUM

AEDIA ACRONYUTOIDES (Guenée),

Fig. 1-2; larva fig. 3.

Anophia acranyctoides Guenée (1854), ili, pp. 47, 1378; Catephia acronyctoides

Hampson (1894), ii, p, 482; Aedia acronyctoides Swinhoe (1900), ii, p, 129.

Male. Head dark purplish-brown, with some paler scales forming a frontal

(lise; thorax dark purplish-brown, almost. black, with transverse bands of white

scales; abdomen dark purplish-brown, darker at apex; abdomen with dorsal tufts

on basal segments. a conspicnous dorsal one on third segment; also lateral tufts of

Our

SS

ae

Pu

Fig. 1-3. Aedia acronyectoides (Guenéc), 1. Venation. 2. Adult female, Adelaide, Tune,

36mm. 3. Penultimate instar larva, 50 mm.

long golden yellow hair at base. Forewing brownish-hlack, with dark olive ereen

and white seales arranged in a rosette in outer diseal area; five white marks along

costa; an irregular double line from near costa at. three-quarters to inner ma rein

at two-thirds; an irregular black fascia expanded into a subrectangular blotch at

one-third, continues along Cuyb to meet paired black lines; cilia brownish-black.

Hindwings with basal half snow-white, outer half dull brownish-black. Cilia white

except for an infuseation between My and Cu,b. Wings beneath white on basal,

greyish-black on outer half; a yellowish suffusion near base and grey scales at

costa; cilia grey flecked with white; a semi-lunate black mark on dise of forewing.

Expanse 37-41 mm.

Female, Colour and markings similar to male; abdomen without lateral tufts

TINDALE—LIFE HISTORY OF AN AEDIA 49

of golden yellow hair at base; dorsal tufts only feebly developed. Wings beneath

with only seant traces of yellow suffusion. Expanse 34-40 min.

Loe. Queensland: Cooktown, Mackay, Brisbane. Sonth Australia: Bal-

hannah, 12; Norton Sunnnit, 4; Adelaide, 3, 6, 11. North Australia: Tennant

Creek, 9 males, 16 females, and 36 larvae.

The above descriptions haye been drawn up from the particular examination

of two examples (Reg. No. I. 18947 in 8. Aust, Museum), 4 male expanding 38

miun., from Norton Summit, 7 April, 1884, and the reared female example (expand-

ing 36 mm,) from Adelaide, 25 June, 1941; the latter is figured (fig. 2),

Mr. F. M. Angel has taken the species at Parkside, near Adelaide. It was

particularly abundant in November, 1933, and oceurred again m March of 1988

and 1939, It will be noticed that his emergence dates are a month earlier than

those of the insects taken in the Mount Lofty Ranges. Examples in his colleetion

from Tennant Creck, North Australia, appear to belong to a separate race.

The species were first recorded from Tasmania, and several distinct geo-

graphical raees have since been described from Ke Island, Java, Borneo, Anda-

man Islands, Burma, India, China (Amoy), and West and South Africa. A.

acronyctoides discistriga (Walker), the African form, which may be a distinct

species, has been stated to have the white areas of hindwings reduced; in the

Indian form A, a. olivescens (Guenée) the suffusion on forewings tends to be olive

in tone.

Lire History.

Batches of larvae (fig. 4) were taken at Adelaide on 6th and 17th April. The

first series ceased feeding within a week, and by 18th all had burrowed in the

earth. The series of the 17th were on the average more developed, and were

actively feeding until the 18th, when they also commenced to burrow; all had

pupated between

7th & 18th April

8 LARVAL INSTARS OF AEDIA ACRONYCTOIDES emerged 25th June

e

7 © 6th April, 1941 \

é ™ 17th April, 1941 ° + a d x

bi 3 oe +s ‘

Al FS formed hibernation cell x

bi ry we cal ner

= 3 2nd dorso- \ ™" . iy ae wv 4-0?

DB i i e 30

Os lat. tne faint ‘ : genre?

\ e\ 2 we”

\

2 1 dorso- io an

lat. line “ * \

LENGTH

Vig. 4. Dimensions of larvae of several instars of Aedia acronyeloides (Guenée),

tnnnelled in by the 22nd, their disappearance coinciding closely with the seasonal

withering off of the bindweed. Most of the larvae formed ovate earthen eases

lined with silk; one ease was elongate oval in form, and had a prepared eireular

area situated assymetrically at one end, where tho earth covering was weak,

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

On 25th June the only fully-fed larva (that measuring 54 mm.) emerged from

the elongate oval case as an adult female. Its pupation period had been 38-42

days, and it was possibly a belated individual of an autumn brood, for dated adult

examples previously known from South Australia have been taken in December

(near Balhannah) and April (Norton Summit).

Examination of a sufficient sample of the ovate earthen cases on 26th June

showed that larvae of the penultimate instar had not pupated but were hibernating

in a flexed position within their earthen chambers. This may indicate the means

by which the species bridges the six-month long period when the food plant is rest-

ing and no portions of it survive above ground.

DEscRIPTIONS OF LARVAE.

Larva 12-5 mm. in length. Diameter 1-5 mm., smooth, primary setae not

conspicuous; setal pattern normal for family; colour blue-grey with many small

irregular circular black spots arranged in rows; dorsally a median black-margined

yellow line from second thoracic segment to posterior margin of third; this may

be extended forward on to head as a pale grey line; a dorso-lateral yellow line ex-

tending full length of body. In lateral view a broadly black-bordered, cream-

coloured band also extends the full length; on each segment it is overlaid by an

irregular patch of orange suffusion ; the ventral surface brownish-black with traces

of a lateral longitudinal paler blue-grey line.

Larvae 17-20 mm. in length. Diameter 1-6-2-3 mm. Similar to earlier larva,

but with traces of a second dorso-lateral pale yellow line.

Larvae 23-50 mm. in length (fig. 3). Diameter 3-0-6:5 mm. Markings basic-

ally similar to earlier instar larvae but blue-grey and black pattern accentuated,

forming a slightly irregular reticulating network; a median, and dorso-lateral

bands on the dorsum are conspicuously dark orange in colour, but are without

black margins ; the median one is most conspicuous on the thorax and near the anal

extremity; the second dorso-lateral line is irregularly but well marked, and has

an orange suffusion extending within it almost as a continuous central line; ven-

trally the larva is similar in colour to the dorsum, save that on each segment (ex-

cept the head) there is a median large circular black mark.

Larva 54 mm, in length. Diameter 7-5 mm. The markings are similar to

those of the previous instar, but just before pupation are dulled and matt in tone.

Pupa. Not examined; pupal skin pale reddish-brown. Pupa enclosed in an

elongate-oval earthen cocoon of 13 x 33 mm, external, 8 x 18 mm. internal

measurements.

REFERENCES CITED.

Guenée, A. (1854): Histoire Naturelle des Ins., Noet., iii.

Hampson, G. F. (1894): Fauna Brit. India, Moths, ii.

Hampson, G. F. (1926): Dese. Lep. Phal. Noctuinae Brit. Mus.

Hemming, F, (1934): Generic names of Holarctic butterflies.

Huebner, J. (1825): Verz. bek. Schmett.

Ochsenheimer, F. (1816): Schmett. Europ., iv.

Sherborn, C, D. and Prout, L. B. (1912): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), ix.

Swinhoe, C. (1900) : Cat. Hast. and Aust. Lep. Het., ii.

Treitsche, F. (1826) : Sechmett. Europ., v.

NOTES ON THE CHEYLETIDAE (ACARINA, TROMBIDOIDEA)

OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, WITH

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

By H. WoMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This family of microscopic mites has hitherto been unrecorded from Australia or New

Zealand. They may be distinguished by the morphological characters given in the

following family diagnosis.

Comparatively little is known of their life-history. Many are free-living or predatory

on other mites or on insects, while others are parasitic on animals or birds, or are

predatory upon other mites living on or in the fur or feathers of mammals or birds.

Rats. mice, bats, and even sheep are affected.

NOTES on THE CHEYLETIDAE (ACARINA, TROMBIDOIDEA)

or AUSTRALIA anpj NEW ZEALAND, wirn DESCRIPTIONS

or NEW SPECIES

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Sourm Ausrranian Museum,

Fig. 1-9.

Tus family of microscopie mites has hitherto been unrecorded trom Australia or

New Zealand. They may be distinguished by the morphological characters given

in the following family diagnosis.

Comparatively little is known of their lite-history. Many are free-living or

predatory on other mites or on insects, while others are parasitic on animals or

birds, or are predatory upon other mites living on or im the fur or feathers of

mammals or birds. Rats, mice, bats, and even sheep are affected.

Hitherto none have appeared to be of direct importance to man, but in this

paper is described a new species, Psorergates ovis, which seems likely to become a

serious pest to sheep in Australia,

Tn the present paper fourteen species are recorded from Australia and one

from New Zealand. Of these seven Australian species (and one genus) are de-

scribed as new. The remainder are cosmopolitan or introduced forms.

Famity CHEYLETIDAE Leach 1814.

Leach, W. E. 1814, Tr. Linn, Soc. London, 17, 399,

Body rounded, oval to fairly elongate, not annulated, of soft texture. Larvae

with three pairs of legs, later stages with four pairs. Pseudostigmal organ absent.

Palpi four- to five-segmented, free, often forceps-like, tibial-claw present, tarsus

thumb-like. Legs short and stumpy or long and slender, without strong spines.

Claws two or one, sometimes absent on one or more legs. Body setae often branched

or pectinated or fan-like, Terrestrial forms but frequently parasitic or predatory.

Ky 10 THE Known GENERA.

1. Legs I normal, adapted for walking or tactile use; with 2 or without claws . 2.

Legs I very short, with u epirel: like eliuw adapted for er asping lair. Parasitic on mice, rats,

bats, ete. “4 ; : Gen. Myobia v. Heyden 1826.

2. Palpi normal, not forming a pair of fircaps aa te if shah

Palpi forming a pair of forceps ie ots 6.

8. Palpi normal, eylindrieal .. 3 vi Ce 4,

Palpi very short, swollen or conical ty ot 24 5.

4, Tarsal empodium bipectinate. In quills of birds .. Gen, Syringophilus Haller 1880.

Tarsal empodium as a pectinate V. Subcutaneous on Woodpeckers.

Gen, Picobia Haller 1878 (not Australian).

5. Palpi swollen. Only on birds ots Gen. Sareopterinus Raillet 1893.

ayn. Sarcobor us Ouds. 1906 (not Anstralian).

Palpi conical, On mice and sheep A Gen. Psorergates Tyrrell 1898 :

6, Palpal tataus with comb- and sichel-like setae 5 S- 4 ab

Palpal tarsus without above, only with small ordinary setue Gen, Cheletiella Canest. isso,

52 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

7. Palpal tarsus with 2 comb- and 2 sichel-like setae .. . wm .. 8.

Palpal tarsus with 1 comb- and 2 sichel-like setae .. .» 13.

Papal tarsus with 2 sichel-like setae only ra Gen, Cheletoides Ouds. 1904a.

8. Dorsal setae feather-like. Free living .. ae .. Gen. Cheyletus Latr. 1797.

Dorsal setae in the form of strongly ciliated rods. With eyes

Gen. Cheletophyes Ouds. 1914 (not Australian).

Dorsal setae fan-or scale-like, often slender “6 is and Soe

9, Legs I normal, with claws, for walking .. te a3 as .. 10.

Legs I without claws, tactile . . ai! op + 12,

10. Claw of palp internally smooth or with few basal futaks cles . aa dels

Claw of palp pectinate along entire inner edge... Gen, ‘Cheletophanes Ouds, 1904a,

11. One anterior dorsal shield a0 i Gen. Cheletonella nov.

Two dorsal shields, one on propodosoma and one on hyster osoma Gen. Cheletia Haller 1884.

Three dorsal shields, one on propodosoma and two, side by side, on hysterosoma

Gen. Cheletomimus Ouds. 1904a.

12. Palpal claw entirely pectinate along inner margin

Gen. Cheletogenes Ouds. 1905 (not Australian).

Palpal claw with basal inner tuberele or smooth >is Gen. Cheletomorpha Ouds. 1904a.

13. Two dorsal shields ‘ “2 28 . 14,

Anterior dorsal shield only . As Eth Gen. Cheletopsis Ouds. 1904a.

14. Dorsal shields contiguous and covering entire dorsum

Gen. Chelonotus Trt. in Berlese 1893 aa Australian),

Dorsal shields separate, encircled by soft cuticle .. ov LB.

15, Anterior shield trapezoidal .. “* Gen. Ainsiuals Mog -Tand. 1863.

Anterior shield pentagonal .. .- Gen, Cheletosoma Ouds. 1905 (not Australian).

Genus Myopia v. Heyden 1826.

von Heyden 1826, col. 613.

MYOBIA MINIOPTERIS Sp. Nov.

Text-fig. 1 A-E

Description, Female. Elongate, 578. by 238. Front of head flattened.

Dorsal surface with characteristic setae as figured, these arranged 4, 4, 6, 4, 4,

those of first and outer members of second row very much asymmetrically broad-

ened at base and with 8-10 longitudinal striations, those of third and fourth rows

and the middle pair of second and fifth rows less broadened, outer members of fifth

row normal. Outer setae of first and second rows 180, long, inner of these rows

105, remainder 75-90» long. At apex of body a pair of setae about 510p long.

Ventrally with three pairs of long fine setae, one between coxae III, one just an-

terior of,coxae IV and one just posterior of coxae IV; there is also a pair of small

outer setae between coxae LIT, another pair outside of the third pair of long setae,

and a pair of medium setae just before the apex of the body; the lengths of these

setae are, first long 90, second long 90, third long 120», short 21, medium

51p. Tarsi and claws of leg I normal for the genus, adapted for clasping hair; of

leg Il strong and evenly curved; of legs II] and IV straighter and seythe-lke ;

two claws on legs II-LV. Tibiae and tarsi of legs IIL and IV with three and two

stout spines at the outer anterior angles. Tip of tarsi I with two stout long blunt

setae. This species is remarkable for the prominent and large air cavities at the

insertion of the legs, Leg I as figured.

Locality and Host. South Australia: one (type) from Miniopteris schreiberst

Naracoorte 1893 (R. Fleming) ; another from Chalinolobus gouldi (no precise

locality), M 401,506. N.B.: Bat hosts in South Australian Museum collections.

Remarks. Nearest to M. rollinate (Poppe) described from the Greater Horse

Shoe Bat (Rhinolophus ferrum equinum) of Europe, but differs in the form of the

longer expanded dorsal setae.

WoOMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 53

Fig.1. Myobia miniopteris sp.nov. A, Entire dorsal view of female; B, ventral view of same,

except gnathosoma and legs; C, tip of leg IL; D, leg IIT or TV; FE, cupitulum and right palp from

aboye.

Myopta CLARA Sp. oy.

Text-fig. 2 A-B.

Description. Female. Klongate, length 425, width 170p. Front of head

lightly produeed, snout-like. Dorsally with 22 setae, arranged 4, 4, 4, 2, 2, 2, 4, 2;

all except the two posterior rows simple, as figured, moderately broad basally for

rather more than half their length, and only indistinetly longitudinally striated ;

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

54

‘sSo pue vurosoyjeus ydooxe ‘Mora [eayuoa “q {MOTA [BsIOp oITJUA ‘OQ :ofeua,g ‘Aou'ds

punurw mgohp ‘sso, pue euosoyjeus ydooxa ‘mora [v.ayUoA ‘gq {MOTA [SLOP oIT}UO “W seem, “aouds nunja viqohw *Z ‘Sit

AVA

{

WOoOMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 55

outer ones of first three rows 90p long, the six central pairs 60-75y, posterior six

60. The paired apical abdominal setae 3804 long. Ventrally with four pairs of

setae, 60p long and arranged as figured. Leg I normal for the genus; II to IV

with paired claws which are all alike, slender and sichel-like. The prominent air

chambers at the insertion of the legs present in the preceding species are absent.

Locality and Host, ? South Australia from bats M499 aud 4418-21 in the

South Australian Museum collections,

Myosta MINIMA Sp. Nov,

Text-tig. 2C—D.

Description. Female, Elongate, length 3404, width 1456p, Front of head

fattened as in miniopteris, Dorsally with 20 setae arranged 2, 4, 4, 2, 2, 2, and

then four small fine ones; the first six rows are somewhat thickened basally for

not more than half their length; the median pair of the second row and the outer

ones of the third row are 7p long, the others 30-3834; the pair of long apical setae

are 180u in length, Veutrally with three pairs of long fine setae, 45, long, as

figured, in front of the anterior pair is a pair of very small fine ones on each side.

Leg | as figured, adapted for clasping hair; 11 to 1V with only a single claw

which is strongly ¢urved and sichel-like. No air chambers at insertions of legs.

Locality and Mast, ? South Australia on Chalinolobus gouldi M401, 506

in South Australian Museum collections,

Myopta CHALINOLOBUS Ss}. NOV.

Text-fig. 3 A-C.

Description. Female. Of squat form, length 323p, width 238. Front of

head not flattened. Dorsally with three pairs of long slender setae each of which

has a short aeeessory hairlet at about one-fourth from its tip; medially and an-

teriorly is a pair of very short setae, while posteriorly there are four short setae.

The long dorsal setae are 120p in length. The apical paired setae are 320, long.

On the venter eoxae I with two fine setae, Lf with three, IIT with one, [IV without

any setae; between coxae LV a transverse row of four fine setae, and at apex two

more, Leg I normal for the genus, as figured; legs [1 to FV all with paired stout

ovenly eurved similar claws. At the insertion of the legs are slender invagina-

tions representing air chambers.

Locality and Hosts. Type from Chalinolobus gouldi, M401, 506 from South

Australia, in the collections of the South Australian Museum.

Myopia ENsIFERA (Poppe 1896),

Text-fig, 3D.

Poppe, 8. A. 1896, 341.

This is a well-known European species found on rats and mice. In Australia

it has been found (1) on laboratory white rats, University, Adelaide, June, 1938

(T.H.J.) and (2) on rats at Cairns, Queensland, 1989 (W.G.1.).

fenus Psorercates Tyrrell 1883,

Tyrrell 1883, 832,

56 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Qe"

—

be +

Fig. 3. Myobia chalinolobus spnmoy. Female; A, entire dorsal view; B, ventral view, except

legs; C, right palp, Myobia ensifera Poppe, D, Entire dorsal view of female.

PSORERGATES OVIS sp. Nov.

Text-fig, 4 A—J.

Description. General form rowided and flattened, rather narrower tha

long. Lateral margins indented slightly between the coxae, Claws furnished

with paired claws. Palpi short and conical. Penis of male dorsal.

Female. Length 189, width 162u. Palpi as figured, with a short stout

somewhat clavate rod-like seta at the outer dorsal angle; tibia with a long and a

short seta, and with well chitinized blunt claw. Legs short and stout, femur on

outer margin below with a pair of adjacent long setae; tibia with a long outer

seta and a stout curved tooth on inner surface; tarsus with outer tooth and two

strong claws; all legs alike, but the long tibial seta is much longer on leg TY,

Dorsum smooth, except for a narrow outer margin of longitudinally striated

cuticle; with four pairs of stout setae as figured. Venter with a pair of short

setae in the middle; a single setae on each coxa and apically with two pairs of

long (68) setae arising from a pair of lobes.

Male. Length 167m, width 116,; differs from female only in having but a

single pair of long setae apically and ventrally, which are rather shorter than in

WoOMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 57

Fig. 4. Psorergates ovis sp.nov. A, Butive dorsal view of female; B, ventral view of same.

Q, Dorsal view of male except legs. D, Adult female within nymphal skin. E, Second nymph,

ventral. F, First nymph, ventral. G, Palp from above; H, Leg T; I, ova; J, penis.

the female, and arises from a single medial tuberele. The dorsal penis arises near

the middle, and extends almost to the anterior margin as figured.

Ovum. Round as figured, 484 in diameter.

Larya. Length 108p, width 95p, with three pairs of rudimentary legs which

are little more than stumps, but are furnished with distinct if rudimentary claws.

No dorsal or ventral setae can be observed,

58 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Nymph I. Length 121p, width 108, as figured. With four pairs of legs,

still rudimentary but rather more developed. No dorsal or ventral setae.

Nymph Il. Length 155y, width 135y. Legs still more developed, but show-

ing no signs of segmentation. No dorsal or ventral setae, but in this and the pre-

ceding stages the palpal setae are strongly evident. In one specimen of the later

nymphal stage the adult female could be observed within the nymphal cuticle

(see fig. 6D). Here it will be noticed that the apical long setae are curled within

the nymphal skin.

Locality and Host. On sheep, Yass, Goulburn, New South Wales, and

Canberra, Aust. Cap. Territory, May, 1941 (H. B. Carter).

Remarks. This species may become of serious import to the sheep industry

of Australia. Its economic aspect is being investigated by Mr. H. B. Carter and

other officers of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research at the Me-

Master Laboratories, Sydney. I am indebted to Dr. Bull and Mr. Carter for

bringing this interesting species to my notice, and for affording me the oppor-

tunity of deseribing it.

Its effect upon the sheep is to produce a chronic irritation of the skin, mainly

along the sides and flanks, although specimens have been recovered from most

regions of the body. The appearance of the fleece is similar to that of infestation

by the common biting louse (Bovicola ovis).

Genus Syrineorniuus Heller 1880.

Heller 1880, 186,

Gomomerus Michael, A, D, 1890, 405.

SYRINGOPHILUS TOTANI Ouds. 1904.

Text-fig. 5, A-B.

Oudemans, A. C.1904a. Ent. Bericht. No. 19, 171; 1906, Mem. Soe. zool. Fr., 19,

36, fig. 7, 8.

This species was described from the quills of the Swallow Totanus calidris,

probably from France. My material, which was from a Magpie collected at Bar-

ringun, New South Wales (no date) by the late Stanley Hirst, does not appear to

differ from the description and figures given by Oudemans.

Genus Cureyietus Latreille 1796.

Latreille, P. A. 1796, 179.

CHEYLETUS ERUDITUS Schrank 1781.

Text-fig. 5 C—D.

Schrank, F. v. P. 1781, 513.

This species is the type of the genus. It is almost cosmopolitan and occurs in

and on various foodstuffs. It is predatory in habit, feeding upon insects and mites

infesting the materials. It is frequently to be found in cultures of economic insect

pests. I have material from the following Australian localities :

Queensland : On cheese, Brisbane, June, 1932 (F.H.S.R.).

New South Wales: On head of a fly, Sydney, 1909.

Victoria: On imported seeds, Dept. of Agric., Melbourne, August, 1932.

South Australia: In infested wheat, Adelaide, September, 1940.

WoOMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 59

Genus CHELETIELLA Canestrini 1886.

Canestrini, G. 1886, 170.

CHELPTIELLA PARASITIVORAX Meenin 1878.

Text-fig. 56 E-F,

Meenin, P. 1878, 425, pl. xxviii.

This is a well-known predatory species found inhabiting the fur of rabbits

where it probably feeds upon the Listrophorid mites living there. It is not yet

Fig. 5. Syringophilus totani Ouds. A, Entire dorsal view of female; B, tarsus. Cheyletus

eruditus Schrank. Female; C, dorsal view; D, palp from above. Cheletiella parasitivorax

Megnin. E, Dorsal view; FP, tarsus.

Imown from Australia, but a few years ago I received material from the fur of

Angora rabbits from Auckland, New Zealand (1935 U.M.).

CHELETIELLA PINGUIS Berlese 1889,

Text-fig. 6 A-C.

Berlese, A. 1889.

With somewhat similar habits to the above species, but found upon birds.

My Australian material is from the parrot Platycercus elegans from Mansfield,

Victoria, June, 1933 (A.E.B,).

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus CuryLeria Haller 1884.

Haller, G. 1884, 233, 234.

CHEYLETIA PLABELLUERA (Michael 1878).

Text-fig. 6 D-K.

Michael, A. D. 1878, 435.

To be found generally in similar habitat to Cheleliella parasitivorax and of

the same habit. My Australian material was found among the debris of an old

Fig. 6. Cheletiella pinguis Berlese. Female; A, dorsal view; B, palp; C, tip of tarsus.

Cheyletiella flabellifera (Michael), Female; D, dorsal view; E, palp dorsal.

Yacea (Xanthorrhoea) stump in Torrens Gorge, South Australia, May, 1939

(R.V.S.). Probably rabbits were nesting nearby,

Genus CHELETONELLA noy.

Allied to Cheyletia but distinguished, as in the key, by having only an anterior

dorsal shield,

WoMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 61

CHELETONELDLA VESPERTILIONIS Sp. OY.

Text-fig. 7 A-D.

Description. Female, Length 580n, width 260u. Gnathosoma 195u. Eyes

? Palpi strong; femur stout and thick, 67 long by 72» wide, tibial claw strong

54u long, and furnished with three inner basal tubercles, tarsus with two combs

Fig. 7. Cheletonella vespertilionis gen. et spaov. Female; A, dorsal view; B, ventral view ;

C, palp from above; D, tibia and tarsus.

and two sichel-like setae, stronger comb with about 12 teeth ; femur and tibia each

with one fan-like seta. Dorstum with only a single indistinct shield on anterior

half. Dorsal setae fan-like, 39. by 19p, arranged as figured. Legs comparatively

short, I 340p long, If 250n, 11f 290p, LV 3875p, tarsus as figured with a pair of

simple claws and pulvilli of about four hairs. Ventral surface as figured.

Male. Unknown.

Locality and Host. A single specimen taken from a bat at Glen Osmond,

South Australia, May, 1988 (D.C.8.).

62 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus CrimueTromMorPHA Ouds. 1904.

Oudemans, A. ©. 1904a, No. 18, 162.

CHELETOMORPHA VENUSTISSIMA (Koch 1839).

Text-fig. 8 A-B.

Koch, C. L. 1839.

This is the genotype and only species of the genus. It is almost cosmopolitan,

and is predatory upon other Acarids such as the Tyroglyphidae. My Australian

records are :

South Australia: In hay, Two Wells, December, 1933 (D.C.8.) ; in chat,

Adelaide, May, 1935 (II.W.).

Western Australia: Denmark, July, 1932 (FI.W.).

Fig. 8. Cheletomorpha venustissima (Koch). Female; A, dorsal view; B, palp dorsal,

Acaropsis docta Berlese. Female; C, dorsal yiew; D, palp.

Genus CHELETOPHANES Ouds. 1904,

Oudemans, A. C, 1904a, No. 18, 162,

CHELETOPHANES RUGOSA Sp. Nov.

Text-fiz. 9 A-D.

Description. Female. Length 475y, width 2554. Gmnathosoma 153. Eyes

? 1-1. Palpi strong and stout ; femur 62, by 62p, tibial claw strong 43 long and

WoOMERSLEY—CHEYLETIDAE OF AUSTRALIA 63

entirely pectinate along inner edge, tarsus with two combs and two sichel-like setae,

stronger comb with about 12-14 teeth which are about one-third the length of comb.

Legs: I 600p Jong, slender, with two claws and pulvilli as figured; TL 390.2; TIT

410u; 1V 400n. Dorsiin with only anterior shield, this with four pairs of setae,

of which the anterior two pairs are longer, about 54p; setae on hysterosoma beyond

those figured are uncertain owing to damage, Cuticle outside of shields rugose,

Vig. 9. Cheletophanes rugosa spmoy. A, Female from above, B, Male from above; C, male

from helow. D, Tip of tarsus.

Male. Leneth 340p, width 187p. Gnathosoma &5p. Palpi as in female but

smaller, femur 54p long by 43 wide, claw 40» and as in female. <All other char-

acters as in female,

Locality and Host. From Calymmaderus (Coleoptera) material Brisbane,

Queensland, December, 1934 (A.R.B.). One female, two males,

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus Acaropsis Moq.-Tand. 1863.

Moquin-Tandon 1863, 314; Oudemans, A. C. 1904, No. 18, 209.

ACAROPSIS DOCTA (Berlese 1886).

Text-fig. 8 C-D.

Berlese, A, 1886.

Frequently found in the dust of human habitations. My Australian records

are from Western Australia; from B. obtectus culture, Dept. of Agric., Perth; on

Alyssia sp., Perth, November, 1931 (B.A.0’C.).

REFERENCES.

Berlese, A. (1889): Acari. Myriap. Scorp. Hal. Rep., fase. lvi, No. 4.

Canestrini, G. (1886): Prosp. Acarof. Ital., pt. 2.

Haller, G. (1884): Arch. f. Naturgesch, 1 (1).

Heller, A. (1880): Schmar. mensch.

vy. Heyden, C. H. G. (1826): Oken, Isis, xix.

Koch, C. L. (1839): Deutschl. Crust. Myr. Arachn., xxiii, No. 22.

Latreille, P. A. (1796): Précis car. gen. Ins.

Leach, W. E. (1814): Tr. Linn. Soe., xi.

Megnin, P. (1878): J. Anat. Physiol.

Michael, A. D. (1878): Zr. Roy. Micros. Soc., i.

Michael, A. D. (1890): J. Linn. Soc., xx.

Moquin-Tandon, H. B. A. (1862): Elem. Zool. med.

Oudemans, A. C. (1904a): Entom. Bericht, No. 18.

Oudemans, A. C. (1904b) : Ibid., No. 19.

Oudemans, A. C. (1906): Mem. Soc. Zool. Fr., xix.

Oudemans, A. C. (1914): Hntom. Berich., iv, No. 78.

Oudemans, A. C. (1915): Archiv. f. Naturgesch., Ixxxi.

Poppe, S. A. (1896): Zool. Anz., xix.

Schrank, F. v. P. (1781): Enum. Ins. Austrie.

Tyrrell, J. B. (1883): Proe. Canad. Inst. Toronto, i.

A REVISION OF THE FAMILIES DIOSACCIDAE SARS, 1906

AND LAOPHONTIDAE T. SCOTT, 1905

(COPEPODA, HARPACTICOIDA)

By A. G. NICHOLLS, PH.D., UNIVERSITY OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

Summary

I have recently had an opportunity of studying the collection of Copepoda in the

South Australian Museum, a report on which appeared in the previous volume of

these Records (Nicholls, 1941).

Arising out of this and some earlier work on a collection of copepods from the St.

Lawrence, it has been found necessary to revise the two genera Amphiascus and

Laophonte, and while engaged upon this revision a survey has been made of their

respective families. This paper is an attempt to clarify the relationships of the genera

comprising these families and, at the same time, to subdivide the two chief genera,

both of which contain a large number of species, into homogeneous groups, clearly

defined and easily separable. It is hoped that this paper will simplify the process of

identification of species belonging to these two genera in particular.

A REVISION or Tus FAMILIES DIOSACCIDAE SARS, 1906

anp LAOPHONTIDAE T, SCOTT, 1905

(COPEPODA, HARPACTICOIDA)

By A. G. NICHOLLS, Pu.D,, Universrry or Wesrern Ausrrania.

T nave recently had an opportunity of studying the collection of Copepoda in the

South Australian Museum, a report on which appeared in the previous volume of

these Recards (Nicholls, 1941).

Arising oat of this and some earlier work on a collection of copepods from

ihe St. Lawrence, if has been found necessary to revise the two genera Agpha-

dseus and Laophente, and while engaged twpon this revision a survey has been

made of their respective families, This paper is an attempt to clarify the relation-

ships of the genera comprising these families and, at the same time, to subdivide

the two chief genera, both of which contain a large number of species, into homo-

geneous groups, clearly defined and easily separable. It is hoped that this paper

will simplify the process of identification of species belonging to these two genera

in particular.

In matters of nomenclature | gratefully aeknowledge the assistanee received

from Professor G, E, Nicholls, of the niversity of Western Australia, and Mr. K.

Sheard, of the South Australian Museum.

Tt has been necessary to borrow many books of reference from libraries 1)

South Australia, Victoria, and New South Wales. In cach case the librarians have

been very helpful in sending books required and permitting their retention for

several months, A few important works are not available in Australia, notably

some of the earlier works of Claus and others.

lt is appropriate here to express my thanks to Miss E, Wood, Librarian to

the University of Western Australia, for obtaining’ the large amount of literature

required.

Famity DIOSACCIDAE Sars 1906.

As Sars (1911, p. 103) has already observed there is a close relationship

between the Diosaccidae and Thalestridae. The chief characters distinguishing

the two families are as follows:

HAT ESTRIDAR. MOSACUIDAL.

Rostrum usually small and comparatively Rostrum Ivrge and mobile.

immobile.

Hxopod of first leg usually strongly modified. Exopod of first leg comparatively unmodified.

Endopod of first log strongly modified, Endopod of first leg little modified, exeept in

Amphiaseus and related genera,

Thier seta on basal segment of first endopod Taner seta on basal segment of first endopod

inserted about the middle, or proximal thereto, always inserted distally,

These two fainilies approach one another most closely in the genera

Dactylopusia and Amphiascus, which have many points in common. Gurney

(1927b, p. 512) has already discussed the similarity between them and finds five

points of difference. He disposes of the significance, from the systematic aspect,

of the number of egg-sacs whieh was regarded by Sars and Monard as important,

(see Monard’s works, Gurney 1932, p. 17; and Lang 1935a),

66 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MuSEUM

The significance of the position of the inner seta on the basal segment of the

first endopod is also somewhat questionable. In at least one species of Thalestrid

(Dactylopodella flava (Clans) ) it is inserted beyond the middle of the segment,

and in Robertsonia (as defined below) which, it is now generally agreed, belongs

to the Diosaceidae it tends to beeome less distal than is usual in typical Diosaecidae.

This tendeney reaches a climax in Varnaia monardi Klie, which [ regard as a true

Robertsonia (see p, 87), Here it approximates to the position it occupies in

Dactylopodella flava.

The following genera have been aseribed to this family :

Stenhelia Boeck 1864; Diosacovs Boeck 1872; Rohertsonia Brady 1880; Psendomesochra

T. Beott 1902; Parastenhelia Thompson and Seott 190%; Amphiasevs Sara 19050; Schizopera

Sars 19050; Slenhetiopaix Sars WG; Psendadiosacens T, Scott 1906; Tydemanrtla A. Seott 1909 ;

THioxaccopais Brian 1925; lalysux Brian 1927; Amphiaseopsis Gueney 1927b;Teissierella Monard

1935; Varnaia Klic 1937.

According to Lang (1946a) Sars’ genus Stenheliopsis is synonymous with

Pseudomesochra Scott and belongs to the Diosaecidae, while the same author

(1934, p. 22) shows that Parustenhelia is a Thalestrid and synonymous with

Mierathalesiris Sarvs.

The genus Tydemanella was placed by Scott in the Thalestridae but, as has

heen shown by Lang (1936e, p, 18), it belongs to the Diosaeeidae, Brian (1927)

deseribed a new genus Jalysus, whieh bears a considerable resemblance to

Tydemanella, and in a recent paper (1941) T regarded them as synotymous, in

order to include a new species from South Australia which was intermediate.

] have here separated them once again for reasons given below, and it has thus

heen necessary to establish a new genus for the Australian species, for which I

propose the name Parialysus (defined p, 91).

Gurney’s genus Amphiascopsis has been somewhat modified and enlarged to

include a greater number of species, and from the remaining species of Amphaascus

two new genera have been formed, leaving a small number still regarded as

Amphiascus sens. str.

Teissierella, stated by Monard to be intermediate between Amphiascus and

Robertsania, is in fact composed of species belonging to these two genera and

therefore lapses.

Varnaia Klie is ilentical with Robertsonia, as defined below.

The family, therefore, consists of the following genera, here arranged in

chronological order =

STUNHELEA Boeck 1864,

1864, Slenhelia Boeck. 190%, Bealricella T. Seott 19054,

1868. Delavatia Brady (pro, part.).

Diosaceus Bocek 1872,

L863, Dartulopus Qlaus (pro, part.), 1872. Diosacenvs Boeek-

Rosertsonia Brady 1880,

INS(. Rohertsonia Brady. nee, 1910. Robertsonia Brady,

Laid, Laetylopus “l, Seott (pro. part.). Iit4. A pephiaseus Monard.

WW, Stenhelia A. Seott (pro. part.), 1935. Teiasierella Monard.

1DNG. Stenhelia Thompson and Scott (pro. 1836, Teissicrella Monard 1935a (pro. part.).

part,), WaT, Farnaia Bie.

Parupomesocira TL Seatt 102,

102. Pseudomesochra T, Scott. 1906, Stenhelionsis Says,

AMPHIASCYS Saie L905,

1863. Vaetylopus Claus, S72, Diosaccus Bowel.

L866, Daetylopus China. 1872. Stenhelia Brady,

1kG8, Dactywlopus Cxerniaveki, A879. Vaetylopus Brady and Robertson,

L872. Daetiylopius Boeck. 1880, Daetylopud Brady,

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 67

1880. Stenhelia Brady, 1901. Dactylopus T. and A. Seott.

I882. Daetylopus Giesbrecht. 1902. Dactylopus Giesbrecht.

1882. Stenhelia Giesbreeht. 1902. Dactylopus T. Seott,

1893, Stenhelia I, C. Thompson. 1902. Stenhelia T, Seott.

184. Stonholia T. Beott. 1902, Daeclylopus A, Scott.

1894. Dactylopus T. Beott 1844. 1902. Stenhelia A. Scott.

1894, Stenhetia TV. Seott 1894a. 1908. Daetylapus T. Seott.

1894, Stenhetia T. and A, Seutt. 19048. Daetylopus T. Scott 19038,

185, Slenhelia T, Seott. 19038. Stenhelia T, Seott 1903b.

1895. Stonhelia T. and A, Scott. 1908. Vaetylopusia Thompson and Seott.

1896, Stenhelia A. Scott, 1908, Stenhetia Thompson and Seott,

1897. Stenhelia T. Scott. 1905. Daelylopus Wolfenden 1905a.

1898, Paelylopus T. Scott, 1905. Maetylopuvia Norman and Scott,

1899, Daetylopus Brady. L005. Stenhelia Norman and Seatt.

1899. Stenhelia T. Seott. 1905, Amphiaseus Sars 1905a,

00, Stenhelia Brady, 1935. Teisaieretla Monard.

Sonmmzopers Sars 1908,

1891, Peetylopus Blanchard and Richard. 1928, Amphinseus Rie,

105. Sehizopera Sars L05a. 1928. Ampliasens Monard 1928a.

Psrvponrosaccus I’, Beatt 106,

1893. Dioseeens Vo and A. Beott 1808a. 1906. Psrendadinsaceus T, Seott.

TYDEMANELLA A. Scott 1909.

1909. Tydemanella A. Seott.

Drosaccorsis Brian 1925,

1925. Divsaecopsis Brian. 1936, Didaaceapais Monard,

Tanysus Briain 1927,

1927. Jalysus Brian. 1941. Pydemanela Nicholls.

1927, Talysus Gurney 1927b.

AarpHiascorsis Gurney 1927.

1927. Amphiascopsis Gurney 1927h,

To which are added three new genera Mesamphiascus (defined p. 79),

Amphiascoides (defined p. 81), and Purialysus (defined p. 91).

SUBDIVISION OF THE DIosaccIDAR INTO SUBFAMILIES.

Girney’s genus Amphiascopsis links on to the Thalestrids by Dactylopusia

om the one band, and on the other, following a regular reduction in the number

of setae, a serics is formed through Amphitscus sens, str., Mesamphiaseus and

Amphiascoides to Robertsonia and Schizopera. This group is sufficiently homo-

genous to constitute a subfamily, here called the Amphiascinae.

The close relationship between Dactylopusiq and Amphiascopsis is further

emphasized by the fact that many species deseribed by earlier workers as

Daclylopus(ia) now find their true position in Gurney’s genus, as it has here

been modified, Lang (1936e, p. 29) lists 36 species and varieties of Dactylopus(ia)

which have been wrongly identified, 28 of which, as he points out, belong to

Amphiascus. Of these 28, two belong to Rubertsonia or Schizopera, two of the

varieties are synonyms, seven are placed by me in ** species inquaerendae’?’ or ‘‘not

examined’? and one in Amphtascoides; this leaves 16 species of which 12 belong

to Amphiascopsis and four to Amphiaseus sens, str., which in some respects is

very close to Gurney’s genus.

Of the remaining Diosaveids a seeond snbfamily—the Diosaccinae con-

taining Diosaccopsis, Diosaccus, Pseudodiosaccus, Tydemanella, Talysus and

Parialysus probably arose from Amphiuscopsis. Tu these the two inner setae on

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the middle segments of the second and third endopods are retained (except in

Parialysus which shows certain reductions) ; the long first endopod is prehensile

in all, but somewhat shortened in T'ydemanella, Lalysus and Parialysus; a slightly

modified first exopod is present in both Diosaccopsis and Pseudodiosaccus ; the

inner lobe of the mandible palp is reduced to a seta in Diosaccus (except in one

species), absent in Jalysus and Parialysus; and the remaining lobe is further re-

duced in Pseudodiosaccus ; the exopod of the second antenna is one-segmented in

all but Pseudodiosaccus.

The two remaining genera, Stenhelia and Pscudomesochra, form the third

subfamily Stenheliinae. These, with two and one inner setae on the middle

segments of the second and third endopods respectively, unmodified first exopod,

and relatively long end segment in the first endopod, were probably derived from

Mesamphiascus. Incidental support for this view is found in the fact that, of

the 25 species of Amphiascus originally described as Stenhelia, 10 belong to

Mesamphiascus. Of the others, one belongs to Amphiascus sens. str., five to

Amphiascoides, and of the remaining nine, six cannot be placed with certainty

though none is excluded from Mesamphiascus, and in most cases the probability

is in favour of their inclusion in this genus. The last three are those whose

descriptions I have not seen.

The name Stenheliinae was first used by Brady (1880, p. 31) for a sub-

family of the Family Harpacticidae, and contained the genera Delavalia,

Jonesiella, Amewra, and Stenhelia. This classification has since been superseded

by that of Sars, and the name is used here in its restricted sense for Stenhelia

and closely related genera.

KEY TO THE DIOSACCIDAR.

1. Body without strong demarcation between metasome and urosome 2.

(Amphiascinae) subfam. nov.

Metasome more or less strongly demarcated from urosome a Stem Oe

2. Proximal portion of 1st antenna 3-segmented % Per Robertsonia Brady 1880.

Proximal portion of 1st antenna 4-segmented ot .. 8

3. End segments of exopods 2-4 with not more than 4 spines and/or setae.

Schizopera Sars 1905a,

End segments of exopods 2-4 with more than 4 spines and/or setae ar o &

4, Middle segments of 2nd and 3rd endopods each with 2 inner setae :. dD.

Middle segments of 2nd and 3rd endopods with 2 and 1 inner setae respectiv ely.

Mesamphiascus gen. nov.

Middle segments of 2nd and 8rd endopods each with 1 inner seta Amphiascoides gen. nov.

5. Middle segment of Ist exopod the largest; basal segment of Ist endopod at least 3 times

2nd and 3rd together and longer than whole exopod; seta formula for inner margins of

endopods: 121, 123, 112, of exopods: 112, 113 or 2, 113 or Amphiascopsis Gurney 1927b.

Differing in one or more of these characters aS Amphiascus sens. str.

6. 1st endopod prehensile; middle segment of 5rd pitopnl with 2 iner setae; caudal rami

little or no longer than wide .. (Diosaccinae) subfam. nov. 7.

1st endopod natatory; middle segment of 3rd endopod with 1 inner seta; caudal rami

usually at least twice as long as wide .. * (Stenheliinae) sens. str. 12.

7. Ist endopod 2-segmented .. Fay 3 ™ ao ee

1st endopod 3-segmented .. x nf, . .. 10.

8. Mandible palp biramous bd és ats “Tyde same A. Scott 1909.

Mandible palp uniramous .. sf * We 9.

9. Middle segment of 2nd endopod with 2 inner setae; basal segments of stasis 2-4 | with

inner seta Talysus Brian 1927,

Middle segment of 2nd endopod with 1 inner seta; “basal segments of exopods 2-4 without

inner setae a8 ye = ~~ bus Parialysus gen. nov.

10. 4th endopod 2-segmented .. is 7. Pseudodiosaccus T. Seott 1906.

4th endopod 3-segmented =... ma - ww Jb,

11. Basal segment of 2nd antenna divided .. a a Deosaddopets Brian 1925.

Basal segment of 2nd antenna undivided . he 5 Diosaccus Boeck 1872.

NicHoLtis—DIosacCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 69

12. Ist endopod 2-segmented a i : ve a4 op T3s

Ist endopod 3-segmented rt +. Es Stemlelia sons, str. Boeck 1864.

13, 1st endoped cqual to or Jonge’ than exopod; 2nd sntenna with 2-seymentad exopod (d-seg-

mented in Py brneet); Ist antenna 5- to 7-segmented Pseudomesichra T. Seott 1902.

ist endopod eqial to or shorter tian exopod; 2nd antenna with S-segmented exopod; Lst

artomna &-segmented le -‘ ae Stenhetia (Delavalia) Brady 1868,

AMPpHIAscInaAr subfam. nov.

Body elongate, tapering posteriorly, withont demarcation between meta-

some and wrosoine, Kirst antenna 6- to Y-seemented; 2nd antenna with exopod

2- or B-seemented; mandible palp biramous, cach ramus 1-segmented. Legs 1-t

S-segmented thromghout; middle segment of 3rd endopod with 2 or 1 tmner

setae; eaudal rami usually no louger, bid) much shorter than wide, 4 genera;

Amphiascopsis, Amphiasous sens. sti, Mesamphiascus (ge, noy,), Amphiaseaides

(gen. nov.), Robertsonia, and Schizapera.

Genus Amptrascus Sars 1905,

1905, Amphiascus Sars 1905a, p, 880; 1906, Amphiasens Sars 1911, p. 148.

The genus was defined by Sars (1905a) to contain those species whieh had

been invorrectly ascribed to Stenhelia Bovek by Tirady and others. He named

Dactylapus longirastris Clans firstly as an example of his new genus and added

that D. wmmutus Claus and D, debilis Giesbrecht must also be transferred to his

new genus. <Anphiascus longirostris (Claus) can therefore be established as

the type of Aimphiascus sens. lat. (see p. 77), A. miviatus (Claus) comes into

Gurney’s genus Amphiascopsis—here somewhat widered—while A, debilis

(Giesbvecht) comes into the new genus Amphiascoides, defined helow.

A yovision of this genus has beeu made by Monard (19260), but he later

(1987, p, 82) withedrew his previons work, stating, however, that the basis of

his division into groups is natural and could he vetaiued, In his revision (1928a)

he extended the seven groups outlined in his 1928 paper to thirteen, and since he

also used the setation of the 2nd and 8rd endopods as the chief character for

separation into erowps, these can be eompared with the genera outlined here,

Ilis first five greups, correspond to Amphiascupsis and Aimphuiscus sens. str. as

defined here; the next five are comparable with Mesamphiasews, but ineluce also

species here regarded as belonging to Rober(sonia; the remaining three growps

correspond {6 Amphiascoides, but elude species whieh belong to Sehiapera,

The revision attempted here takes clnphiascopsis Garvey (1927h) as the

starting point, and is based on the setation of the middle segments of the 2nd

and 3rd endopods. Where possible, this character is supported by other features.

The first and last genera, slinphiascopsis and Amphiascotdes, are clearly defined

while, of the other two, -Laaplitscus seis, ste. eortaina those species which are

erouped round wl. lengirestris and tall short, in one character or anolher, from

inclusion in Amphiaseapsiss Mesamphiascus ig little more than an assemblage

of species showing only one conmon characteristic, but as a whole clearly inter-

mediate between Aymphiascus sens. str. and Amphiascoides.

Broadly defined the new genera are as Follows (further details are given

helow ) s—

1. Ampliacopsie Gurney (modified) ; and TL, Amphiascns sain. ati. Species with 2 inver setae on

the middle seyments of the Zid and ted endopoda.

111, Mesamphiasous, Species wilh 2 immer setae an the middle segment of the 2nd endopod and

| immer sela on the middle segment of the 6rd endopod,

LV. Ampliaseoides, Species with 1 inner seta on the middle segments of both 2nd sal Sed

endopods.

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ARMATURE OF THE SWIMMING LEGS WITHIN THE GENUS.

As stated above, Amphiascopsis is the starting point of a series which links

on with Dactylopusia. The remaining genera form a natural sequence in which

the setation is gradually reduced. Amphiascus sens, str. forms a transitional group

leading to Mesamphiascus but retaining the typical setation of the 2nd and 3rd

endopods. Mesamphiascus, admittedly a grouping of convenience, is in turn

regarded as transitional between Amphiascus sens. str. and Amphiascoides. The

last forms a group as homogeneous as could be expected.

To illustrate the reduction in setation which is observable in the series of

genera a summary in tabular form of the total number of ‘‘setae’’ in legs 1-5 is

given for each genus. (The term ‘‘setae’’ is used in its widest sense to include

spines.) Only 91 out of the total of over 110 species are dealt with in the table,

since for the remainder nothing is known about the setation of the 2nd and 3rd

legs, and in many of the examples included the information is often incomplete.

The following table shows the distribution of species according to total number

of setae and spines on legs 1-5 within the genus Amphiascus sens. lat. :

Genus p-l. p.2. p.3. p.4. 5,

exp end. exp. end. exp. end. exp, prox dist.

mn m ica - mn nm nm n mn mn

& w w ws « © we : «e 9

Amphiascopsis 8 25 719 1119 918 12 14 8 1 12 14 6 1 7 2

(30 species) 7 4 11 4 ams ©: a 5 26 6 28

4 3

Amphiascus sens. str. 8 11 Toe Wh 27 9 7 12 4 710 12 6 5 15 6 15

(15 species) 7 4 6 1 10 8 2 ll 65 6 1 11 38

7p ste 1,1 10 2

Mesamphiascus 8 16 722 11 7 811 11 7 7 12 2 12 5 22 6 18

(26 species) 7 6 6 2 1011 7 9 10 8 611 11 7 4 4 5 §

6 4 9 2 6 4 9 3 5 1 10 4

8 3 8 1 9 2

Ampliiascoides 6 23 6 21 9 6 7 20 9 20 6 22 10 18 5 21 6 7

(23 species) 8 15 9 3 4 2 5 16

It can be seen from this table that there is a gradual reduction in the number

of ‘‘setae’’ throughout the series as grouped here. In Amphiascopsis 25 of the

species have the full number of ‘‘setac’’ on the lst exopod; of those with only

7, south-georgiensis lacks the inner seta on the middle segment and the other

3 lack a ‘‘seta’’ from the terminal segment. In Amphiascoides, on the other

hand, each of the species has only 6 ‘‘setae’’—an outer spine on each of the first

two segments, and 4 ‘‘setae’’ on the end segment.

A similar trend can be followed in the 2nd and 3rd legs; in the case of the

endopods this is partly due to the loss of one inner seta on the middle segments,

by which the genera have been defined. But in the 4th leg, only 3 of the 17 species

of Amphiascopsis for which data are available have less than 12 ‘‘setae’’ on the

exopods, whereas in Amphiascoides, where our knowledge is fairly complete,

none of the 21 species has more than 10. In the endopods of this lee every species

of Amphiascopsis has 7 ‘‘setae’’ (fucicolous apparently 8), while in Amphias-

coides 6 is the constant figure.

Tt should further be noted that of the 8 species (brevis, dentatus, obscurus)

known to have 7 ‘‘setae’’ on the distal segment of the 5th leg, 2 belong to

Amphiascopsis (the position of brevis is uncertain) and that no species in this

genus has less than 6; the majority of those in Amphiascoides have only 5. It

may be of interest to note that the 6 species with 9-seemented Ist antennae

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOMIIONTIDAR 71

(Mouard’s nasutus-group) also belong to Amphiascopsis, to which may be added

australis recently deseribed trom South Australia.

Anphiasous sens, str. and Mesamphiascus are clearly interraediate in reduc-

tion in umber of setae,

Tt has been stated above that Aympliascopsis appears to be most closely

related 1n Dactylopusia, it being suggested that both arose from a eoniinon stock

in which the middle segments of the endopods in legs 2-+ all had 2 tmuer setae,

aw condition which oceurs. for instance. in the Tishidae, and that one of these

setae was lost from the 2nd leg in Daetylopusia and from the 4th leg in

Amphiasens, (7)

Servernre op Ten Piero Lag wiht Tre SUBPAMILY.

Those species of Deetylopusia with 7 **setae’’ on the clistal segment of the

Sth leg (thishoides and wmieronye) have two thin terminal setac, with 2 inver

and 3 outer spines; in those with 6 ‘‘setae’’ it is in an inner spine which is lost,

The same happens in Amphiaseds—in obseurus, dentalus, and brevis, the only

species known to have 7 ‘setae’? here. the arrangement is as in Daclylopusia

and in the speeies with 6 ‘setae’? it is an inner spine whieh goes, leaving two

terminal sctae, exserted, with 1 immer and 3 outer spines. The further vednetion

to S-*setae”’ is attained by the loss of an outer spine, asin varies (iis of Bare,

1906, pl. xevii),

The very wide basal and distal segments of the Sth leg in Dactylopusia ave

also retained in Aymphiascopsis. Tr is interesting to note that the Dactylopusoid

shape of the Sth leg is more prominent in those species of Ampliascopsis which

retain the Daetylopusoid first leg; it occurs in 18 out of the 30 species listed

here, the others show a gradual narrowing of the basal segment with elongation

of the distal segment, finally reaching the eondition found in hanaltens,

Tn Amphiascus sens, ste, ouly 2 speeies (pallidus and ubysst) have wide 5th

jugs, and these species differ from Amphiascopsis in the shortening of the midcle

segment of the exopod and basal segment of the endopod in the first leg, and

elongation of the end segments of this endopod. The remaining species in this

eroup of 1) all shiny an clongation of the distal segment of the 5th low, culminating

in the shape found in whines, giesbrechtt, and pestal,

A moderately elongate shape is found throughout Mesamphiascus, aceon-

panied in some eases by the loss of a spine trom the distal segment. This elonga-

lion is carvied to its extreme in spinifer, normani, denticulatus, aud blanchardi

in whieh the distal outer spine tends to become modified into a short spr. These

spevies, and the majority of the others in this genus, have an inner seta on the

iniddle segment of the Ist exopod and 5 ‘setae’? on the end segment, Hight

species, however, have lost this seta, and while four of these (hadbifer, eryitracus,

enigues, and simulans) have also lost a ‘seta’? from the end sezment, ihis is

retained by the other four (amblyaps, pacificus, parvis, and sinudtus). OF ihe

lust four, three are difficult to distinguish (andlyaps differs from Whe others in

haying 2 inner setae ou the end segment of the ded exopod instead of one )-

Two species (junodé and mathot) retain the iimer seta or the mide seament

but have lost one of the setae’? from the end sexment, and are similar iy Other

respects, While differing from Mesamphiaseus in general. The four species men-

tioned above (hulbifer, ete.) haye a first exopod of the type found in Amphurs-

coules. The Sth low as of the general type for the genus.

OF the 23 ‘good?’ species of simphiaxcvides listed here only 7 have 6 “setae”

on the distal seement of the ath lee (elenophorus, dictydiophorus, ecdudatus.

(1) Appurently at Isash one species of Daehyloymsia shill vetaine the 2 inaer rebaw on fhe

iniddle segments of the endopods of Jege 2,2 and O15 seen in cewlata Gurney (TVET, pe otha).

72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ilievecensis, spinulosus, pygmaeus and rostratus) and in these the shape is usually

that of the type found in Mesamphiascus (with the exception of rostratus, which

has a subcireular distal segment), and a distribution of setae similar to that of

the same genus.

In the remaining species the shape varies from the wide form to an elongate

form, most of the species showing an intermediate condition, wide basally and

tapering distally. The ‘‘setae’’, 5 in number on the distal segment, are 2 inner

spines, a delicate terminal seta, and 2 outer spines. In some, the 2nd inner spine

is less robust and siuated terminally, as in those forms with 6 ‘‘setae.’’? The first

arrangement is shown by debits (cf. Sars, 1911, pl. civ), the second by subdebilis

Willey (1935, Fig. 49). It is interesting to note that Willey’s variety subdebilis

intermixtus shows the debilis arrangement, which occurs in 13 of the species of

Amplhiascoides, This form, which has recently been found in South Australia,

has been raised to specific rank.

In Robertsonia the same arrangement of ‘‘setae’’ on the 5th leg is found

as in those species of Amphiascoides and Mesamphiascus which have 6 ‘‘setae’’;

in all, the segment is short and wide, without elongation.

Schizopera is interesting in that though the distal segment of the 5th leg

may have 5 or 6 ‘‘setae’’ there is only one seta definitely terminal in position, show-

ing its derivation from the reduced forms of Amphiascoides. I have not made

an exhaustive study of the genus, but have examined a dozen species in this particu-

lar connection, from among those described by Sars (1909b) and by Gurney

(1928).

CoMPARISON OF THE Maures WirHin tee Faminy.

Support for the classification of the Diosaccidae outlined above is obtained

from an examination of the males, though as with the females there is a certain

amount of overlapping between genera.

Apart from the 1st antenna, the chief modifications in the males are in the

basipod of the Ist leg, the endopod of the 2nd leg, and a reduction in the 5th lee.

In the Ist leg either the inner spine on the basipod is enlarged or the inner edge

of the basipod bears a number of short spurs or spines. Two species, erythracus

and dactylifer, show a combination of both forms of modification. In some cases

there is no modification in the first lee, which is identical with that of the female.

The 2nd endopod is usually only 2-segmented in the males, the 2nd and

3rd segments being fused, but occasionally a 3-seemented endopod occurs as in

pacificus and spinulosus. The endopod in a typical 2-segmented form, such as

cinctus or longirostris, bears 1 inner seta on the basal segment, and 2 or 3 inner

setae, 1 or 2 terminal setae, one of which may be modified into a slender spine,

and 2 large outer spines, on the distal segment. Occasionally one of the outer

spines is reduced and slender, sometimes occurring as a seta, while in other cases

the two large spines appear to be fused into one much wider spine. Of the species

with 3-segmented endopods, pacificus bears two inner setae on the 2nd segment,

and spinulosus one, as in their respective females. In the former, the outer spine

is clearly borne on the 2nd segment, whereas in spinulosus there are two large

spines on the outer margin of the end segment. The end segment bears 1 inner

and 2 terminal setae in pacificus and 1 inner and 1 terminal in spinilosus.

The 5th legs are smaller than those of the females, the basal segments of

opposite sides are always united in the mid-line, and usually bear 2 spines, occa-

sionally 3, The end segments bear 4-6 ‘‘setae’’ arranged in a manner comparable

with those of their respective females. Males are known for 60 species.

In Amphiascopsis males have been described for 19 species. Of these the

Ist leg has been deseribed in 12 cases, in 8 of which the inner spine on the basipod.

is enlarged; in the other 4 cases there is no enlargement but a modification of

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 73

the inner edge of the basipod. The 2nd endopod has been deseribed in every

vase, and in 17 of these there are 2 Jarge spines inserted on the oufer margin of,

the fused end seaments, In the other two cases the ouler appendage ts cither a

weak spine or a seta,

The Sth leg is deseribed in 18 species, in 13 of which 6 ‘‘setae’’ are present,

arranged as 2 inner spines, 1 thin terminal seta, anc % outer spines; in one there

are only a ‘setae’? and in the other 4 there ave only 4 ‘*setae,’’ but in every one

of these there is a single thin terminal seta.

Tn Amphiuscus sens. si. males are known for 10 of the species, The Ist leg

has been deseribed in all but twe. Only 2 of these have an enlarged spine, in

the other 6 there is a varying awumber of spurs or spines on the inner edge of the

basipod, The 2nd endopod resembles that of the typical Amphinscopsts species

in every ease. The Sth leg has the Amphiaseopsid number aud arrangement of

setae in 6 cages, the other 4 showing a veduetion.

In Vesomphiascus, in which males are known for 16 species, the Ist leg has

been deseribed in only 8 inslanves, One of these shows the enlarged spine, 6 have

the Tuner edge of the basipod modified, and one (erythraeus) shows a combina-

tion of loth. The 2nd endopod is like that of Ay phiascopsis in every case Init

two; in porous there is a small outer spine accompanied by a seta, and prerfieus

lus a S-seomented endopod deseribed above.

The Sth lees normally have 4 ‘setae,’’ 2 miner spines, 1 thin terminal seta

and 2 outer spines; this oceurs iv 10 species. Four of the remainder show the

Jlmphiascopsis condition, and 2 have only 4 ‘setae,’ in both there is 4 single

thin terminal seta,

In Amphiascoides males ave known for 10 speries, and the Ist leg has been

deseribed in 6 vases, None lias the inter spine enlarged, 4 have the inner edge

of the basipod with spurs, and 2 are quite nomodified, Ti those cases where the

Ist leg has not been specially mentioned it is probable that if resembles the

female, and is therefore woamociified,

The 2nd endopod is desevibed in 10 vases. There is a large terminal spine

in 7 of these, 4 of which have an outer spine as well, and the remaining 3 haye

an otter spine only. The 5th leg, deseribed for 9 species, has the 2.1.2 arrange-

ment of Mesamphiascus, except in clenophorys whielt has 2.1.3.

Summarizing, it can he stated that in Amphiascopsis, cinetus is typical of

the majority; inner spine ou Ist basipod enlarged; 2nd endopod with 2 large

outer spines inserted about the middle of (he end segment aud a large terminal

spine as well as setae; Sth lex with 2 mner spines, J thin terminal seta and 3 outer

spines on the (listal seement. This conditiow heeomes vedueed through the

series of genera, with a certain amount of overlapping between genera, to the

debilis eoudilion in Amphiaseoides, in which the two end segments have heeome

completely fused and all trace of a middle gegmeut is lost, The end segment is

procuced into & large spine, and there are 2 inner setae, one of whieh probably

represents a terminal seta,

Males are known for 5 of the species listed under '*Speetes inquaerendae”’.

In Roberlsonia males ave known in every speeies exeapt inrusa, and the

sextial modifieations are the same in each. The inner margin of the basipod bears

a varying number of spur-like projeetions. but the inner spine is gever enlarged,

The 2nd endopod, normally 2-seemoented Int S-segmented in prapingua, accord -

ine ta Sewell (1924) and stated to be 3-segmented in celtied (Monard, 1935), but

of the usual appearance judging from the fisiive, bears 1 inner seta on the basal

sepment, | mer seta on the Zud seement when free, and in a comparable position

when fused with the end seyment, sad on what corresponds to the terminal

sexment 1 infer seta, 2 terminal setae, one of which may be spine-like, and 2 large

outer spines.

74 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The 5th leg shows 6 ‘‘setae’’; 2 inner spines, 1 thin terminal seta, and 8 outer

spies,

In those 5 species of Sehizopera, of which 1 have seen deseriptions of males,

the Ist leg may he inoditfied in either of the two ways described above or inay be

unmodified. The 2nd endopod shows one constant difference from preceding

genera in that there is no inner seta on the basal segment, The 5th leg shows

the condition found in Amphiascoidles, except that the 2 outer spines of the distal

segment are usually considerably reduced.

In the Diosaccinae the male of the monotypie Pseudediosaccus is unknown ;

it Diosaceus males are known for tenwicornis and spinatus, Tn the first of these

the inner edge of the first basipod bears a hook-like spur, and the spine is not

enlarged; the second endopod is comparable with the condition in Amphias-

copsis, but the fused end seginents have become greatly reduced in size. In the

fifth leg the distribution of setae is not clear, but is comparable with the condition

in wl. similis and A. minutus, D, spinatus is said to resemble tennicormis, but with

fewer setae on the fifth lee.

In Diosaccopsis ismaclensis the first basipod does not appear to be modified,

the secoud endopod is three-segmented with tivo small outer spines on the end

segment. The fitth leg is typical of that in Amphiascopsis,

Talysus shows the enlarged spine on the first. basipod, but this is not modified

in Parialysus ; the second endopod is two-segmented, with a pair of adjacent spines

ou the outer ede of the end segment in both genera, The fifth legs lack one inner

spine, but the outer spines are well developed, and the thin terminal seta is present.

In general the struetire of the males of the Diosaccinae supports the suggested

derivation from Amphiascopsis,

The suggested derivation of the Stenheliinae tron Amphiascoides receives

strong support from the strueture of the males. The first basipod shows no inodifi-

¢ation, the second endopod is almost exactly as in A. debilis, and the setae of the

fifth lee are redueed in number,

Amptuascopsis Gurney 1927b.

The genus is herein defined by the following characters :

1, Middle segment of 2nd and 8rd endopods euch with 2 setae.

4 Middle segment of lat exopod longer than either Ist ov dvd segments, and always with

an inner seta(?),

3. Basal segment of ist endopod longer than whole exopod; 2nd and 3rd segments short,

together fot more than 4 of busi.

4. Legs 2-4 with the Eollowing seta formula for the inner margins:

Endopad. Exopod,

B+ 1.2.1,. 1,4..2,

pea. 1,3,3, 118 or 2,

pel, 1.1.2. 1.1.8 or 8,

c

fh, Distal segment of Sth leg with at least 6 setae,

Tt will be seen that this definition inmeludes all those species transferred by

Gurney to this genus, and by extending the somewhat limited definition of his

genus a large number of species fall naturally into it. One of the most charaeter-

istic features is the second in the above list, which expresses in a slightly altered

forme that placed first in Gurney’s list of distinguishing characters (Gurney, 1927b,

p.515). In many eases where the number of setae on the second and third legs is

unlnown, species have been placed in this genus on the appearance of the first

legs. The group is further characterized by showing little or no reduction from

the full niinher of setae folind in Amphiascus as a whole.

(2) A. sowth-georgicnsix appeare lo lack the inner seta,

NicHoLtes—DIosaccipAE AND LAQPHONTIDAE 75

The type species for the genns is cinedus (Claus) as deseribed by Sars (1911,

p. 149, pl, xei, xeii), If may be Inferred trom the fact that it heads Gurney’s list

of specivs that le also regards this 4s the type, though he (dloes not state so

specifically,

The venis Ainphiascopsis now contains the Following species

minutus (Claus) 1863; cinetus and sianili¢ (Claus) 1806; “hansent (Beady) 1899; “eey-

lanieus, Tentatus, *hariltoni, *harctneki, larsutus and “robvalue (Thompson and Seott) 1903;

maldivensis (Wolfenden) 19050; alicnuatiis, obseurns, and phullepas (Sara), wusutius (Boeek

Ms., Sars) LOO; Tutifolius (Sara) (W098; thalestroides (Sora) 1911; “fvelcolus (T. Seott) 1912;

lagunaris (Gvandorl) 1925; avayptine and hirtus (Gurney) 1927bhj tmperator, latilobus, ser-

acdlatus and tenuteodlua (Monard) 28; hanyntensis (Monard) W283 monardi (Lang) 19d;

gracilis aud south-qeorgionsia (Lang) 19360; anatralis aud longipes Nivholls 1941.

These species all show the typical structure of the fivsh exopod. (lang has not

iNustrated the first lez of manerdi). Those whose seta formulae are ynknown for

“oy of lees 24 areinarked by an (*), Un addition there area lew species in whieh

we do not know the oimber of setacon the basal sewments of these lees (Lanyulensis,

lagunaris, serselilus)

Of the above listed speeies attenyatus forms an exception in having the end

seements of the first endopod together slightly more than one-third of the basal,

and seasctefus in having the middle sewment of the first exopod no longer than the

basal segment, thongh clearly lonyer than the end sesment. Both of these species

ave otherwise sood examples of the genus, so far as 14 known.

Tt should be noted here that none of the species which definitely come mia

Mesumphiaseus and Amphiaseaides has uu cularged middle segment in the first

exapod,

With reeard to the synonymy in this genus, dubius Jakub. (1933) is nndoubt-

edly a form of s7milis (Claus), As cdeseribed and figured by Jakiubisiak there are

minor dilferences, but as Monard has pointed unt (1928, p, A79, fie, 28, 2; and 1935,

p, 26) this form shows small variations trom the type, There appears to be no

real differenee, apart from size, between Airsutus (Thompson and Seott) and ban-

yilensis Monard s but the form deserihed by Movard (1928) as hirsulus (Thonup-

gon and Scott) differs from banyulensis to a greater extent than does the uriginal

dleseription.

The species cdeseribed as fucicalas by T. Seott is unusual in that the fourth

vndopod shows three immer setae on the end seoment; the first leg ia clearly of the

Amphiascopsid type.

For thi setation of the logs of /equnaris I have relied on Monard (1928a, p,

36Y), in which it is indicated that this species has the inll setation found im

cinetus, Other details are given by Lvian (1928).

Concerning phyllopus Sars (1906), Monard (1937, p. 36) atates that the end

seginent of the fourth exopod has seven setae and not eight as stated in his revision,

but he later reniarks (hat examples from Banyuls had eight setae, Sars does not

illustrate the fourth lee of phyllopus, but states that the natatory legs exhibit the

full number of setae. TE the niinber ean wary between seven and eight, then

monardé Lang (1984) would appear to be a synonym of phylupus (unfortunately

Lang does not illustrate the first leg, but his deseription shows that it is probably

of the Amphiaseupsicl bype) ; tE the number ts constant then Monard’s specimens

from Banyiils (1928) were phayllopus, while his Aleerian material (1937) would

he wonardi, The illustration of the fifth leg given by Lang agrees well with Sars’

figure for phyllopus, but the male second endopod appears ta differ. The species

ave probably, therefore, cdistinet,

While if is tempting to widen the seope of Aumpliascopsis to include such

forms as cathorinae and demersus with their typical first legs, particularly in the

furmer, by admitting forms which laek au inner seta on the basal segments of one

ar more oF the second (o fourth exopods, there would then be little reason for ex-

76

RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

eluding varicalor, which differs from these only in lacking one of the inner setae

on the end segment of the seeond endopod; this form leads on to walens, with an

identical seta formula, but has the end segments of the first endopod together con-

sidevahly more than one-third of the basal. The division of Amphtascus into

genera is beset with such problenis as this, and Monard (1928a) considers that the

venus forms such a natural series that it cannot be divided, even into subgenera.

In attempting a division into genera if beeomes Lecessary to draw a line some-

where, however arbitrary.

Tt should be noted that those species in the above list which have been marked

With an (*) may later, when their setation is known, prove to belong not to Ay-

phiascopsis bit to Am phiaseus seis, str,

1,

Knv Tro AMPHTASCOPSIA FRMALBR.

End aegment of ard exopod with 2 inner setac ae te oa wm &

Bnd segment of 3rd exopod with 3 inner setae : t 2

Kind segments of Ist ondopod together about 14, of basal hv | thalestroides (Sars) 1911,

End scyments of Ist endopod together no more than + of basal . 3.

End segments of 1st endopod together about 4 of basal in hirtus (Gurney) 192 7,

Hind segments of Ist endopod together no more than yj, of husal . 4,

End segment of 4th exopod with 2 inner setae - “a -deuablonis (Mfonard) 1928,

Hind segment of 4th exopod with % inner setac ‘- : red 5.

Distal segment of 4th leg elongate, oval, twiee as long as wide non wioulus (Monara) 1928,

Distal segment of 5th leg snb-civeulay, almost as wide aalong — ., (gracilis (Lang) 19s6e,

. End segment of 4th exopod with 2 inner setae 4 ? ait st TV

End segment of 4th exopod with 4 inner seta i! us fe ws 8,

Distal segment of Sth leg elongitte, oval, nearly twiee as long us wide — similis (Claus) 1866,

Distal segment of 5th leg sub-eiverlar, ‘almost aa wide as long , monardi (Lang) 1934,

2nd and ard segments of Ist endopod fused Li is hansent (Brady) 1 1890).

2nd and 3rd segments of Ist endopod separate a i L. re 3

End segment of 4th endopod with 2 inner setae ne ,. 10,

End segment of 4th endopod with 3 inner setae ls « fueivolus (T. Seott) 1918.

Exopod of 2nd antenna 2-seymented ——, Oo als ole o AT.

Exopod of 2nd antenna d-segmented —.. , rie : oy 18,

End segments of Ist endopod together ahout 1% of hs ls attenadtus (Sars) 1906,

End segments of Ist endopod about. V4 of hasal Pa ' oi U2,

Distul segment of Sth leg elongate, rectangular, twiee as long aa a wide,

hamiltont (Thompson und Scotty 1903,

Distal segment of 5th leg oval, half as long again as wide.

dentatus (Thompson snd Scott) 1903,

End segmouts of Ist endopod together about 14 of basal ta australis Nicholls 1941,

End segments of Ist endopod together less than 14 of basal ,. ue ., 14,

Middle segmeit of lat exopod with imner seta it ao 18,

Middle segment of Ist exopod without immer seta. , south- -qeorgionsis (Tang) 1936e,

End segments of Ist endopod at least 14 of basal 4s ts cise -. 16,

End segments of Ist endopod no more than 14 of basal . it ot 1 BS.

Distal segment of Sth leg elongate, twice ae long as wide.

robuatus Phonepeon and Seott) 1903.

Distal segment of Hth leg sub-elveular, almoat aa wide aa long. , ea) bly

Basal segment of Sth leg with 4 setne .. pen orrout (Thompson and Seott) 1908,

Basal segment of 5th leg with 5 actae ., ’ ono ml Oy

Distal segment of Sth leg with G setne .. “. _ ~. 1,

Distal segment of Hth leg with 7 aetae — . =. obxemiis (Sars) 1996,

Caudal rami about us long as wide . “4 os oP 4 20.

Caudal rami at least twiee as wide aa long vt e- ay 37.

Basal expansion of 5th leg wide aid rounded i pap latilobus (Monard) 1928,

Basal expansion of Ath leg suh-conieal .. -- a muretus (Claus) 1866,

Ist antenna 8-segmented we ' ° . bmperator (Monard) 1928.

Ist antenna 9-segmented ate . tc maldivensiv (Wolfenden) 1905a.

NIcHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 77

29, Middle segment of Ist exopod 3 times as long us basal segment — Jatifobius (Sars) 19098,

Middle seginent of Lat exopod ubout twice basal a tr we 2a,

Middle seyment of Ist exopod not more than half as long ugain as lisal segment .. 26.

23, Distal segment of Sth log halt as Tong again as wide . - . ofa -» 94.

Distal segment.of Sth leg almost as wide us long -- ts 4 s+ 35,

24. Ist antenna 8-segmented “ '- ol as minutus (Claus) 1863.

Ist antenna §-segmontod ve $i vy naxutis (Boeck MS,, Sars 1906).

25, End segments of Ist endopod together I of basal ,, . lagumariv (Grandori) 1026,

End segments of Ist endopod lesa than 14 basal 4, of longipes Nicholls 1941.

26. Jat anterma §-segmonted 7 ~ ne “ = ose BT,

Ist antenna P-segpmented “4 i e + os 13 29,

27. Ist exopod only half of whole endopod | . a - aeguplius (Gimmey) 1927b.

Ist oxopod almost. 3% of whole endopod -. se ” " +s 28.

28, Distal segment. of 5th leg oval a Pr vt whyllapus (Bars) 1906,

Distal segment of th leg almost square —. . havelocki (Lhompaon and Beott) 1903,

29, Length 0«5 mm. .. a: ' 2 banyilensis (Monard) 1928.

Length over 1 min o« on ., hivgutia (Thompson and Seatt) 1908,

AMPHIASCUS Sens. str.

This genus, which is very close to Amphiaseopsis, contains those species whieh

depart. from that genus in one or more respects. It ean be defined as follows:

1, Middle segments of 2nd and.3rd endopods each with 2 setae;

2, Middle segmont of Ist exopod usually not enlarged, but always with an inner seta;

3. Basil segment of lst endopod usnally litle or no Tonger than exopod; 2nd und 8rd seg-

ments together usually groator than one-third of basal segment;

4, Lega 2-4 with seta formula usually as in Amphiascopais, but with reduced setation if

resombling lmphiascupsia in chatacters 2 and/or 35

5, Distal segment of Sth leg with at least 6! setue??.

Tt will be seen that this genus is difficult to define as a whole, and really

amounts to a grouping of those species which, while Amphiascopsid in most of

their features, depart from the strict definition of that genus in one or more

characters.

So far as a ivpe can be selected under such circumstances the speeimen de-

seribed by Sars (1911, p. 159, pl. e, ei) and aseribed by him to A, longirostris

(Claus) is typical of the majority of the species placed in this genus. [t is unfor-

tunate that Claus’ deseription is so meagre that some considerable doubt was ex-

pressed hy Sars (loc. ctf. p. 160) as to whether his specimens should really be

aseribed to Claus’ species,

The following specivs are included here:

lonyirostris (Clans) 1868; abyss (Bocck) 1872; tenniremis (Brady and Robertson) 1875;

giesbrechti and pallidus Sars 1906; cathirinae TV Seott 1906a; tylacialis Brady 1910; varicalar

”

Parran 1918; eandaespinosus Brian 1927a; valens Gurney LW27hs pyrocides and ultimus Monard

1928; Wownneus Willey 1981; peatat Monard 1985; demersva Nicholls 1999.

Concerning ylucialis there is some doubt, since it is almost certain that Brady

has figured the second leg, although it is labelled ““dritter fuss’’ (possibly a trans-

lutor’s slip) ; it may, therefore, belong to Mesamphiascus.

The members of this genus all show the two mner setae on fhe middle seg-

ments of the second and third endopods and the inner seta on the middle segment

of the first exopod, but differ from Amphiascopsis in some other partiewlar, either

in the first legs or in having a reduced number of setae on legs 2-4. Tn this respeet

they are intermediate between Amphiascopsis and Mesumphiasrius,

Of these species abyssi, giesbrechti, pallidus, tenwiremis and ultimus have the

middle segment of the first exopod as long as the end segment, and demersus, pestat

and vualens have this segment only very slightly longer than the end segment; in

abyssi, pallidus and giesbrechti the first exopod is longer than the basal endopod,

78 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

and in these three and the following additional species the end stements of the

first endopod are together more than one-third of the basal segment: glacialis,

langirastris, pestat, pyroeides, tenuiremis, ultimus, and valens. A tew, brunneus,

catharinae, demersus, pyroeides and varicolor, while retaining one or both of

these Amphiaseopsid characters, differ from the members of that genus in the

reduction in setation, They, with the exception of catharinae and demersus, lack

one of the “‘setae’’ from fhe end segment of the first exopod, while the same five

species, with the possible exception of pyrocides, and the addition of valens. lack

inner setae on the basal segments of the exopods.

Lacking information ou the setation of the second and third legs it has not

hee possible to include catharinae in the key, Seott states that in some respects

it comes very close to minutus, but since it differs from that species in the setation

of the fourth exopod it would be nnwise to assume no difference in the setation of

levs 2 and 3,

Concerning candaespinosus, Brian (1927a) does not illustrate or describe the

swimming legs, but Monard (1928a, p. 369) includes it in his cinelus-eroup, and

indicates that it has the full setation of the latter form. From Brian’s fimure of

the first leg, however, it is clear that it does not conform to the eondition found in

Amphiascopsis, and inst, therefore, be placed in Amphiascus sens, str, Assuming

it has the full setatiou of cinctus it can be seen that it oceupies a position inter-

mediate between pallidus and abyssi, somewhat nearer the former, from whieh it

can he distingiished on the proportions of the first endopod and fifth leg.

Key 10 AMPHIASCTS sens. str. Pmaranes.

1. Busal segment uf 2nd endopod without seti Sm ale Drunneus Willey 1931,

Basal segment of 2nd endopod with seta ., te ba a 3

2. Basal segment of 2nd exopod without inner setae . , ve

Basal segment of 2nd exopod with inner seta an a4 , —s

%, Ast exopod half length of whole endopod; end segments of endopod agual,

warwolor Marran 1912,

Ist exopod 3% of whole endopod; end segment longer than middle sugment.

valens Gurney 1927b.

4. End segment of 8vd exopod with 2 innor setan ae td + vw «Gs

Hnd segment of 8rd exopod with J tiner setae -+. a) ue iL &

©, Hud segments of 1st endopod together about YY of lnsal a) “ ve 6.

End segments of Ist ¢ndopod together no move than of Dasal .. 4. ae

6. Caudal rami bulbous, hirsute 7 +t ot pestai Mouard 1935,

Caudal rami normal, rectangular - ' = ultimus Monayd 1928,

7, Basal segments of 3rd and 4th exopads without inner setae 8s demerans Nicholls 1930,

Basal segments of 8rd and 4th exopods with innor autue.

tenniremis (Brady and Robertson) 1875,

8, dst exopod longer than basal endopod ., ea . .. we 8:

Ist exopod no longer, usually much shovter than basal endopod -. as ». 12,

§. Distal segment of 5th leg twice as ong as wide; caudal seta with pronounced lateral process,

Mesbrechti Sars 1906,

Distal segment of 5th leg not more than hulf as long agai aa wide; caudal setue without

procusses » . ; oe «+ 10;

10, End segments of Ist endopod subequal .. 24 caudacspinosus Brian 1927a,

End segment of Ist eudopod twice us long as puddle seyment .. n6 -- di,

11. End segments of Ist endopod tegether equal to basal segment; segments of Ist antenna

short and compressed as os te aa abyssi (Boeck) 1878.

End segments of Lat ondopod together only 34 of Nasal; sexments of Ist antenna normal.

pallidus Sava 1906,

12. FExopod of 2nd antenna 2-segmented — . . 4 -. pyravides Monard 1928.

Exopod of 2nd antenna 3-segmented —.. é. os xk +. 1.

14. Cundal rami wider than long ie .- longirostris (Claus) 1863.

Caudal rumi longer than wide =. =. . gavialis Brady 1910.

“~

v=]

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAF

MrsAMPUTASCTIS gen, nov.

Amphiaseus having two and one limer setae on the middle serments of the

second and third endopods respectively,

This group ts a somewhat arbitrary eolleetion of species showing considerable

range in sefation, some species such as a@mblyops having the nomber of setae ap-

proaching that of Aonphiascopsis, while others show a vediueed sefation approach-

ing the condition in the next gonns. It is, therefore, diffienlt to select a type species,

nit perhaps parnus Sarvs (1906, p, 162, pl. eiii) is suitable, occupying a mare or

less central position in the genus, and haying a fairly wide distribution, Tt has

heen recorded trom the Mediterranean on three oceasions, from Bermuda, wid from

Woods Ilole, in addition to the original Jocalities ia Norway.

Tt is of interest to note Ghat all those species having the more unusnal shape af

fAfth log shown hy denticulatus are coutained m this genus, The following species

belong here;

wmus (Brady) 1872; denticutatus (1. C. Thompson) 1893; blanehardl (T. and A. Seott)

TRO5; erythracus (A, Scott) W025 confusus (UV. Seott) 1002, wimudans and varians (Norman sad

Scott) 1908: pacigous (Surs) 19050; ecignus, parvus, prophigius, sinuatia, tenellag,yand ly plilops

(Sars) 1906; anhlyops, hulhifer, lagenitostris, norman’ and typhlaidey (Says) 1911; spinifer

(Marvan) 1913; anguxtipes (Gurney) 127hy junedi (Monurd) L985; mathot wand salamat

(Monird) 19850; guathierit (Monard) 1936, 1 = angustipes (Gurmey) 1927h.

Sars (1906) identified a species as A. dinns (Pavady, 1872, 1880), but later

(1911, p, 378) deeided that his earlier identification was Incorrect, and that if

should have been recorded as varians (Norman anc Scott, 1905, 1906) both having

been deseribed as distinet species by Norman and Seott. This appears to be eor-

rect, but Monard (1928, p. 389) finds no difference between Sars’ propinguus

(1906, p. 158, pl xeix) and diaiws (Brady). Asa matter of fact proprnqeus has a

quite different setation inthe fourth lee from that shown by Brady for mus (1880,

pl. xhii), and propinguus so far from being a reduced form of pus, actually has

more setae. The form identified as mus (Brady) by Monard is eorrectly allo-

cated, bit prapiiquus (Sars) is distinet, and approaches varians (Norman and

Seott), from whieh it ean be distinguished by the shape and armature of the fifth

leas, proportions of the body, and of the rami of the fourth legs. These may prove

to be unimportant. in which case propinguus would be a synotivin of varians (de-

seribed by Sars in 1906 as dius),

Monard (1935, p. 2) states that sirwatus (Sars) and perpleavs (Thompson

and Seott) are synouyme, and gives a setue formula for perplerus which, as is

shown bere, agrees with neither perplecus uor sinuatus. The formulae, so far as

they are kovown and set out in the tanner used by Monard for comparison, are as

follows:

HiNMATS perplecns perplerus

(Sara) 106. (Thompsonand Seott) 1903. (Monard) 1915.

pees 6, 4.2, — fi, 4.2,

psy fi, tl, — fi. 5.1.

pe. 8. -— 8. 5.1. 8. 41.

Thus, while itis clear that Monard as not dealing with perpleaus (Thompson

and Seott) the possibility of perpleces being symonymons with sonuatus is not ex-

eluded by the setae formula. Gut there are other differences which mnst be re-

garded as significant tu this genus. The first lees of the two species differ in their

proportions, and perplexus has an inner seta on the first endopod whieli is lacking

in stuekitus ; the basal segment of the fifth leg also differs in shape, Monard docs

not figure his perplawus and it is, therefore, imeertain with what species he was

dealing, but it is clearly neither of these. As has heen seen perpleris is inade-

quately described, and thus Cannot with certainty be included in this genus. From

Thompson and Seott's deseription it can be cledueed that the natatory lees are

80 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

‘more or less’? as in dus, but no importanee ean he given to this statement sinee

the fourth legs, which are illustrated, are quite distinet from those of imus.

Monard (loc. cit., p, 29) also re-establishes the species tenaa Brian (1927a),

regarded by Gurney (1937b, p, 521) asa synonym of erythraens (A, Seott) 1902.

The only apparent difference between the two is in the proportions of the distal

segment of the fifth leg, which seems insufficient for the separation of a species,

and Gurney's view is, therefore, accepted.

For the rest, falklandiensis Lang (1936e) is a synonym of simulans (Norman

and Seott) 1905, 1906; and sahelensis Monard 1936 is a synonym of normani Sars

1911. This is very clear when one compares the description and figures of sahelen-

sis (loc. cit., figs. 4, 5) with Monard’s description of normani (1928, p. 388, figs.

31, 3, and 32, 1) as well as with Sars (1911, Supp. pl. xix) and Norman and Seott

(1906, p. 147, as Stenhelia longirostris).

Tt is doubtful whether ganthiert Monard (1936) should be regarded as a dis-

tinet species, since the only recorded feature in whieh it differs from angustipes

Gurney (1927b) is the arrangement of the setae on the basal segment of the fifth

leg,

Teissierella salammboi Monard (1935a) has been included here for the reasons

given below (p. 87).

Kry to MesaAMPHIASCUS PRMALES,

1, 2nd endopod without inner seta on basal segment ., " n if, Be

Snd endopod with inner seta on basal sogmont ba “i on wn Dy

2. Ist antenna 6-segmented; 2nd terminal seta of caudal ramus greatly swollen,

bulhifer (Says) 1911.

Ist antenna, §-segmented; caudal setae normal ie v3 junodi (Monard) 1935,

S. 2nd exopod without inner seta on basal sogment ae ba is oe

ind exopod with inner seta on basal segment ve “y " hh

4. End segment of 2nd exopod withont. Inner seta os en . 1

End segment of 2nd exopod with 1 inner sutn Par is oO

End segment of 2nd exopod with 2 innor setae is adlammboi (Monard) 19854,

5. Distal segment of 5th log ractungular, with 6 setae ,. ae eciguus (Burs) 1906,

Distal segment of Sth leg oval, with 5 setae ae -. mathot (Monard) 1985a,

fi. 2nd segment. of Ist antenna twice as lung as basal segment,

simulane (Norman and Scott) 1905.

2nd segment of Ist antenna about equal to Lat . erythraeus (A, Seott) 1902,

7. End segment of 2nd exopod with 1 inner seta 56 oh 7 . &

Lind segment of 2nd exoped with 2 inner setae oo on . oe 2%

$. End segment of 31d endopod with 2 inner setae = an + ve th

End segment of 3rd endopod with 3 Inner setac % on ¥ +» 12,

9. Middle sogment of 4th endopod without inner sota ., 13 tuphlops (Sars) 1906,

Middle segment of 4th endopod with inner seta 2¢ = ‘ wo 10.

1, End segment of 4th endopod with 1 inner seta : at ts inh

End segmont of 4th endopod with 2 inner setac be blanchardi (T. and A, Seott) 1895.

WH, Candal rami straight, inner termini seta with lateral procesa 9, lyphloider (Bars) 11,

Caudil rami curved, setae normil +e ‘ .- confiususa CT. Seatty) 1902,

12, End segment of 3rd exopod with 1 inner seta vs i 42 we 18.

End segment of 3rd exopod with 2 inner setae “ ta amblyops (Sava) 1911,

13. End segment. of 4th exopod with 2 inner setae ir zt a a. V4

End segment of 4th exopod with # hiner sates be Wb,

I4, Body segments fringed with spines; basal segment of Sth Jeg with outer distal process,

spinifer (Farran) 1913,

Body segments without spines; 5th Jeg normal me ++ lagewirostria (Bars) 1911,

15. 2nd segmont of Ist endoyiod lows than half of ond segment; exopod of 2nd antenna with seta

on middle segment oe a he ar . .. Lb.

2nd segment of Ist endopod more thay half of and segment; exopod of 2nd antenna without

seta on middle segment ‘0 + vs 4 parnus (Sars) 1906,

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 81

Ii, Rami of 2nd and 3rd legs equal “ 7 oe sinuatus (Sars) 1906,

Kndopods of 2nd and 3rd legs shorter than exopods .. oe pacificus (Sars) 1905a,

17, End segment of 3rd endopod with 2 inner setae , ~ i‘ .. 18.

find segment of 8rd endopod with & inner setac ar 4x ” .. 20,

18. 2nd segment of Ist antenna with apur .. .. dentioulatus (1.0. Thompson) 1893,

und segment of Ist antenna without spur ‘ ov Ve »» 19,

19. End segments of 3rd and 4th endopods with 2 nnd 1 immer setae respectively.

normant (Bare) 1911,

End segments of 8rd und 4th endopods with 3 and 2 inier aetac tespectively,

propinquus (Bars) 1906,

20. End segment of Ist endopod twice as long us 2nd segment w " re Bly

Kind segment. of Ist endopod at least 3 times as long as 2nd segment wy 22,

21. Sotne on basal segment of Sth leg arvanged asa tevminal pair, a middle pair and a single

proximal seta “9 di ae a .. goulliori (Monard) 1936.

Setae on basal segment of Sth leg equidistaiut - angustipes (Giuwney) 1927b,

22. Distal segment of Sth lag with 5 setae... ye varians (Norman and Seott) 1905,

Distal segment of Sth leg with 6 setae .. rar uf +4 . 32.

28. Distal segment of Sth log, elongate, oval .. = rt Imus (Brady) 1872,

Distal segment of Sth leg subreetangular - “4 lenellug (Sars) 1906,

AMPHIASCOIDES gen, nov.

The following characters define the genus:

1, Middle seponents of 2nd and 8rd endopods euch with 1 inner seta;

2, Middle segment of lat exopod without an itiner seta, and segment with only 4 setae and/or

BPINes 5

8, Logs 2-4 living basal segments of exopods always without inner seta, and the following

xota formula for the margins of the endopods:

p.2. 1.1.1.

pay 1,1,2,

ped. 1.1.1.

The satation of the exopods of these logs is tedueced, of the type shown in hispiduas, and in no ease

is the number as high as that found in Amphiascopsis (see Table, p. 13);

d. The yeduction in the number of setae is shown also in the 5th legs in whieh the distul

segment hus only 5 setae (With 7 exceptions),

This geuts—by virtue of the reduction in the number of setae—clearly forms

the connecting Jink between Amphiascus (sens. lat.) and Sehizopera. Vhe type

of the genus is regarded as debdlis (Giesbrecht) as deseribed by Sars (1911, p.

162, pl. civ).

The following spceies belong to the genus :

debilis (Giesbvecht) 1882; intermedins (LT. Scott) 1897; vararensis (T. Seatt) 1903; hyper-

boreus (T, Seott) 19038b; negleclus und pymaeua (Norman and Seott) 1905; Mispidus (Norman

MS., Bars) and ranva (Sars) 1900; nanoides and spinulosus (Sars) 1911; speciosue (Bran)

1921; dietydiophorus (Monard) 19245, invaginatus ond steritig (Monard) 1926a; rostratus

(Gumney) 1927b; commensalis (Seiwell) 1928; ctenophorns (Monard) 1928; ilievecensis (Mon-

ard) 19385; roberti (Monard) 1935? = verarensis (T. Seott) 19035 intermiclus and subdebilis

(Willey) 1985; erandatus and angi (Monard) 1936,

A. robinson, according to Gurney ’s seta formula (1927b, p. 526) would

form an exeeption in that the fourth endopod appears to have two inner setae on

the end segment. However, Willey (1930, p. 107) eorrects this slip, and shows

that there is only one inner seta here. The species, therefore, complies with the

generic deseription, Gurney (loc, ert.) draws attention to the resemblanee be-

tween this species and hispidus, affimts (= varareisis) and intermedius, and en-

larges on Seott’s original description of rabinsonii. While the first two ean be

distinguished from intermedius, the distinetions between this and rebingonii seem

so small that [ regard them as synonymous.

Aceording to Monard’s figure (1985, fig. 64) the fourth exopod of roberti has

sight ‘setae’? on the encl segment, whereas in the text (p.35) he states that it hus

82 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

only seven. The latter is the usual number in this genus, no other species having

eight. The species has been given a place in the key on the somewhat dubious

assumption that the figure is correct; if the text is correct then the species would

appear to be a synonym of vararensis.

Klie (1937, p. 24) states that debdloides Monard is a synonym of speciosus

Brian, with which I agree.

The species described as linearis by Sars (1906) appears to be identical with

neglectus (Norman and Scott) 1905, 1906. The size of linearis is only 0-63 mm.

compared with 0-8 mm. for neglectus according to Norman and Scott, but Monard

(1935, p. 380) finds neglectus only 0-62 mm.; the name linearis, therefore, should

give way to neglectus. Monard (1937, p. 48), however, records the male of line-

aris, so that it is to be presumed that he does not find them to be synonymous.

The only possible difference is in the setation of the exopod of the second antenna,

but though Norman and Scott’s figures differ from Sars’ they state that the middle

segment is somewhat indistinct, and therefore the seta shown on this segment may

possibly occupy the position shown by Sars for linearis. The majority of species

in this genus lack a seta on the middle segment, or have the exopod only two-

segmented.

Stenhelia pygmaea Norman and Scott (1905, 1906), while clearly an Amphi-

ascus (sens. lat.), approaches Robertsonia in the shape of the first. endopod. — It

belongs to Amphiascoides, close to nanoides and hyperboreus, assuming the second

and third exopods lack an inner seta on the basal segment, as does the fourth

exopod. I have been unable to find any further reference to this species in the

literature, and failing definite information on the second and third legs it cannot

be ineluded in the key.

Key to AMPHIASCOIDES FEMALES.

1. End segment of 2nd exopod without inner seta A Bas e4 +e Fey

. End segment of 2nd exopod with inner seta ait i o> «. 16,

2, End segment of 4th exopod with 1 inner seta “e ne 10 ne. PB

End segment of 4th exopod with 2 inner setae rc at bey De

End segment of 4th exopod with 3 inner setae = robertt (Monard) 19385 (#),

3. 1st exopod as long as basal endopod; distal segment of 5th leg at least twice as long as wide.

sterilis (Monard) 1926a.

1st exopod not more than 4 of basal endgpod distal segment of 5th leg less than twice as

long as wide A : A. ve AY

4, Width of body only 14 of length wi an -. debilis (Giesbreeht) 1882,

Width of body more than 14 of length .. a _ nanus (Sars) 1906,

5. Basal segment of Ist endopod distinctly longer than exopod 6.

Basal segment of Ist endopod little or no longer than exopod as fe B.,

6. Basal segment of 5th leg armed only with 5 short spine-like setae apenoays Spam): 1921.

Basal segment of 5th leg armed with normal setae .. ‘ 7.

7. Distal segment of 5th leg with 2 terminal setae “te .. subdebilis (Willey) 1935.

Distal segment of 5th leg with 1 terminal seta. Ete . intermixtus (Willey) 1935.

8. 2nd and 3rd segments of Ist endopod together greater than half of basal segment a Of

2nd and 3rd segments of Ist endopod together no more than half of basal segment xn dd,

9. Distal segment of 5th leg elongate, twice as long as wide .. 10.

Distal segment of 5th leg short, oval, not more than half as long again as wide ee LB,

10. End segment of 1st endopod twice as long as 2nd segment 11,

End segment of 1st endopod 3 times as long as 2nd segment... nanoides (Sar 8) 1911.

11. Basal segment of Ist endopod approximately equal to exopod.

neglectus (Norman and Scott) 1905,

Basal segment of 1st endopod only 34 of exopod age hyperboreus (T Scott) 1903b.

12, Basal segment of 1st endopod wide proximelly, tapering distally; exopod of 2nd antenna

2-segmented commensalis (Seiwell) 1928.

Basal segment of 1st endopod of same “width throughout; exopod of 2nd antenna 3-seg-

mented (3) oe 14 ond “ - vararensis (T. Scott) 1903.

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOQPHONTIDAE 83

18. Terminal setae of caudal rami greatly swollen basally, tapering abruptly, ending in fine hayrs.

langi (Monard) 1936.

Terminal setae of candal rami thickened basally but not tapering abruptly », 14,

TA. Greatest width of body less than 6 of length ele rey iron MS.,, Sars LOOG).

Greatest width of body more than 14 of length 5 ua) 25

15, Exopod of 2nd antenna 4-segmented .. pe tntermedine (rv, Scott) 1897,

Fsopod of 2nd atitenna 2-segmentod we En invaginatus (Monard) 19208.

16, Ist exopod distinctly shorter than Ins ondopod; 2nd and 3rd segments of endopod together

less thin half of basal 17,

lat exopod very little or na shorter than basil endopod; end segments of endope togothor

nearly as long as bass ns £5 £2 " vs OD

17, Outer seta of caudal ramus swollen, appr ne toa tine haip die ydiophors (Monar ay 1024

Candal setae vormal . fe is

18. Basal segment of Sth leg w ith 2 2 long and A short setae 1 sothantrans (are) 1911.

Basal segment of Sth leg with 2 long and 2 shomt setae, cue of long setae with lave lateral

deuticles . ne Hievesensty (Monard) 1935.

1), Sait te bani vary short, about 14 oY doas of gaat seg ait 20.

Caudal rami about 34. of anal soginent .. to ‘clenuphurus ‘(Monava) 1924,

20. Distal seement of Sth Jeg oval, length to width less than.d: 2 rostratug (Gurney) 1927b,

Distal segment of 5th leg clongate, twice as Jong as wide ecaudalus (Monard) 1936,

Srecres INQUAERENDAE.

There rematus a niimber of species whose postin eaunot be determined with

eertainty until our knowledge of the second and third lees is complete, These

are listed in chronological order :

acerdensis (T. Seott) 1894; dixpay (T, and A, Seott) 1804; reflewus (1. Beott) 1895,

herdmant (A. Seatt) 1896; bruce? (To and A. Seott) 19013 brevicornia, dentipes, graniliodudali,

fongicornis and perplerus (Mompsaou and Seatt) 19038; littoralis and mintus (T. Scott) 19085

faroensia ('T, Seott) 1908a; brevia, congener and polaria Sars 1009; mucronalnas Brady WL;

lamellifer Sara 1911; pracimas 'Y. Scott 1914; elegans and ignotus Brady 1918; similoiies

Monard 19282; dactytifer Wilson 1982.

None of the species Listed here could helong to Amphiascapsis, sivee this genus

is 50 Clearly characterized that even species whose second and third legs are un-

kiiwn ean, with reasonable certainty, be placed therem, The probability with the

majority is that they should go into Wesamphiascus.

OF uecraensis Scott states that the swimming legs are ‘‘nearly as in ims’,

Which suggests that it belongs to Wesamphiascus ; this is supported by the structure

of the first exopod, whieh exeludes it from Auwnphinseoiedes; ib might, however, be

included in Amphiascus sens, str,

The three species brenicormis, gracilicaudata aud longicornis described as

species of Stenhelia by Thompson and Seoit, ave exeluded from Amphiascus sens.

str. by the first exopod or fourth endopod or both, while dentipes of the same

authors eannot be Amphiascoides; perplemus of the same authors is probably

Mesamphiaseus.

OF brews, congener aud polaris Sars states that their natatory legs are normal ;

these are not illustrated, but congener is stated to resemble sinvilis, aud poluris to

resemble dims, Krom the drawings of their first exopods it is improbable that they

helong to Amphiascus sens, str,; they cannot belong to Aimphidascoides since the

middle segment of the first exopod bears an inner seta and the end segment five

“setae”, Monard (1928a) regards congener as a synonyin of faroensis.

OF Lrucet, the only information concerning the ad ioe tas lews is that ‘‘second,

third aid fourth lees similar io strom (Baird) ’', The illustration of the fourth

(3) As already stated roberti is figured with 8 setae on the end segment of the Hl oxopod,

but deserihed ae having 7 7, Vf the figure is correet it forms an exe option to the vile for the gevus,

and bas been meluded in the key wifll that possibility in view; if. as is more probable, the toxt ie

correct, then this specius is a synonym of vararenain.

84 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

leg suggests either Mesemphiascus or Amphiascoides; the first exopod, while typi-

cal of Amphiascoides, does not exclude it from the former.

Of dactylifer, Wilson (1932) states that the legs are of the ‘‘usual pattern in

this genus’’. Since the first exopod is without an inner seta on the middle segment,

and the end segment has only four ‘‘setae’’, it may belong to either Mesamphiascus

or Amphiascoides.

The first four pairs of legs of dispar are stated to resemble those of imus ; from

the first and fourth, which are illustrated, this species could belong to either

Mesamphiascus or Amphiascoides.

Of the two species described by Brady (1918) ignotus is known only from the

male, while elegans is insufficiently described, From the third endopod, which has

two inner setae on the middle segment, it would appear to belong to Amphiascus

sens. str. If so it would be an aberrant form, since the reduced setation of this

endopod, lacking outer setae on the end segment, is not found in any other species

of Amphiascus, on any of the endopods. The description is too unsatisfactory for

certain identification.

In the case of faroensis, described by T. Scott (1908a) as a variety of Dacty-

lopus stromi, the first four pairs of legs are stated to be ‘‘almost similar to those

of D. stromi’’. This species of Dactylopus was renamed by Sars as vulgaris, and

Scott’s variety differs from that in the proportions of the first legs. It appears to

be either Amphiascus sens. str. or Mesamphiascus ; it is definitely excluded from

Amphiascoides.

Of herdmani and similis A. Scott states that the first four pairs of legs are

sinilar to imus, suggesting once more that they belong to Mesamphiascus ; similis

is not excluded from Amphiascoides however. This species, being distinct from

similis (Claus) has been renamed similoides by Monard (1938a), who places herd-

mani in his varicolor-group, and similoides in his giesbrechti-group, but in each

case expresses some doubt. These two groups are among those which correspond

to Amphiascopsis and Amphiascus sens. str., and there seems little justification

for their inclusion in either. of these genera.

Sars (1911) gives no information about the legs of lamellifer, beyond stating

its affinities with confusus, typhloides and typhlops, and since the middle segment

of the first exopod has an inner seta and the end segment five ‘‘setae’’, in all proba-

bility it belongs with the above species in Mesamphiascus.

A, littoralis (T. Scott) 1903, can be either Mesamphiascus or Amphiascoides,

but not Amphiascus sens. str., since there is no inner seta on the middle segment of

the first exopod, and only four setae on the end segment of the fourth endopod.

Monard (1935, p. 31; and 1937, p. 42) identifies a species with littoralis (T. Scott)

but the setation of Monard’s form does not agree with that of Scott in that the end

segment of the fourth exopod has seven appendages, whereas Scott’s has only six.

Further, Monard (1935, fig. 832) shows an inner seta on the middle segment of the

first exopod, not present in littoralis, Monard’s form cannot be identified without

further details, but from the single seta present on the middle segments of the

endopods, according to his seta formula, it would appear to be an Amphiascoides,

but the inner seta on the first exopod (op. cit., fig. 32) is not known in any other

species of this genus.

Monard (1928a, p. 369) suggests that mirtus (T. Scott) is a synonym of

longirostris (Claus) ; later (1937, p. 97), however, he identifies a species as miztus,

and gives its seta formula, which agrees exactly with that of longirostris. He

states, also, that the first leg, first antenna and fifth leg agree with Scott’s figures.

There seems, therefore, no reason for retaining Scott’s name, since the only ap-

parent difference is one of size, especially as Scott’s figures agree very closely with

Sars’ for longirostris.

The swimming legs of reflexus are described by T. Scott (1895) as ‘‘somewhat

similar to imus’’, and sinee it is excluded from Amphiascoides by the inner seta

NIcHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE &5

on the first exopod, it probably belongs to Mesamphiascus, though not excluded

from Aniphiascus seus. sti.

The species deseribed by Brady (1910) as mucronatus is clearly not an Am-

phiuscus but appears to be near to metrapsis Sars. It 1s, however, so inadequately

described that certain identification is diffienlt.

Regardiug proximus T, Scott (1914, p. 878) the description is somewhat in-

adequate but the appearance of the exopod of the second antenna, which is two-

segmented with a very short end segment, and the position of the inner seta on

the basal segment of the first endopod suggest affinities with Ameiropsis vather

than with Amphiascus. Unfortunately we know nothing of the swimming legs ot

rostrum,

The remaining species are those of which I have not seen descriptions ;

brevifurcus (Czerniaveki) L868; limicolus (Brady) 00; erassus (Givsbyieht) 1902;

angrapequensis Pesta 1916; rufescons Brian 1925,

According to Monard (1985a, p. 34) brevifureus (Cz.) is probably synony-

mous with debilis (Giesbrecht) ; and the same author (1928a, p. 382) states that

rufescens Brian is known only from the male. In this latter paper he places

crassus in his varicoler-group, which suggests that it belongs to Amphiascopsts ;

it would appear also that it is quite distinet from any other species of Am phiiscus

in having eight setae on the distal segment of the fifth leg. Brady’s species

limieolus, Monard places in his debilis-group, which suggests that it belongs to

Amphiascoides. Of angrapequensis he makes no mention; this species is listed

in the ‘* Zoological Reeord’’, Vol. lv, for 1918,

CoLurerep List of S¥YNONYMs Wil'H REFERENCKS.

affinis Sars 1906, vararensis (T. Beott) 19038, Mon. 1928,

angolensis Monard 1934, Robertsonia,

clandestina Klie 1924, Schigopera longicauda Klie 1925, Klie 1925,

debiloides Monard 1928, speciosns Brian 121, Khe 1937,

dublus Jaleubisink 1933,

falklandionsis Lang 193Ge

irragus (A, Seott) Monard 1928a,

similis (Claus) 1866,

simulans (Norm, and Se.) 1905,

Rubertsonia,

Ila den dn ea

jugurtha (BL and Richy Monard 19281, Sehigupera

knot (Th, and Se.) Monard 19284 Robertsvnia,

linearis Sars 1906, negloctus (Norm, and Se,) 1Y0d,

longicaudus Savs Monard 1928a, Schizopera

mictus CT. Seott) 19038, = longivastris (Claus) 1868, Mon. 1928a,

mucronatus Brady 1910, == Ameiridae,

parddowe Daday Monurd 1928a, = Sechizopera

parvulus (CL) Brian 1917, = dAmeira parvula (Claus) 1866, Mon. 1928%,

productus Sara 1906, = blanchardi (To and A. Se.) 18952, Burs 1911,

propinguns (Heott) Monard 1928a, = Robertsonia,

prowimus T. Beott 1914, = Ameiridae,

robinsonti (A, Seott) 1902, = intermedius (T. Seott) 1897,

suhelensis Monard 1986 = normani Surs 1911,

scolti Sewell 1924, = Robertsonia propingua ('T. Se.) 1894 Gurn, 1927b,

tenax Brian 1927n, =erythracus (A, Seott) 1002, Gurn, 1987b,

The following ure probably synonyms:

banynlensis Monard 1928, F—hirsulus (Th. and Se.) 1908,

qautlier! Monard 1936, $—angustipes Gurney 1927b,

reberti Monard 1985, 9 =vararensis (T. Se.) 1908,

Roverrsonta Brady 1880,

There has been considerable difference of opinion as to whether this genus

should be included inthe Diosaccidae or Tachidiidae, 1 has reeently been clearly

demonstrated by Lang (1935) that it nrust be included in the former, as suggested

by Gurney (1927b),

86 RECORDS OF THE S:A. MUSEUM

The genus is here regarded as being characterized by the following com-

bination of features:

1. Ist antenna 5- to 7-segmented, having only 3 segments in the basal portion (4);

2. 2nd antenna with exopod 2- or 3-segmented, but when 3-segmented then the middle segment

is without a seta;

3. exopod of Ist leg with an inner seta on the middle segment, and usually with 5 ‘setae’?

on the end segment (1 exception, see p. 89) ;

4, endopods of legs:2-4 with only 1 inner seta on the middle segment;

5, exopods of legs 2-4 without inner seta on the basal segment.

It will be seen that the 4th and 5th characters are those of Amphiascoides,

the 5th occurring occasionally in Mesamphiascus; the 3rd is that of Amphia-

scopsis and the less reduced forms, found also in Mesamphiascus; the 2nd is

common to all the genera into which Amphiascus is here divided, in that the

exopod may be 2- or 3-segmented, but the middle segment when present may be.

with or without a seta, and all three conditions are found in each genus—here, if

there is a third segment, the middle one is without a seta. The Ist character,

as pointed out by Willey (see footnote) is found only in Robertsonia.

This combination of features suggests that Robertsonia is derived from

Mesamphiascus, retaining the unreduced 1st exopod found in that genus, but

has undergone a reduction in the setation of legs 2-4, attaining the condition

found in Amphiascoides; while the 1st antenna has undergone reduction in the

number of segments, and the exopod of the 2nd antenna a reduction in the number

of setae.

That Robertsonia is a distinct genus can be established by an examination of

the genital area where it has been figured. That of tenais has been shown by

Lang (1935a, p. 6) along with that of Amphiascus longirostris. Its relationship

to Amphiascus is clear, as pointed out by Lang (loc. cit.), while its distinctness

from Dactylopusia is clearly seen by a comparison with the figures for species of

this genus given by Lang (1936e, p. 22, figs. 25-28). Other illustrations of the

receptacular portion of this apparatus are given by Monard (1926, p. 627) for

diademata and Willey (1981, pl. xx, figs. 57, 58) for hamata and flavidula,

A possible exception to the 5th in the above list of generic characters is found

in knoxi (Thompson & Scott) as described by Gurney (1927b, p. 534), but

diademata Monard (1926, in 1928, fig. V, 1) which Gurney (loc. ctt., p. 580, and

1982, p. 17) regards as a synonym of knowi, lacks the inner seta on the basal.

segment of at least the 8rd exopod. Monard (1926, p. 627) does not describe or

figure the basal segments of the legs of diademata.

Amphiascus bulbifer Sars (1911), included by Gurney (1927b, p. 530), in

Robertsonia, has the basal portion of the Ist antenna with 4 segments, the middle

segment of the exopod of the 2nd antenna has a seta, the middle segment of the

Ist exopod has an inner seta, and the middle segment of the 2nd endopod has

2 inner setae. In these respects it is a true Mesamphiascus, in spite of the 1st legs

which, after all, differ very little from those of exiguus and mathoi, for example.

T. Scott (1894) described a species Dactylopus propinquus, which Sewell

(1924) transferred to Amphiascus and renamed Scotti, since it was distinet from

A. propinguus Sars (1906). As Gurney (1927b, p. 530) has pointed out, Scott’s

is the older name and should have been retained, but the point does not arise since,

as Gurney states, the species really belongs to Robertsonia. Sewell points out the

resemblance between propinqua (T. Scott) and irrasa (A. Scott 1902, as Stenhelia)

which, as far as is known, are separable only on the proportions of the Ist endopod,

since the setation of the swimming legs has not been indicated for propinqua by

either Seott, Sewell, or Gurney. That of irrasa is given both by Gurney (loc. cit.,

(+) Willey (1931, p. 614) states: ‘‘It is one of the leading characters of Robertsonia that

the proximal portion of the antennule consists in the female of three joints only’’.

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE. AND LAGPHONTIDAE 87

p. 632) and by Moward (1935a, p. 28), but Monard’s illustration of the Ist leg

(loc. cit. fig. 20) does not agree with those of A. Seott (1902, pL iii, fig. 8) and

Gurney (loc. eit, fig, 146), Init agrees closely with those of propingua shown by

TY. Seott (1894, pl. x, fig. 49) and hy Sewell (1924, pl, liv). Thus it would

appear that Monard (1935a) was not dealing with grasa, bot with propinqua,

unless these two are forms of the same species, as suggested by Sewell (lac. ctt.,

p. 823). The segmentation of the Ist antenna, according to Sewell, is variable and

may be cither ar 6 in the same species, 60 that unless there is a differenve in

the setation of the swiuming legs only the long end segiwent of the Lat endopod

distinguishes drrasa from prapinquc. Tt can, therefore, be assiumed that since

irrase of Monard (1985a) is ii all probability propingaa, the seta formula given

by Monard is that of the latter,

Amphiaseus angolensis Monard (1934) is obyiously a speeies of Robertsonia,

uuder the definition given here, and the fitst lew is identical with that of propinqua,

but the species differ in the seta formula of the 8rd leg. In angolensis there are

4 setae on the cod seement of the 3rd endopod, in propingua there are 6, a8 in

inrasd,

Li should be noted that although T, Scot shows the exopod of the 2nd antenna

wilh a seta on the middle sezment in propingud (1894, pl. x, fig. 47), in Sewell’s

releseviption of the species (1924, p, 819, pl. liv) this segment is withont setae,

Asa result of the inclusion of Robertsonia in the Diosaccidae, Monard’s genus

Veissierella (1985, 1935a) breaks down. This genus was created by Monard (1935,

p. 24) for the species 7. celtica, which he regarded as intermediate between

Amphiaseus and Robertsonia, Its resemblance to the former depends on the

prehensile first leg and donble egg-sav, to the latter on the reduced Ist antenna,

armed with peetinated setae. Gurney (1927b, p, 582) has stated that these setae

may sometimes be absent in R. iiioei, and dismisses them as wuimportant, Ty

celtioa must, therefore, be inchided in Raberlsanta—a possibility whieh is ad-

mitted by Monard (1935a, p. 27, footnote )—while 7. sclammbot Monard (1935a,

p, 28, figs. 21-30) appears to be a Wesamphiaseus with somewhat unusual Sth legs.

The inclusion of salammboi in the genus Trissterella by Monard rested

entirely on the pectinuted setae of the let antenna, which is &-segmented, with

4 segments in the basal portion. This feature, combined with the presence of

2 inner setae on the middle peament of the 3nd endopod, and inner setae on Lhe

basal segments of the Srd and 4th exopods, clearly shows its affinities with

Amphiascus aud excludes it from Robertsonia,

Klie (1937) ereated a genus Verneia, but did not apparently make a elose

vomparison of this genus with Robertsonia, He regards his new genus as inter-

mediate between Amphiesens and Dactylopusia, in spite of there being only

one inner seta on fle iniddle segments of legs 2-4, and later (p31) cisnusses the

setation of the swimming legs from consideration until other species are known,

le relates Varnuia to Daelylopusia on the enlarged basal seymenl of the Ist

erdopod, and to Amphioscns on the rostrim, 2nd antenna, mandible, maxillule,

Sth lew, eandal rami and male features, but separates it from both on the position

of the inner seta af the Istendopod, As pointed out above (p, 66), this is variable

in hoth Thalestvids and Diosaceids, and partienlarly in Robertson, in which

wens it may even be absent. In fact, Vurnaia monards is a good example of

Robertsania as defined above and, with the exception of the endopod of the 2nd

antenna which Klie states to he indistinetly 4-segmented, all the features named

by him as Amphiasenid agree extraordinarily well with Sars’ (1911) figures of

BR. bends.

In any tase, the position of the inner seta ou the basal segment of the Ist

endopud, nusnpported by other clistingaishing character's, is insufficient for the

evention of @ new gens.

88 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Further support tor the inelusion of V. monardi in Robertsonia is found

in the 3-segmented basal portion of the first antenna, and the genital area of

the female, which shows close agreement with those of diademata, hamata, and

flavidula, In many details Klie’s species closely resembles R, flavidula Willey

(1931), while the reduction in size of the inner seta on the basal segment of the

Ist endopod compares with the condition in RB, chesapeakensis Wilson (1932a)

in which it is absent.

The following species have been ascribed to Robertsonia:

tenuis Brady 1880; propingua (T. Scott) 1894; irrasa (A. Scott) 1902; knoat (Thompson

and Scott) 1908; normani Brady 1910; bulbifer (Sars) 1911; aeuleifera Klie 1913; diademota

ieaara 1926; salsa Gurney 1927a, fluvidula and hamata Willey 1931; chesapcakensis Wilson

fora,

Of these Gurney (1927b, p. 430) has stated that normani Brady is an

Ketinosomid; aeweifera Klie is a synonym of Thompsonula hyaenae (L. C.

Thompson 1889); and that diademata Monard and salsa Gurney are synonyms

of knoxi (Thompson and Scott).

To the genius must he added ungolensis (Monard) (1934; celtica (Monard)

1935; and monardi (Klie) 1987, As shown above bulbifer belongs to Mesam-

phiscus,

The genus, therefore, comprises the species listed below :

fenuis Brudy 1880; propingua (T, Scott) 104; irrase. (A, Seott) 1902; koa (Thompson

and Scott) 1903; flavidula and hamata Willey 1931; chesapeakensis Wilson 1982a, ungolensix

(Monard) 1984; celtica (Monard) 1985; monardi (Sie) 1987,

Key TO Rosexrsony, Ima aLra,

1. End segment of 2nd endopod with 1 inner seta 7 ‘ oe oa at

End segment of 2nd endopod with 2 tniier setae ri 7% celtica (Monard) 1985.

2, Segments of let endopod subequal A i. oe L308,

Basal segment of lat endopod at least us long as 2nd and Srd together ce a 7

3. Distal segment of Sth leg with 5 setae, . 3 a4 tenuis Brady 1880.

Distal segment of Sth loz with Gsetac .. ve nowt (Thompson and Seott) 1908,

4 End segments of Ist chidopod together at least one-quarter of basal segment . ven By

End segments of Ist endopod together no more than one-sixth of basal segment ee

5. End segment of Ist endopod twice as long as middle segment

End segments of Ist endopod subequal .- b),

a

irrasa (A, Seott) 1908.

R oe 6,

6. End segment of 8rd endopod with 6 setae id prapingua CT, Scott) 1894,

End segment of ard endopod with 4 setae ‘ angolensis (Monard) 1934.

7. Ist exopod almost as long as basal segment of endopod re hamata Willey 1931,

Ist exopod Utthe more than half of endopod o's + te .. 8

8. Ist antennn. 6-segmented vs zk =. Vn monardi (Mie) L987,

Ist antenna 7-segmented a) We ge *, favidula Willey 1981,

chesapeakensis Wilson (19321) cannot be included in the koy since the appendages of the

female were not deseribed.

Serizorera Sars 1905,

1905, Schizopera Sars, 1905a, p. 383; 1909. Schizopera Sars, 1909b, p. 39.

It is not proposed to deal with this genus in detail here sijiee it is confined

to fresh or brackish water. Its affinities with Amphiascus are very clear, and

Monard (1935, p. 21) considers that it should be merged with that genus, This

question hax heen discussed by Gurney (1927b, p. 514; 1932, p, 88) and Chappuis

(1931, p. 585). The latter author includes a key to the species.

As stated above, it forms the Jast genus in the series jnehided in dhe

Ainphiascinae, showing the greatest amount of reduction in the wumber of setac

ou the swimming legs, and is clearly derived from Amphiascoides.

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 89

SUMMARY oF DISTINGUISHING CHARACTERS OF THE AMPHIASCINAE,

1

#

Z *

© 3 %

& ca Fa &

a cd 2 += = n

> = S 3 8 &

Character. = = = 3 5 5

s 3 = 3 Re &

= = & E iS iS

4 a) a = & w~

1. Number of setae on middle 2.2 2.2 2.1 11 1.4, 11.

segments of 2nd and 3rd en-

dopods respectively.

2, Middle segment of Ist exopod yes yes yes or no no yes no

with inner seta.

3. Middle segment of ist exopod yes yes or no no no no no

greater than 1st or 3rd seg-

ments,

«4. Number of setae on end seg- 5 5 or 4 5 ord 4 5(5) 4

ment of Ist exopod.

5, End segments of 1st endopod yes yes or no no no yes orno yes or no

together less than 14 of basal.

6, Number of inner setae on 3 3or2 3 or 2 2 dor? 1

end segment of 3rd endopod.

7, Number of inner setae on 2 2 2or1 1 2orl lord

end segment of 4th endopod.

8. Basal segments of exopods yes yesorno yes or no no no (8) no

2-4 with inner setae.

9, Number of segments in basal 4 4 4 4 3 4

portion of Ist antenna.

10, Middle segment of exopod yesorno yesorno yesorno yes orno no always

of 2nd antenna, when pres- 2-segmented

ent, with seta.

Diosacctnakr subfam. nov.

Body with metasome enlarged, distinctly wider than urosome and more or

less strongly demareated therefrom. First antenna 8-segmented; exopod of

2nd antenna 1-segmented (2-segmented in Pseudodiosaccus) ; mandible palp uni-

ramous (biramous in Tydemanella, Diosaccopsis, and Diosaccus truncatus) ; rami

of legs 1-4 usually 3-segmented, but Ist endopod 2-segmented in Tydemanella,

Talysus and Parialysus; 1st exopod slightly modified in Diosaccopsis and Pseudo-

diosaceus ; 1st endopod always prehensile; middle segment of 3rd endopod with

2 inner setae; caudal rami little or no longer than wide. 6 genera: Diosaccopsis,

Diasaccus, Psewdodiosaccus, Tydemanella, Talysus, Parialysus.

Drosaccopsis Brian 1925.

According to Monard (1936, p. 18), the genus, which was somewhat doubtful

as first deseribed by Brian, based as it was on a species (rubeus), which closely

resembles Amphiascus pyraeides Monard 1928, has been firmly established by

the inclusion of the species D. ismaelensis Monard 1936. 2 species.

D. rubeus Brian 1925, syn. D. amphiasculus Brian 1927; and D, ismaelensis

Monard 1936,

(5) The one exception (referred to on page 86) is chesapeakensis, of which only the male

appendages have been described.

(8) One exception, knoxi, whose seta formula is given by Gurney (1927b),

90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Drosaccus Boeck 1872.

The genus contains 5 species:

tenuicornis (Claus) 1863; sordidus Brady 1910; ruber Brian 1923; truncatus Gurney

1927b; spinatus Campbell 1929.

Psreupoprosaccus T. Seott 1906.

This genus was created by T. Scott for the species Diosaccus propinquus

T. and A. Scott (1893a), and at present contains only the one species.

In a recent paper (1941) I expressed the view that Jalysus was synonymous

with Tydemanella, based chiefly on certain similarities which are evident, and

supported by the discovery of a species which appeared to be intermediate be-

tween these genera. The finding in Western Australia of further material of the

species described from South Australia as 7. robusta has led me to revise my

opinion as to their synonymy.

The result is that the Australian species has now to be placed in a nefy

genus, for which I have (p. 91) suggested the name Parialysus, while the other

two must be regarded as distinct. This is particularly evident from a comparison

of the structure of the mouth parts, which are considerably reduced in

Parialysus. The distinctive features of the three genera are set out below.

Character Tydemanella Talysus Parialysus

Ant. Body,

depth: length 4:9 4:10 4:7

Urosome,

length: width oo 5:3 almost equal

segments of elongate short and compact short and compact

first antenna

mandible palp biramous ‘“long slender like Jalysus but

unbranched rod‘ (7)

2-segmented

maxillule .) “nearly similar to ‘Cas in strongly reduced and

maxilla ) those of Dactylopusia’’ (7) without lobes.

Dactylopodella

flava’?(8)

maxilliped ditto robust. like Jalysus.

p.l. length: width —13:4 length: width —10:4 length: width — 14: 4

endopod 1 terminal spine, and 2 terminal spines only. as in Zalysus.

2 setae.

exopod middle segment with middle segment with middle segment with-

inner seta. inner seta. out inner seta.

p.2. middle segment with middle segment with

endopod 2 inner setae. 1 inner setae.

exopod basal segment with basal segment without

p.d. ed iy simil inner seta. inner seta.

endopod au or nag Be end segment with end segment with

exopod Dactylopodella 3 inner setae. 2 inner setae.

ar ‘ basal segment with basal segment without

flava’’(8) : :

inner seta. inner seta.

p.4. exopod basal segment with basal segment without

caudal rami

longer than wide, as

long as anal segment.

inner seta.

little longer than

wide, shorter than

anal sgt.

inner seta.

as wide as long,

shorter than anal sgt.

(

(s

7) Gurney, 1927b, p. 505.

8) A, Scott, 1909, p. 217,

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 91

TYpeMANELLA A. Seott 1909,

The genus was regarded by Scott as a Thalestrid related 10 Dactylopodella,

which it resembles in shape and in the relatively large basal segment of the

first endopod, Ii is, however, as stated by Lang (1986e, p. 18), clearly a

Diosaeeid,

One species: 7'. typica A. Seott, 1909,

Tauysus Brian 1927.

Brian placed this genus in the Diosaccidae; Gurney (1927b) discovered

the same species independently and regarded it as a Thalestrid, in which view

Monard (1935) supports him. In his revision of the Thalestridae Lang (1936e)

confirms Brian’s views regarding its systematic position.

One species: J. rufus Brian 1927,

PARIALYSUS fell, Nov.

he Opinion expressed by me (1941) that Zalysus is a synonym of Tyde-

manella cannot be upheld, and I am therefore ¢ompelled to establish a new

eenus for the species described as Uydemanella robusta, since the mouth parts

show a very considerable reduction, Apart from these the species could prob-

ably be placed in Jalysus, in spite of the much more slender first endopod, The

differences have been set out in the table above.

One species: P. robusta (Nicholls) 1941,

Subfam. STENHELIINAE sens. str.

Body with metasome enlarged, distinetly wider than nrosome and demar-

cated therefrom, First antenna, 5-, 6-, or 8-seemented; exopod of 2nd antenna

2- or S3-seemented; mandible palp biramous (outer branch strongly developed

and reflexed in Stenhelia), First exopod unmodified, endopod with long end

segment, never prehensile; legs 2-4 with 8-segmented exopods and 2- or 3-seg-

mented endopods; middle seement of 8rd endopod with 1 inner set; eaudal

rami at least twiee as lone as wide, 2 genera.

Stenhelia, Pseudomesochra.

Srrenuevia Boeck 1864.

The genus is divided into 2 subgenera, according to the segmentation of

the Ist endopod. In Stenhelia (Ntenhelia) it is 3-seemented; in S. (Delavalia)

2-sermented. A key to the genus has been given in an earlier work (1939),

from which 8 species were left oul. Two of these 8. (D.) imapindta (A, Seott)

1902 and 8. (D.) longifurca Sewell 1934, were overlooked; S. ? glactalis Brady

1918 is insufficiently described, bul appears to be a Thalestrid belonging to the

subfamily Pseudolachidiinae Lang (1936c) ; farther identification does not seem

possible,

The following species referred to Stenhelia belong to Ampliasens :

ima Brady 1872; hispida Norman MS, Brady 1880; ima Giesbrecht 1882; dentieulata LT. C.

Thompson 1893; aceraensis 'T, Scott 1894; dispar T, and A, Seott 1894; reflema T. Seott 14955

blanchardi T. and A. Scott 1895; herdmant and similis A. Scott 1896; intermedia 'T. Beott 1897;

limieola Brady 1900; eonfusa T, Scott 1902; erythraca A. Scott 1902; minuta, perplexa, brevi-

cornis, gracilicaudata, longicornis and dentipes Thompson and Seott 1903; hyperborea 'T, Scott

1903b 3 neglecta, pyqmaca, simulans, varians ind longirestria Normun and Seott. 1905.

92 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Of these the following have been renamed: ima Giesbrecht = giesbrechti

Sars; similis A. Scott = similoides Monard ; minuta Thompson and Scott = angus-

tipes Gurney ; longirostris Norman and Scott = = normam Sars.

The following species referred to Stenhelia now belong to Robertsonia :

irrasa A. Scott 1902, knoxi Thompson and Scott 1903.

Pseupomesocura T. Scott 1902.

This genus has been discussed by Lang (1936a), who shows that Stenheliopsis

Sars 1906 is synonymous. A key to the species is given by Lang (loc. cit.).

LAOPHONTIDAE T. Scott 1905.

1907. Laophontidae Sars.

Monard (1935) has discussed the relationship of the genera included in this

family and lists the following genera:

Laophonte Phillippe 1840; Asellopsis Brady and Robertson 1873; Platychelipus and Norman-

ella Brady 1880; Esola C. L. Edwards 1891; Laophontodes T, Scott 1894a; Pseudolaophonte A.

Scott; Laophontina Norman and Scott 1905; Harrietella T. Scott 1906; Laophontopsis Sars

1908; Hemilaophonte Jakubisiak 1932 ; Lobitella Monard 1934.

The genus Laophontella Thompson and Seott (1903, p. 83) was regarded by

the authors as a Laophontid, by Gurney (1932, p. 814) and Monard (1935, p. 83)

as a Cletodid, but, as has been stated by Lang (1936d, p. 451), is clearly a Cantho-

camptid.

The following genera have been added to the family since Monard’s review :

Sarsocletodes Wilson 1924 (for Pseudocletodes Sars 1921, preoccupied Coleoptera 1893 =

Pseudoplatychelipus Lang 1936), Cletopsyllus Willey 1935, Donsiella Stephenson 1935,

Of the above genera Sewell 1924, p. 834, considered that Laophontopsis Sars

1908 should be known as Cleta since lamellifera, which must be regarded as the

type, was originally so named by Claus (1863, p. 123) ; however, Cleta is twice

preoccupied (Lepidoptera 1845 and Coleoptera 1850) so that Sars’ name stands.

Laophontodes has justly been removed to the family Anchorabolidae by Lang

(1986¢).

Loaphontina was regarded by Sars (1911, p. 427) as not worthy of generic

value and ineluded by him in Pseudolaophonte; Monard (1934, p. 3) states that

under such circumstances his genus Lobitella might well be included in Scott’s

genus. Monard’s genus has, however, the second antenna with a reduced exopod,

and is here regarded as a distinet genus, as also is Laophontina.

Esola, as remarked by Monard (1935, p. 66) appears to be a Laophonte with

1-segmented first exopod ; it is probable that the four apparent setae on the basal

segment of the first endopod are really long hairs, but until the species has been

redeseribed the generic name may be retained.

According to Lang (1936d, p. 451) Pseudocletodes Sars (1921) (preoccupied

Joleoptera 1893), is not a Cletodid, and must be transferred to the Laophontidae,

close to Platychelipus. Lang has ‘renamed Sars’ genus as Pseudoplatychelipus,

being unaware that Wilson (1924) had already renamed it Sarsocletodes.

"As Monard (1935, p. 65) dealing with the genera known at that time, has

pointed out, the Laophontidae form a very homogeneous group, with the exception

of Normanella. Excluding this genus the family has the following constant

features :

1. mandible palp 1-segmented ;

2. 1st exopod reduced, without inner setae;

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 93

8. Ist endopod with single terminal claw, strongly developed Qyeak in Platyehelipus), acees-

sory seta when present very smiull, Ho inner seta on end segment, seta on basal segment when

present central in position (found gnly in Laaphontopais) ;

4, rvoatrunt abways fused with cephutosome ;

5. miles, where known, lave 3rd endopod 2- or 3-segmented, usually madified; exopodes 24

modifiet.

The above characters are constart in all the wenera described betore Monard’s

review except Platychelipus and Normanella, Of these, the former departs so

little from these tharacters that it could be regarded as an aberrant member of the

family, Normanella on the other hand disagrees with all the above listed features =

1, mandible palp bilohed;

2. lst exopad of normal development, with inner seta;

3. Ist ondopod lias distal inner seta on basal segment, immer seta on end segmont and long

terminal seta in addition to elaw;

4, rostrum distinctly defined basally:

5, awimming legs of male widifferentiated from those of female,

This genns, while it has some affinities with the Cletodidae, as exemplified by

Pontopolites, differs iv the first logs to such an extent that it cannot be ineluded in

this family, Tt is probably intermediate between the Cletodidae and Canthocamp-

tidae, and for the present may be relegated to the latter yery heterogeneous col-

lection of wenera.

Of the genera added since Monard reviewed the family, Cletopsyllus departs

from the trie Laophontid characters in several respects :

1, mandible palp 2-sozmented ;

ands, lat legs as in Neormanella;

4. rostrum defied by snture;

5. (male unknown),

and, therefore, for the present Cletopsyllus must accompany Vermanella into the

Canthocamptida,

Unfortunately we know nothing of the mouth parts of Dansiella; the shape

of the first lee, however, is typical of the Laophontidae, bit, there are two subequal

terminal elaws. The seeond and third legs Lave 3-segmented endopods in both

gexeg, the fourth endopod is l-segmented in the male and absent in the female; the

exopods of the male are like those of the female except for that of the second leg

which is slightly modified. Tt cannot, therefore, remain im this family, where it

was placed with some misgivings by tts author, and appears to have Tachidiid

affinities.

As fur Sarsoeletodes, Lang transfers it to the Laophontidae on account of the

strnetnre of the third endopod of the male, which he illustrates on p, 451 (1986d).

In my opinion this does not differ from that of Clelades limicola, an accepted

Cletodid, to anything like the extent. to which (, limicola differs from other Cleto-

dids (ef. Bnhydrosama eurticandatum in Sars 1911, pl. eev).

Suarsocletodes differs from the Laophontidae in that the first endopod is sharter

than the exopod (a Cletodid character), and is armed with one inner and one ter-

minal seta on the end segment,

The truth probably is that both Platychelipus, which departs somewhat from

typical Laophontids, and Sarsoclefodes should be placed in a separate family in-

termediate between the Laophontidae and Cletodidac, This would leave the Lao-

phontidae a very clearly defined family,

Below is given a diagnosis of the family Laophontidae,

Body usually cylindrical, but flattened and considerably wider in front than

behind in Harrietella, Weniloophonte and a few species of Laophonte; segments

defined by lateral incisions; vostrum prominent, always completely fused with the

head. Antennules 4- to Sscemented; antennae 2-scemented, the exopod 1-seg-

mented with four setae, or reduced, even to u single seta; mandible palp always

94 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

1-segmented ; maxillule usually well developed; maxilla with three inner lobes,

the proximal sometimes reduced to a seta; maxilliped prehensile, usually strongly

developed.

First legs with endopod alway’ 2-segmented, longer than the exopod, basal

segment with or without an inner seta (when present inserted about middle of

segment), end segment always without an inner seta but having a single large

terminal claw which may be accompanied by a small accessory seta; exopod 2- or

3-segmented, always without inner setae. Legs 24 usually with 5-segmented

exopods and 2-seemented endopods, both rami reduced in some genera,

Male with third endopod almost always modified, exopods of legs 24 usually

modified.

The following genera, arranged in chronological order, ave here regarded as

belonging to this family :

LaorpHonts Philippi.

1840, Laophonte Philippi, 1868, Cleta Czerniavski,

1850, Canthacamptus Baird (pro part.), 1874. Tetragoniceps Brady aud Robertson

°1860, Harpacticus Fischer, (1. longiremis),

1868. Cleta Claus (pro part.), 1907. Laophonte Sars (pro part.).

1866. Cleta Claus,

This genus contains over 100 species which are dealt with in the following

pages.

LAOPHONTOPSIS Sars.

1863. Cleta Claus, 1935. Laophontopsis Monard,

1908. Laophontopsis Sars, 1935a. Laophontopsis Monard.

1924. Cleta Sewell, 1937. Laophontopsis Monard,

1928. Laophontopsis Monard,

This genus contains two species only; Laophontopsis lamellifera (Claus)

1863, and L. secunda (Sewell) 1924.

AsgLuopsis Brady and Robertson.

1873. Asellopsis Brady and Robertson, 1908, Asellopsis Sars.

1895, Laophonte 'T, Scott,

There are four species known in this genus: A. hispida Brady and Robertson

1873; A. intermedia (T. Seott) 1895; A. dubosequi Monard 1926a; A. littoralis

Nicholls 1939.

A key to these species has been given by Nicholls (1939).

Esonua Edwards.

1891. Fsola C. L. Edwards.

PsSEUDOLAOPHONTE A, Seott.

1893, Laophonte I, C, Thompson, 1911. Pseudolaophonte Sars.

1896, Pseudolaophonte A. Scott.

One species: P. spinosa (I. C. Thompson) 1893, syn. P. aculeata A. Scott 1896.

LAopHontina Norman and Seott.

1905. Laophontina Norman and Scott, 1908. Pseudolaophonte Sars.

1906. Laophontina Norman and Scott,

One species: L, dubia Norman and Seott 1905.

Harrierecua T. Scott.

1894. Lavphonte T. Seott, 1894a, 1921. Harrietella Sars,

1906. Harrietella T, Seott, 71935. Laophonte Stephensen.

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 95

One species: H, simulans (T. Scott) 1894a. As stated below (p. 98) the

specimen described by Stephensen (1935) as probably the male of Laophonte

brevifurce is much more probably a species of this genus, possibly the male of IZ.

semalans,

Dewmaornonte Jakabisialk,

19382. Hemilaophonte Jakulisiak,

One species: 7. janinee Jakubisiak (1982),

Loerren.a Monard.

1934, Lobitella Monard,

One species: 1, wpoda Monard (1934),

Een NoOLAOPHONTE ren. noy.

1876. Cleta Norman, 192k. Laophonte Brian (pro part.,,

1008, Laophonte Sars (pro part.), 1929, Laophonte van Douwe (pro part.),

1927, Laophonte Gurney 1927b (pro purt.), 1929. Laophonte Brian 1929a.

Laophonte having a single large recurved spur dorsally on the posterior mar-

gin of the head segment, aud paired spines dorso-laterally on each of the following

hody segments except the last one or two, Rostrum large and expanded, First

antenna 6-sezmented, with four segments in the basal portion which is composed

of three long segments and a short fourth, hearing the sensory filament; terminal

portion with end segment longer than penultimate. First lee with basipod long

and slender, its second segment about as long as the basal segment of the endopod ;

exopod 2-segmented—the tivo segments may be partially fused—very slender and

not exceeding half the length of the basal segment of the endopod. Seta formula

for legs 2-4 as follows:

endopod. exopod,

pe. 0,120, 01.123 or 2,

pa. 0.220. (1,228,

pa. 0,120, 01.223 ov 8,

Fifth leg with basal expansion narrow, with four or five setae, distal segment elon-

gate, bearing only three setae. The above seta formula and this type of fifth leg

are found in no other species of Laaphonte which, together with the modification of

the body and rostrum, justifies their removal to a separate genus.

The genus contains the following four species removed from Laophonte :

horrida Norman 1876, genotype; brevispinasa Sars 1908; armiger Gurney 1927h; miradiliv

Gurney 1927h,

As pointed out below hystrix Brian (1928) and steweri van Donwe (1929)

are synonyms of armiger Gurney 1927b.

It is of interest fo note {hat this genus shows affinities with L. (Mesolao-

phonte). The seta formula closely resembles that of the quinquespinosa eroup, in

at least one meniber of which body spines are developed, It should be noted, how-

ever, that spines are developed also in dinocerata which is a Laophonte sens, str.

KEy TO THE PiaraunEs.

J, Basal expansion of Sth leg reaching end of distal segment ens oi es 2,

Basal expansion of 5th leg not reaching middle of distal xegnivnt virabilis (Gurney) 1927h.

2, Ist endopod at least 3 times as long as exopod i -_ we By

ist endopod no more than twiee as long as exopod .. .. Drenispinosa (Sars) 1908,

4. Basal segment of Ist endopod longer than 2nd basipod; rostrum longer than wide-

horrida (Norman) 1874.

Basal segment of Ist endopod about equal to 2nd segment of basipod; rostrum wider than

long + fb. . 7 », -armiger (Gurney) 1927b,

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

KryY 10 THE MALES.

1. ard endopod 2-segmented, unmodified, bearing setae only bj afnigen Reais ) 1927h,

Srd cndopod 3-segmented, middle segment with spine =x 2,

2, End segment of 8rd exopod armed with 3 setac and 4 spines " trettaptnond (Sars) 1908.

End segment of drd exopod urmed with spines only .. .. horrida (Norinun) 1876,

The male of mirabiliv is unknown; that of aoniger is described by Willey (1980) and by

trian (1928) as hystri«

These 10 genera are closely allied and, as already stated, form a well defined

family.

Laophonte i is here divided into subgenera based on the setation of the swim-

ining legs which, in most cases, show a constant segmentation—the exopod 3-

stymented and the endopod 2-+segmented. In b. (M ehalagphonte) the fourth endo.

pod is redueed in one or two species, and in the monotypie L, (Neolanphonte) the

endopods of legs 2-4 are all 1-segmented,

The allied genera Fsola, Asello psts, Echinolaophonte and Laophontopsis

appear to be derivatives of Laophonte, in which the body has undergone certain

iwodifications without reduction in the segmeutation of the legs. Hsola differs

very little from typical Laophonle species and, as stated above, is probably a true

Luophonte. Asellopsis shows the full number of setae found in Laaphonte sens,

str, (see p, 98) but differs in the depressed body and short, lamellar eaudal rami,

with very short caudal setae. Echinolaaph onte has the typical seta formula of the

L. (Mesolaophonte) species, but again differs in the structure of the body by the

development of a spiny armature and modification of the rostrum. Laophoniopsis

has the setal armature of the 4, (Metalaophonte) species, but differs in the modi-

fied caudal rami and presence of an inner seta on the basal segment of the first

endopod,

The remaining five genera of this family show a progressive reduction in the

segmentation of the legs, and form two series according to whether this reduction

proceeds from behind forwards or vice versa.

In the Hemilaophonte series the reduction starts in the fourth legs and pro-

veeds forwards, as can be scen in the table given below :

Regmentation of legs,

ond Srd 4th

Genua. exp. ond, exp. end, exp, end,

Hemilaophonte 3 2 3 2 g |

THarrietella 3 2 3 2 2 1

Lobitetla 3 2 3 1 1 1(0)

whereas in the Pseudoluophonte Series the reduction takes place in the reverse

clireetion ;

Segmentation of legs,

2nd 3rd 4th

Genus. exp. end. exp. end, exp, end,

Pseudolaophonté 1 0 2 2 3 2

Laophontina 1 0 1 0 3 1

From this it is clear that while Sars’ view that Laophontina should be in-

eluded in Psevdalaophonte might be upheld, the further inelusion of Lobitella with

these is not. justifiable.

Kny ‘vo rtm LAOPHON'TIDAE,

1, Exopods of legs 2-4 3-segmentud te be a -. Bs

At least one of these exopods 1- or 2-segmented , ar . 6

2. Caudal rami cylindrical, widely separated, armed with at least 1 long seta .. 3.

Caudal rami lamellar, closely approximated, armed only with short spines and/or setue 5.

i. Ist endopod without inner sutae on basal segment . . ae : 2 4,

ist endopod with 4 inner setae on basal segment ye :. Esola Edwards 1891,

NICHOLLS— DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOTVHONTIDAR 97

d. Head with large dorsal sping, rostrum expanded — ,, .» Behinolaophonte gen wav.

Head without spine, rostrum uormal a a. Laophonte Philippi 1840,

5. Candal rami long and tapering, at least twice as long as anal segment; basi) segment of

Taft eddopod with iner seta. , es ie Laophontopsts Sars 1908,

Caudal vam) shovt and rounded, Jijtle ov no Jonger Mian anal seyment; basnl segment of

1st endopod withoul immer seta ne _. Asellopsta Brady and Robertson 1878,

6. 2nd wnd drd exopods a-segmented, th exypod 1- ar2-segmented - és so Me

id and aed exopods l- or 2-sevmented, 4th exopod S-segmunted . . <4 so) Hi

T. 41h exopod 2-sepmenoted, endopod 2-segmented te Hemiloophoute dakubisialk 1932,

Ath exopord 2-segmented, endopod 1-segmented ts . Harrietela T. Seott 1906.

4th exopod L-aegmented oz -< <''= o; Lobitela Mongard 1984,

8. Srd and 4th ondopods 2-segmented Peendoluophants A. Scott LR96,

dd cndopod absent, 4th endopod 1-sogmenterd mA Laophontina Novman and Svatt 1908,

Laopuonts Philippi 1840.

A diagnosis of the genus has been given by Gurney (1938, p. 214) but needs

a minor correction. The third endopod of the male should be ceseribed as 3- or

d-seomented,

Monard (1934, p. 66) enumerates 87 species and adds four mnre in the subse-

quent pages, To these must be added another 18 species; some of these were

omitted from his list, while others have been deseribed since -

Mississtponsis Herrivk 1887 ; quinyuesplnovsa Sewell 1924; barhata, canplellionsia, Lenuispina

and gurneyi Lang 1984; Tithophila Monard 1984; octavia Monavd 1985a, corbula, longisty lata

and relicandate Willey 19854 dievzevdet Monard 1986; puicisela Lung 19560; spelace Chappuis

1988; monday Kile 1980; lengiseta Nicholls L941; lawrentioa sp.noy.5 crenieola sp.nov,

OF the speeirs listed by Monard, heeats Brehm (1910) is a synonym of Afes-

ochre. Hiljeborg?, aceording to Gurney (1982, p. 257) ;

eaigua T. Seott (1912) is distinet from erigua Sars (1905a), and must there-

fore be renamed. It is proposed to name it scotti;

hystria Brian (1928), of which stewert van Douwe (1929) is a synonyin, as

has been shown by Briau (19293), is in turn a synonym of amiger Girney

(1927b). Gurney’s deseription was published in 1927, that of Brian in 1928,

thongh references to this paper are usually given as 1927, so Gurney's name has

priority. This speeies is one of those here transterred to the new genus Behino-

luophonte ;

humilis Brian (1929) is a synonym of mohammed, according to Gurney

(1982, p, 416) ;

echinata Willey (1950) has been removed by Lang (1936e) to the genus

Liophontordes, and venamed ormatus 4

rasel Monard (1926) appears to be a synouym of bulligera Farran (1913),

from whieh it differs only in the absence of the ‘‘sensory organ'’ deseribed by

Farvan as present on the fourth endopod, and in the absence of one at the setae on

the base of the fifth legs. This seta is inserted near the base of the proximal seg-

ment, a portion of which appears to have heen. lost in reset. Tlowever, Dr, Farran

ina personal communication informs me that the sensory outgrowth occurred in

the same position on the fourth endopods of three individuals. Ty eael case the

endopod of one side was Jacking, but it is reasonable to assume that the missing

endopods were similar to those whieh were seen. The onterowth he describes as

“very Lennons and might escape notice in a mounted specimen’’, (1 have taken

the liberty of quoting trom his letter.) THe stresses the swollen base of the ad-

joining seta, whieh Monard also emphasizes (1926, p. 622) and later (1928, p,

418) compares with bulligera In raset the swollen base ot the seta is**armée d’un

fin chevelu de trés fins poils raides et réenerents’’. No such armature is deserihed

for bulligera, but the sensory outgrowth is attached at a comparable positian.

Unfortunately 1 have not had access to certain of the literature, and so have

not seen descriptions of parvula (Claus) 1866, wncinata (Czerniavski) 1868,

98 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

nordlandica Boeck 1872, and miississipensis ILerrick 1887; bafanws Labhé, listed

by Monard without reference, I have becu unable tu trace.

The specimen described by Stephensen (1935) as probably the male of Laa-

phonte brevifurca is, in my opinion, a member of the genus Harrietella, and may

be the male of H, simulans, the only known species, though the rostrum does not

appeat to be quite so well developed.

L. rhodiaca Brian (1928), known only from the male, may possibly he the

male of L, bulbifera Norma (1911), The first antenwa in both has two spurs on

the basal segment, not known in any other speeies of the genus; the long slender

exopod of the second antenna, common to both, is also noticeable; the first legs are

very similar, and the fourth legs identical; the caudal rann of rhodiaca, though

not bulbous, are somewhat modified,

The venus thus comprises about, 100 species, somewhat variable amongst them-

selves, but held together by certain constant characters: the elongate first endopod

with uo inner seta ou the lorur basal seginent, whieh is followed by a short second

seement and a large terminal claw, which tiay he accompanied by am accessory

seta, The exopod of the second antenna is ever more than 1-seemented, usually

with four setae, though it may be reduced to little more than a knob with two setae,

or he absent. The first aritenna varies from four (o eight in its segmentation, and

has either three or four sepinents in the basal portion; but those species with oly

three segments in the basal portion cannot be removed as a separate gents, since

they show no other feature in common,

The genus can, however, be divided mto subgencra ou the setation of the

endopods of the third legs. Thus the first group, for which the generie name

mast be retained sinee it contains the type speeies, 4, cornuta, has three inner

setae on the end seement of the thivd endopod. This group. Laophonte sens, str.,

is the largest, and the members show the following general agreement:

1, 2nd endopod with 2 inner, 2 terminal and 0 outer getue on the end segment (except

bulbifera, bulligera, longivemix, rovet and typhlopsa, which have 2.2.1.5 curtivauda, nordgaardi

and reticaudata which hove 1.2.0.) ;

2. 3rd endopod with 3 inner, 2 terminal und 1 outer setae on oud segnient;

B. 4th endopod with nomber of setac on ond segment varying from 1.1.1. to 2.2.1., ineluding

aome forms lacking vuter acta.

On the variation in the setation of the fourth endopoed and other characters

this subgenus eau he irther divided into groups (see below).

The second snbvenns Laophente (Mesolaophonte), contains those species iu

which the third endopod has two inner setae on the end segment.

1, End segment of 2nd endopod has 3 of 4 setae, of which 2 are always terminal. (Li

xpelaca there are 6 setae, resembling those species of Lacphonte sens. ste, whieh have awa antec

seta on the ond segment of this endopod;

2. end segment of 3rd endopod with 2 inner, 2 terminul and | outer seta (qualerspinata lacks

the outer seta) 5

4, end segment of 4th ondopod with 1 inner (2 in spelaea), 2 terminal and Oor 1 outer setas,

Certain species which ou the setation of the endopods would fall into this

subgenus, but whieh have developed spines on the body and a modified rostrum,

have been transferred toa new genus, Echinolaophante, described above,

The third subgenus, Loaphente (Metalvaphonte), eontaing those species

which show a still further reduction im setation,

1, 2nd endopod with 3 autie on Che end superont (4 in depresea aud korend) 5

2, 8rd endopod with 3 or 4 setae on fle ord segnont;

5, 4th andopod with Got more than 4 setae on the end segment.

The fourth subgenus, Laaphonte (Neolaaphonte), has affinities with the

preceding subgenus, and contains thoge speeies whieh baye their endopods re-

cluced to one segment,

NICHOLLS—DTosAcCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 99

A fifth subgenus, Lauephonte (Manalaophonte), is created for one species,

curvata van Douwe (1929), also described by Monard (1937) which lalls into none

of the above subgenera since it has no iiner setae on the end segment of the third

endopod, and thus shows the greatest reduction im sctation,

A mumber of species remains, which would probably fit mto one or other of

the subgenera proposed, but cannot as yet be placed with certainty owing to the

lack of knowledge of their third legs, These are dealt with below under ‘species

inquaerendae’’,

Keys are given to the females of the different subgenera, but owing to the in-

complete state of our knowledye of the males they cannot be assigned to their re-

spective subgenera, and a general key for the males is given,

Ky ''o THE SOBGIENERA oF LAOPHONTE

(Based on the Femalus).

1. Endopods uf swimming legs 1-segmonted ; we L. (Neolaophante),

Mndopods of at least 2nd and Ard logs 2-sepmeaitod .. : he wo Sy

2. End segment of dvd endopod with 0 inner seta “A tle L.. (Monolnophante).

End segment of 3rd ondopod with 1 inter seta 1. ms Ly (Metalaophontey,

dind segment of 3rd endopod with 2 inner setae aa L. (Mesvinophonte).

End segment of rd endopod with 8 immer sete 29 ve ZL. (Laophonte),

Laopronts (Laopnon'rs) seus, sie.

As defined above the subgenus contains those species of Laophonte with three

inner setae on the end segment of the third endopod in the female. ZL, cormula,

though atypical in some respeets, is widely distributed and was the first to be

deseribed ; it is fully described and illustrated by Sars (1911, p. 285, pl. elvii,

elvili), and conforms to the snbgenerie definition in its setation, Tt is, therefore,

regarded as the type species.

The following species are inelided in the subgenns:

comuta Philippi 1840; strom’ (Baivd) 1850; hrevirostris and serrata (Qlaus) 1863; curti-

cauda, longicaudata and (horacica Bowe 1864) simifia (Clana) 1866; minyta and elonguta Booek

1872; australasica Thonison 1484; mohammed Blanchard and Richard 1891 (4) ; longipés T. Beatt

1894; moinerti Brady 1899; perpleza T. Scott 1899; jnornata A, Beott 190% (") 5 longtremis

T. Scott 1905; chathamensix Says 1Y05a; congenera, nana, nordgaaai, parcula und typhlops

Sars 1908; hyperhorea Sats 1809; bulbifera Norman 1911; earmensis Sava 1911: bulligera

Parran 1918; tenera Sars 1921; dineverata and rove) Monayd 1926; sporadiensis Brian 1928;

discaphara Willey 1929; dwnata Willey 1931; eapilluta, manifera and talipes (9) Wilson 1932;

burbata, campbelliensis, qurneyiund lonvisping Lang 1934; bengalensis Bewell 19845 dominicatia,.

parviloides and phycobaters Monard 1945; netivia Monard 1985a (") 5 retieundata Willey 1995,

dieuzeides Monard 1986; lauentica sp.nov.

This rather large collection of species is divisible into a number of groups,

whieh can he fairly well detined, partly by the number of setae ow the fourth

enilopod.

(9) The inclusion of these spocies in this subgenus may be open to qnestion, In latipes

Wilson (1982, p. 264, pl. xiv) there appoat to be 6 setac on the Ynd endopod and only 4 on the

drd. Tt is assumed heve that these legs have beon transposed, as Lang (19864, p. 449) las shown

to have heen the cage for the first two legs of Quintanusx Wilson (1932) + if this is so than talipew

fits naturally into the subgenus. Similarly it has been assumed that 'T, Scott (1894) has deawn

thy 3rd log of fongipes, though it is called the 4th; its sete formula agreeing exaetly with thut

of Hie Srd_endopod in this subgenus. The same ia presumed to have happened with inornate

A.BSeott (1902). Apart from these three enses there is only one other apparent. case of 6 antae

o4 the end segment of the endopod of any but, the third leg; in his iWustration of the 4th leg of

vclatia Mounrd (193fa, fig. 76) shows 6 setae, in the text, however (7), 68), it is stited that the

dth endopod has 4 setae. The figure is, therefore, presumed to reprusent the third ley,

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MusEuM

1. The cornuta vroup, Ist antenia with segments ahovt and compact iostly with spur on

2nd segments Sth leg of cornuta type, somewhat modified in dinocerata and sporadionaisx, und

probably malformed in Jaurentioa although very similar to avetralavica whith probably vomea

into tlas group (seo below). To this group helong: cornuta, dinocerata, donininalia, laurentioa,

serrata and sporadionsis,

8. The typhlops group. lst antonna wilh segments long and slender, 2nd segment without

apus: Gth log of tupllopy type. Here belong: barbata, bulbifera, bulligera, clongata, longiremis,

roxer, horacica and typhions,

8. The brevirostris group. Ist antenna with segments neither very compuct nor very slender,

bat with a tendency to forma spur onthe 2nd segment; this ranges from the condition in octavia,

with no trave of ¢ spur, through tho halge seen in congenera and brevirostris la the well developed

roeurved hook of dieuzeidei. Exopod of the 2nd antenna normal, Ste leg of female as in

bvevirostrix, in the male the distal aegment is small but distinct,

To this group belong: brevirastris, conyenera, eurticauda, dienzeldet, quineyi, hyperborea,

harmensix, longicaudata, lundta, memerti, nana, nordgaardi, oetavia (see Footnote, p. 9M),

pérpleca, denera and tenwispine.

4, Tho stromi group, Ist uulenns a3 in preceding group, but uo trace of a spur; exopod

of 2nd sntonna always vedueed; Sth leg of female of stromi type, Mat is having a more dr leas

flistinel note between the Ist und 2nd aetae of the distal segment. This feature has already

been sireased hy Willey (1929, p, 581) and js most marked in ¢iseophora and least noticeable in

nilmites Sth log of male always vedueed, the distul segment completely fused with the huse.

The group contains: campbellionsis, Mscophora, manifera, minula, Phycubates and stroms,

5, The mohammed group. ‘These ave fresh or byackish water forms. The group comprises

mohammed, chathamensis vd bengalenaia, Which resemble ong another in several respects. 1st

uulenna reduced (Srd and dil segments fused) but the segments are nol compact; exopod of

“nd autenna woll developed; male bth log reduced (exeupt in mohammed) 5 jth leg of fomnle

pevoline—might be derived from cornuta type, L, nisaigsiponsix Herrick 1887, wap not mentioned

by Monapd (1935) and £ have not seen the deseription. It is poasible that. it belongs to this

group aga Freshwater form,

6. There remoina.a number of species which do fot fell inte any of tho above groups, but are

intermediate betwoon groups ur are cistinet, ‘They are:

similis, with a moderately Jong Ist antenna with a trace of a spur on the 2nd segment, ts

intermediate between the iypllups and brevivestrix groups, its Ith leg being early intermediate

hetween these types;

capillate is intermediate betwoen the cornite Hud sromi groups; the Tal witenna is compact,

tho exopod of 2nd antenna and male Sth legs are rediced, the Cemate Sth leg is like dincecrata ;

talipes is intermediate between brevirostris and stromi gYoups; ist antemin uot compact, No

spur, exopod of 2ud antenna somewhat reduced (2 setne), Ath legs with reduead getie, hot wnlilce

atromi in structure, tile Gth leg with distinct distal segment (ave footnote, p. 99) 5

parviula and parvuloidey ave intermediate hotween the eormuta and brevirostrix grompsy having

the Ist antenna tot very compact butwith a spur, and Sth legs nol untke dinocerata, L. inornata

is alse ip this intermediate group (seo footnote, p. 09),

longipes wobably belongs to the brevirostria group (see footnote, p. 19), while relicqudata

ig quite distinet from all others in the Jat antenna and 5th logs.

Laoernonte (LAoPHONTE) LAURYUNTICA 8p. HOV.

Females with the characters of the subgenus, the first exopod 3-seemented,

and the first anteuna S-segmented, Males with the third endopod 2-segmented,

with the end segment of normal shape bearing a spine on the outer margin, The

fourth endopod is 2segmented without inner setae, while the end segment of the

fifth leg is fused with the basal segment,

Occurrence, Two specimens, one of each sex, were washed from. /ueus grow-

ingon voeks in front of the Station at Trois Pistoles P.Q., Canada (Sample No, 11).

LAOPHONTE ARBNICOLA ap. noy,

Males with the third endopod 8-segmented, basal segment without setae,

second sexment with a spine only, this extending beyonce the end of the ramus,

Find seement of third endopod with three setae, two iner, one terminal, Second

endopod with inner setae normal. Caudal rami twice as long as wide.

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 101

Occurrence. A single specimen, a male, was washed from coarse sand at a

depth of 8 metres in the St. Lawrence (Sample No, HT).

Being known from the male only, this speeies cannot at present be assigned to

a subgenus, It is described here for convenience, and should not be regarded as

belonging to L. (Laophonte) sens. str.

This and the preceding species will be more fully described in ‘*'The Annals

und Magazine of Natural History’’, London,

The sample numbers refer to those already published (Nicholls, 1939).

Key To FEMALES OF LAOPHONTE SENS. STR,

All the species in this subgenus have 3 inner setae on the ard endopod; since the 2nd and 4th

legs are not known in many cases the key has, of necessity, been construeted on characters which

ure regarded as less relinble; segmentation of lst antenna and Ist exoypod,

1.

=

”

1st exopod 2-segmented ae “

lst exopod 3-segmented ar “ Ws J ‘ 2 15.

Ist antenna 4-segmented re Mi a i cornula Philippi 1840,

Ist antenna. 5-segmented i “4 a ve Ate fim Oe

ist antenna 6-segmented <s s vo an an 1, De

ist antenna 7-segmented +4 oy in ra an ot LN

Caudal rami twice as long as anal segment; segments of Sth leg fused,

bengalensis Sowell 1934,

Caudal rami no longer than anal segment; segments of 5th log distinet — ~. ry ‘BR

End segment of Sth leg not more than twice as long as wide, armed with 3 terminal setae,

mohammed Bl and Rich, 1891,

End segment of Sth leg 3 times.as long as wide, with 1 terminal spine and 2 short lateral setae.

chathamensis Sars 19054,

Basal segment of 4th endopod with inner seta “4 .» bulbifera Norman 1911,

Basal segment of 4th endopod withont seta i +e rm -, 6.

4th endopod with 2 inner, 2 terminal and 1 outer setac ut “y ws.

4th endopod with 1 inner, 1 terminal and 17 outer seta 10% - wR

2nd inher seta of dth endopod with basal fringe of fine hairs ., vose? Monard 1926.

2nd inner seta of 4th endopod withont. fringe, but with sensory outgrowth,

bulligera Farvan 1910,

Both segments of Sth legs with only & setae a fa talipes Wilson 1932,

Segments of Sth leg with 4 or 5 setue .. Aa so DO

End segment of 5th leg not extending beyond basal expansion; eaudal rami no longer than

anal segment ui 5 se oe a nina Sars 1908.

End segment of Sth log extending beyond basal expansion by half its length; eaudal rami

half as long again is anal segment . .: =) sinvilis (Claus) 1866.

End segment of Sth leg extending beyond basal expension hy } its length; eandal rami

nearly 3 times anal segment .. ict St - clongata Bocek 1872.

Basal segment of oth leg with 3 setae... fe i. longipes T, Seott 1894.

Basal segment of Sth leg with 4 setae... ut ts i elk

Basal segment of Sth leg with 5 setae. , es .. phycobates Monard 1935.

End segment of 5th leg with 4 setae ., — i karmensis Sars 1911,

End segment of Sth leg with 5 setae .. 3 . aye e 72,

Body with dorso-lateral baekwardly projecting lobes “4 Tunata Willey 1931.

Body without such lobes .. ws ke ia - 1,

Caudal rami not more than twice as long us wide ., i se w+ 14,

Calidal rami 24 times as long as wide .. aa “4 huperborda Sars 1909a..

Mud segment of 4th exopod with 1 inner seta “ “ tenera Sars 1921,

End segment of 4th exopod with 2 inner setae >) . perplexa T. Scott 1899.

Ist antenna 4-segmented tt re 7 australasica G. M, Thomson 1883.

ist nntennu 5-segmented as +> “ <p laurenticd Bp MoV,

Ist antenna G-segmented if de 34 Ae rs stor LE

ist antenna 7-segmented =H. 3 ‘ +2 ve 2.

Ist antenna 8-segmented 7 33 as votavia Monard 1885a,

102 ‘ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

It. Each segment of 5th Jeg with 4 setae .. =5 es PONIES Sars 1908.

Basal segment with 4 setac, end segment with 6 |, ot a» If,

Basal segment with 5 5 setae, end segment with 6 .. ot ri ve 22,

17, Caudal rami no more than twice as long as wide ,, “1 os :. 18.

Caudal rami more than twiee as long us wide & ' =f .. 20.

18. Ist antenna with recurved spur on 2nd segment ts +. dleugeidet Monard 1936,

Ist antenna with little or no projection on 2nd segment an 11, 19:

19. 4th endopod with 1 terminal seta; Ist paeore with finger-like process distally 01 basal

aegmont capillata Wilson 1932,

4th endopod with, 2 terminal ‘setae; no process on basal segment of Ist endopod.

tiveol?ostria (Claus) 1863,

20, Ist antenna with rounded protuberance on cach side of basal segment; 2nd endopod with

1 inner seta he .. reticaudata Willey 1935,

ist antenna without projections; § ond endopod with 2 inner setae a 21

21, End segments of 3rd and 4th exopods with 1 inner seta ate thoracica Boeek 1864,

End segments of 4rd and 4th exopods with 2 inner setac ia barbata Lang 1934,

22. Ist antenna with spur on 2nd segment ,. ote v» dominivatis Monard 1935.

ist antenna without spur .. Je 13 i manifera Wilson 1932.

23. Basal segment of 5th leg with 4 sulae .. “te "1 Fan oe 24,

Basal segment of dth leg with 5 aetae .. ws = 27.

Basal segment of 5th lez with 6 setuc .. i a longiremts T, Scott 1905,

S4. Ist antenna with spur on 2nd segment . 7 an a i. 2b,

Ist antenna without spur .. ' as .. 86.

25. End segment of 5th leg with 5 subterminal getag |. ns melnertt Brady 1890,

End segment of 5th leg with 2 inner and 4 subterminal setae, , gurneyi Lang 1934.

26. ind segment of 4th exopod with 1,2,2, setae ba +» eurticauda Bovek 1864.

End segment of 4th exopod with 2.2.3, setae " oy congenéra Sara 1908,

27. End segment of 5th leg with 4 setae =. “4 sporadiensis Brian 1928

Fund segment of 5th leg with 5 setao ., rm 2 Ble v. 2B,

End segment of oth leg with 6 setaw .. ; vie Ae ot BT,

28. 2nd segment of 1st antenna with large triangular sitotenbion, bearing setae.

dinocerata Monard 1926,

ist antenna with little or no spur 4 + ve as .. 29.

29, Basal segment of 4th endopod with inner seta af v- J BO,

Basal segment of 4th endopod withuut seta wv ' inornuta A, Seott 1902,

50. 4th endopod with 2 terminal setae Ae) an typhlops Sars 1908.

4th endopod with 1 terminal seta ar .~ longieaudata Boeck 1864,

81, Exopod of 2nd antenna with only 2 setue ot uw aa .. B2.

Exopod of 2nd antenna with 4 setae. ry BOs

82, Basal segment of 4th exopod swollen, middle bogmenit short, cha segment club: shaped.

discophora Willey 1929,

Seginents of 4th exopod of uormal shape and proportions ia minuta Boeck 1873,

a3, Ist antenna with spur on 2nd Reg Hae + e a) i. -. 34,

Ist antenna without spur aie - . 86,

34. End segment of 4th endopod with 1 onter seta = .. A serrata (Claus) 186%,

End segment of 4th endopod with no outer seta <\- ot 1. 80.

35, End segment of 5th leg at least twice as long ax wide " péroutd Sars 1008,

End segment of Ath leg about half as long again as wide ., parvuloides Monard 1935.

36, 4th exopod without inner seta on end aegment 4 a teniispiad Lang 1934.

4th exopod with 1 inner seta on end segment as i stramé (Baird) 1850

4th exopod with 2 inner setae on end segment ve .. campbellionsis Lang 1934.

LAOPHONTE (MESOLAOPHONTE) subeen, nov.

Laaphonte species having two imner setae on the third endopod; the type

species for this subgenus is littoralis T. and A, Seott (1893a), as deseribed by

Sars (1908, p. 254, pl. elxxy).

NICHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 103

This subgenus can also be divided into groups, the members of which have

much iv common, based on the setation of the fourth endopod. The following

species are included ;

littoralis "VT, and A, Seoth 1898a; exigua Sars 100503 prowima Sars 1908; applanuta Sars

1909a; gracilipes Brady 1910; rottenburgi T. Scot) 1912; quaterspinala Brian 1917; abbreviata

Sars 1921; quinguespinosa Sewell 1924; tavrina Monard 1928; sigmoides Willey 1931; lithophtla

Monard 1984; apeldea Chappius 1938,

1. apelaeca stands alone, having 5 setae on the end segment of the 4th endopod (2.28.1.).

2, The exigua group. With the exception of tawrina, all have the lat antenna without spurs

the exopod of the 2nd antenna is well developed (except in littoraliv) ; the Sth legs are more ov

less alike, except in applanata in which they are elongate; where the males are known all have

their Sth legs with distinct distal segment (except litteralis).

The following species belong to this group: abbreviata, applanata, exigna, gracilipes,

littoralia, proxima and tanrina, These have 4 setae ov the 4th endopod (1.2.1).

3. The quinqguespinosa group. These ave alike in having a vedueed exopod ou the 2nd

anfeuns (only slightly reduced i qudterspinata) ; Sth legs of similar shape (again qualerspinata

forms an exception) } and no spur on Jat antenna, "Che Sth lag of the male bas the distal segue t:

Tused with the base exeept in qualerspinata. The group consists of 4 species, pevhapa a fifth:

Iithophila, quaterspinala, quingiespinosa and signivides, Of rotlenburgi, which possibly belongs

here, very littl: is known; the Ist antenna has spur, 2nd muteima a reduced exopod, but 2nd aud

Ath logs are not known, These species hive 3 setae on the 4th endopod (1.2.0).

Rey ro FEMALES OF LAOPHONTE (MESOLAOPHON'TE ).

All the species I this subgenns lave 2 inner setae on the 3rd endopod,

1, 8nd and 4th endopods with 2 jnner setae bi; epelaen Chappuis 1938,

2nd and 4th endopods with 2 and | inner setac respeetively — —. ms 2

a =

2nd and 4th endopods euch with 1 inner seta we |. st on 0

2. Basal segment.of Sth log with 2 setae ., ‘ -. thaterspinata Brinn 1917,

Basal segment of Sth leg with 3 setae .. bo ote applanata Sars W000,

Basal segment of Sth lug with 4 setae, ‘ = gracilipes Brady 1910,

Basal segment of Sth leg with 4 setae .. - ns = vr age

3. Exopod of 2nd atitenna reduced, with 2 setae rhe Hitforalis TV. and A, Seatt 1898s,

Exopod of 2nd antenna normal 4 >) yy A oy He

4, Ist antenna with pronounced reeurved spur on 2nd segment — ., taurine Monurd 1928,

Jat antenna without spur, 7 xe f. oy os By

5. Greatest width more than 14 of total length “1 ve abbreviata Bars 1921,

Greatest width no more than 14 of total length De 2 pronima Sars 1008,

6. 4th endopod with 1 outer seta 14 he os euique Sars 1005a,

4th endopod with no outer seta ‘4 4 i. 62 ay

7. End segment of ath leg with 5 setae .. 7 L) bilhophila Monurd 1934.

ind segment of Sth leg with 6 setae.

(iinquesphosd Sewell 1924 and signioides Willey 1931 (10),

LAoPHONTE (MerALAGPHONTE) subgen, nov.

Loophante species haying one inner seta on the end segment of the third en-

dopod. The following species are included :

korent Bovek 1872; dnopinata T, Scott 1RO2; denticornis and depressu T. Seott 18940;

subsalsa Brady 102; brevifuroa Surs 1921; baltion Klie 1929; kliey Monard 193835 leugisty lata

Willey 1935; paueiseta Lang 1936e,

The species included here are alike in the general appearance of the first an-

tenna, but Alte? has a prominence on the second segment which, in denlieornts is

developed intoa large recurved hook; the exopod of the secontl antenna is normal

throughout the group; and the fifth legs of the males, where known, have the distal

(10) These two species are separable only by comparison of the males, and then with dilf-

culty, L.vrellenburgi has vot been included in the key since nothing is known of its 2nd and

4th legs,

104 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

segment clistinet from the basal, except in paiciseta. To this group belong those

species whieh have the endopods of the fourth legs reduced to 1-segment, namely :

inopinata and longistylata, 1-sezmented in both sexes, and korent, 1-segmented in

male only. In this feature the group leads on to the next subgenus containing

those species in which the endopods are 1-segmented in legs 2, 3, and 4.

L. depressa T. Seott 1894a, as described by Sars (1908, p. 239, pl. elx), i

selected us the type of the subgenus,

Key to Tre FEMAuES Or LAOPHONTE (METALAOPHONTE):

All the species in this subgenus have only 1 inner seta on the end segment of the 3rd endopod.

1, 4th endopod with I inner seta 3 _ _ 2.

4th endopod without inner seta fs = 1 longistylata Willey 1935.

2. 3rd eudopod with 2 terminal setae mo ” we v ay Be

3rd endopod with 1 terminal seta os ‘ We +? sy OF

8, Srd endopod with 1 outer seta. 71 . ee +3 . 4

3rd endopod with uo outer seta 24 i «s . 2; 8.

4. 4th endopod with 1 outer seta a " ‘ +. a: Ds

4th endopod with no outer seta. oe =; re pauciveta Lang 193860.

5. 4th endopod with seta on basal segment .. 23 -“- korenit Boeck 1872

4th endopod without seta on basal segment 7 AS ae 16,

i. rd endopod with scta on basal segment . . - a aeprewa T. Seott 18944.

3rd endopod without seta on basal segment bee fe , ~

7. 4th exopod with 5 appendages on end segment a) ve kliet Monard 1985,

4th exopod with 3 appendages on end segment, ‘- 7 subsalsa Brady 1902,

8. 1st antenna with spur on 2nd seyment |, " ., denticornis T, Beatt 1894a,

ist antenna without spur... ve ve man baltica Klie 1929,

9. 2nd endopod with 2 terminal setac oi Ne at brevifurea Sars 1921,

2nd endopod with 1 terminal seta ve 33 .. tnopinata T, Seott 1892.

LaopnHontr (NEOLAOPILIONTE) subgen, nov,

This subgenus contains two species referred to above, trilobata Willey (1929)

and corbyla Willey (1935). The endopods of legs 2-4 in these species are 1-seg-

mented, and the setation of these endopods is reduced, L. (N.) trilobata Willey

(1929, p. 531) is rewarded as the type.

Key ‘vo roe Femaues oy LaopHontr (NROLAOPHONTE).

1, 2nd, ard and 4th endopods with 2 setae ae a i irtlobata,

2. 2nd and drd endopods with 3, 4th with 4 setae... a oh corbula,

The male of corbula is unknown, but that of trilobata has 1-seemented endo-

pods on legs 2-4, as in the female.

LAoPHONTE (MoNOLAOPHONTE) subgen. noy.

Laophonte species without inner seta on end segment of third endopod.

This subgenus contains the single species curvata van Douwe (1929). The

original description is not very fully illustrated, but further details are given by

Monard (1937, p. 67, fig. 5). The exopod of the second antenna is very small,

with three setae; endopods of legs 2-4 are 2-segmented with four, three and two

setae respectively. The first endopod is unlike that of any other species in having

the terminal claw peetinated. According to Monard (lec. ett.) the male has the

fonrth exopod only 2-seemented

NIcHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 105

Sproms INQUAMRENDAR.

The species included under this heading are those whose third endopods have

nol heen dleseribed. They are

auslralasiva Thomson 188%; pilosa Cav 1884, *breviaornis and pygmaca T. Seott 18944

gracilis T. Booth 1903; faroensis 'T. Scott 1908a; “hirsuta Thompson and Seoth 1903; macera

Sits 1908; *glueialis and varians Brady 1910; *australiv and “wiltont T. Beott 1912; (naignis

T. Scott 1914; uatsmand Willey 19233 oevlata and sire (ieney 1927b; rhodinea Brinn 1928;

simmert Van Douwe 1929; *royé Jidkubisink 1982; mendax Klie 1929; *scotili nom. nav. (ewigna

T. Beott).

The first of these, australasica, is almost certainly in the cornuta group, with

its compact first antenna, well developed exopod of the second antenna, fourth

endopod Jacking only an outer seta (2,2,0,) and filth legs like lawrentica. This

species has already been ineluded in Laophonte sens. ste. (p. 99).

1. faroensis is also probably in Laophonte sons, str., with its elongate first an-

tenna. well developed exopod on the second antenna and rather long fifth legs,

L, gracilis with its compact first antenna and filth legs of the cornuta type

probably belongs to that group of Lovphante sens. str.

Of hentsmunt Willey states that it is near to nena and uerdgaardi, whieh

would place it also in Laophonte sens. str.

L, insignis, with its first antenna neither elongate nor campact, second an-

jenna with reduced exopod, fifth lea not tualike that of xtreme in shape but lacking

the distinctive notch, is probably like talipes, intermediate between strom and

breviroslris.

Of wacera the swimming lees are staled by Sars to be of “normal strieture’’;

it was placed by him between perplera and nordgaardi, and probably belongs to

Laaphante sens, str,

In the ease ot ocwata unfortunately the seta formula given by Gurney

(1927h). is ineomplete, but the somewhat reduced exopod of the second antenna

jaken in conjunetion witib lhe appearance of the fifth legs suggests that it belongs

in the slrony group of Laaphonte sens. stv.; Gurney suggests that it has affinities

with praxima, whieh | have placed in the subgenus Mesaluaphante,

Aceording to Monard (1928) yilosa Car (1884) has normal setation in its

swimming legs; from the male third endopod it is probable that it belongs to

Luophonte sens. str. (2.2.0, is the usnal number of setae in the male when the

female has 3.2.1.), The exopod of the second antenna is reduced, suggesting the

stromi group, but Car's figure of the fifth lex does not enable any conelusion to be

drawn.

In pygmaen the fifth leg is of the strom type, the second antenna is stated to

he like brevicornis, but is not deseribed or figured tor either.

Monard (1985a, p, 61) regards sima Gurney (1927b) as very close to korent

on the strueture of the fifth leg. Lnamy opinion it is much closer to parole Bars,

and both of these are very close to inornald A. Seott, in whieh case it also would

belong to Liaanhonte sens, str,

The l-seemented fourth eudopod of variwns suggests affinities with L, (Meta-

luophante), but the deseription is too meagre for certain identification.

Van Douwe places his species simmer’ with brevirestris, cangenera and

macera, Which would place it in Laephonte seus. str,

As stated above rhodiaca is kaiown only from the male; while mendax eannot

be placed until it has been more fully desevibed.,

The reinaining species in the above list (marked with an (*)) are too indefi-

nite for any eonelusions to be drawn,

Of the species listed below [ have not seen deseriptions :

parvula (Clans) 1866; wncinata (Czerniayski) 1868; nordlandica Boeek 1872; missisarpensis

Uerrick 1587; bafanus Labbé.

106

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

The name parvula was first vised by Claus and the probability is that Sars’

species of the same name will have to be renamed, but since T have not seen a de-

seription of Claus’ species I have refrained from renaming Sars’ species to avoid

possible confusion,

As stated above T have been quite unable to trace Labbé’s species bafanus

quoted by Monard (1935, p. 66).

i)

o

19,

Kry ‘ro LAopHoNTE MALES.

jrd endopod l-segmunted — ., we J als trilobata Willey 192,

3rd endopod 2-sugmented se +4 ate ve Oo

3rd endopod S-segmented, 2nd segment without, spine vo bengatensix Sewell 1934,

ard endopod 3-segmented, 2nd segment with spine .. 7" = oe 16,

End segment of 3rd endopod of normal shape, bearing aetae only re 22 dé.

End segment of Srd endopod of normal shape, bearing spine on outer margin 2

End segment of 8rd endopod with outer distal comer produced into spine-like process ., 11,

Basal segment of 3rd endopod without seta wd we r+ ov 4

Basal segment of 3rd endopod with inner seta .. +. Warians Brady 1910 (11),

2nd endopod with 2 inner setae, one of them thickened basally .. perplexa T. Seott 1899,

En endopod with 1 unmodified inner seta Gm “) ss +e Te

Srd and 4th endopods with 6 and 4 setae respectively sie capillata Wilson 1982,

Sra wud 4th endopeds esch with 3 setae .. an oie talipes Wilson 1932,

4th endopod l-segmented .. to 7 4 Be hae te

4th endopod 2-seymented =... vt i ea +s 2 &

End segment of Sth leg well developed .. A, wt prowima Sars 1908,

End segment of 5th leg fused with basal +s .. ervata Van Dovwe 1929,

Basal segment of 3rd ondopod with inner seta oa) ys siubsalan Rrady 1908,

Basal segment of Srd endopod without seta ta “ts 9,

End segment of 5th leg well developed , , a ve tyuphiops Sarvs 1908,

End segment of 5th leg fused with basal ., vr ne i -. 10,

4th endopod with inner setae on 2nd wnd 8rd segments ne manifera Wilson 1932.

4th endopod without inner setae oe Ps i lanrentica sp, nov,

End segment of 5th legs well developed, reetangular re horeni Boeck TR7L,

End segment of 5th logs fused with basil nv ane ; V2,

2nd endopod with modified inner seta, . iT ot wt + Ud,

2nd endopod with inner setae normal — ., a 7 ai .. 14.

Ist inner seta of 2nd endopod swollen basally at s*, pilosa Car 1884,

lst inner seta of 2nd endopod a curved spine x : pauciseta Lang 1936e,

Ist inner seta of 2nd endopod a enrved spine, hooked distully .. atromi (Baird) 1850,

2nd endopod with 2 inner and 2 terminal setae _- . minuta Boeek 1872.

2nd endopod with 1 inner and 2 terminal setae be “4 a rredie

2nd endopod no longer than Ist segment of exopod .. quinguespinosa Sewell 1924,

2nd cndopod almost equal to Ist two segments of exopod or sigmoides Willey 1931,

- th endopod I-segmented .. on - littoralis T, and A, Beott 1893a,

4th endopod 2-segmented . . ve “xt cb an w. Ui

Basal segment of 3rd endopod with seta =e an ae -» 18,

Basal segment of 3rd endopod without seta se . ve OR,

2nd segment of 3rd endopod with seta as well as spine is a ot IB.

2nd segment of 3rd endopod with spine only a oie spelaea Chappuis 1988,

Basal segment of 4th endopod with inner seta we is “ite .. 20,

Basal segment of 4th endopod without seta i .. longiseta Nicholls 1941,

(11) Pig. 7 (p. 525) Brady 1910 is assumed to represent the 3rd endopod of warians, since

it does not resemble the 2nd (fig. 6) of which it is stated to he the enlargement; the illustration

of the endopod of the 3rd leg (fig, 10) is so small that an enlargement might be expected, and

hoth the ard leg and flg, 7 show setue on the basal segment, not shown in the 2nd leg (fig. 6).

NIcHOLLS—DIOSACCIDAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 107

20. End segment of 2nd endopod with 2 inner, 2 terminal and 1 outer setae; spine on 3rd

endopod not extending beyond end of ramus “ie rhodiaca Brian 1928.

End segment of 2nd endopod with 2 inner and 2 terminal setae; spine on 3rd endopod ex»

tending beyond end of ramus am o te re Bl,

21, Spine on ard endopod long und straight , , cornmuld 1a Philippi 1840,

Spine on 3rd endopod trimcate, with serrated end .. hirsuta Thompson and Seott 1903,

22, Spine on 3rd endopod not extending beyond end of ramus |. . te BB:

Spine on 8rd endopod extending beyond end of ramus ~ r', ., 26,

23, Ist exopod 2-segmented es a's ak Ae : ow Bh

ist exopod 3-segmented a 4 Ag) is oe o. 25,

24. Spine on 3rd endopod straight, reaching end of ramus oy similis (Claus) 1866,

Spine ou ard endopod S-shaped, not reaching end of ramus... nana Sars 1908,

25, Caudal rami uoarly twice as long as wide, little longer than anal segment,

ourticauda Boeck 1864,

Cuudal rami nearly 3 times us long as wide, twice as long as anal segment.

hintsmani Willey 1923,

Caudal rami 4 times as long as wide, 24 times as long as anal segment (horacica Boeck 1864,

Caudal rani nearly 5 times as long as wide, 24 times as long as anal segment,

fongicandata Boeck 1864,

26, 2nd segment of 3rd endopod with seta as well as spine « ty as BT.

2nd segment of drd endopod with spine only be a. a <. (28,

27. End sogmont of 5th Jeg small, subeireulnr, with 2 setae; end segment of 3rd endopod with

4 setae mohammed Bl, and Rich. 1891,

End segment of 5th leg elongate, ree tangnlar, with 4 setae and 1 spine; end segment of

srd endopod with 4 setae |. ste serrata (Claus) 1863.

28, 2nd endopod with 1 of inner setae modified =, ' . oe 88.

2nd endopod with inner setae normal ,, - ae fe .« 89,

29, Ist seta of 21d endopod a eurved spine .. > - ; », 30,

2nd seta of 2nd endopod thickened basally . ‘fs ' . Bl

30, Distal segment of 5th leg fused with basal - ' ascophos Willey 1929,

Segments of Sth leg distinct ’ oa “ tenutapina Lang 1934,

31, Ist antenna with well developed spur on 2nd segment > =f ., 32,

Ist antenna with little or ho projection from 2nd segment .. ae ., U8,

32, pw on Ist antenna at right angles to sogment .. a Meinerti. Brady 1899,

Spur on Ist antenna reeurved vs oe cx faurina Monard 1928,

33. End segment of 3rd exopod with 5 appendages. y's an .. 34,

End segment of 3rd exopod with 6 appendages. - ve lenera Bars 1921,

nd sayment of 3rd exopod with 7 uppendages —. - v.85,

34, Ist exopod 2-seymented ra) Te ‘ L5 Tasted Willey 1931.

Ist exopod 3-segmented Fi; aa = -. gimmeri van Douwe 1929,

45, 1st exopod 2-segmented rN as _*. <i as ., 36,

Ist cxopod 3-segmented ‘~ + \ ne , . 38.

56, End segment of 3rd endopod with 1 inner and 2 terminal setae .. macera Sars 1908.

End segment of 3rd endopod with 2 inner and 2 terminal setac ,,

37. End segment of 4th exopod with 1 inner seta; 1st exopod 14 of basal andonod.

karmensis Sats 1917,

End segment of 4th exopod with 3 inner setae; Ist exopod nearly $ of hasal endopod.

hyperborea Sars 19098.

38, 2nd endopod with modified seta inserted near middle of segment brevirostris (Claus) 1863,

2nd endopod with modified seta inserted in proximal third of segment congenera Bars 1908.

a, End segment of 3rd endopod with 2 setae (14 inner, 1 terminal) . baltica Klie 1929,

End segment of 3rd endopod with 3 setae (2 inner, 1 terminal) . . 40,

End segment of 3rd endopod with 4 setae (2 inner, 2 terminal) . ; .. 41,

40, Caudal rami not more than half as long again as wide =y Hordyanrat Sars 1908,

Caudal rami twice as long as wide : as a arenicali sp, nov,

41. Body flattened dorso-ventrally ide A es Rpptangte Bars 19098,

Body cylindrieal . << ; . . 42.

108

2

hoe

Ag.

44.

RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

lab antenna, 6-segmented he re e .. depresaa.T. Beott 18940.

Ist antenna. T-segmented le an vy an oy 43,

Bnd segment of 8rd exopod with 5 appendages; ond segment ot! 5th leg fused with basal,

campbelliensix Lang 1934.

Rad segment: of 3rd exopod with 6 appendages ; segments of Sth leg distinet.

sinha Sars 1905n,

End segment of 3rd exopod with 7 appendages ve ' » 44,

Spine on Srd endoped quite straight —.. ney “yrasitipes: Brady in10 (2),

Spine on drd endopod slightly curved, serrate ws .. sporadiensis Brian 1928

Spine on 3rd endopod sharply curved “i's .. farvensia 'T. Scott 1903a,

With the following exceptions the deseriptions of the males were obtaimed

either from the original description or from Sars 1911:

pilosa Car 1884 (Monavd 1928); mohammed Blanch, and Rich. 1891 (Gurney 1982, Wilson

1982); hirswla Th, and Se. 1908 (Gurney 19270); prowima Says 1904 (Klie 1929); eurvala

van

Douwe 1929 (Monard 1937),

LITERATURE.

References marked (*) have hot been consulted.

Baird, W. (1850): Natural History of the British Entomostraca (Ray Society, london).

*Bhinehard, Rand Richard, J, (1891); Mem, Soe, Zool. France, iv, pp. 512-535,

“Bouck, A. (1864): Fid. Selsk. Forh., Christiania,

*Boeck, A. (1872): Lbid,

*Brady, G. 8, (1868); Nat, Hist, Trans. Northumberland and Durham, iti, (1870), pp, 120-136,

“Brady, G.S. (1972)! Tbid., iv, pp. 483-445.

Brady, G. 8, (1880); Mon, British Copepoda, i (Ray Society, London).

Brady, G.S. (1899): Trans. Zool. Soe. London, xv, pp. 31-54.

Brady, G, 8. (1900): Nat, Hist, Trans, Northumberland and Durham, xiii, pp. 429-443.

Brady, G_8, (1902) (1908); @rans. Nat. Hiat. Soe, Neweaatle-wpon- - Tyne, xiv, pp, 54-008,

Brady, G. 8. (1910): Deutsche Siidpolar- Bepelns xi, Zool, ti, pp, 497-494,

Brady, GS. (1918): dusty, Autare, Bayped., 1917-14, Set. Reps., Ser. Gv (3),

Brady, G. 8. and Robertaon, D. (1873) ann. May. Nat. Mist. (4), xii, pp. 126-142,

“Brady, G. 8. and Robertsou, D. (1875); Brit, Assoc, Rep., pp, 185-199.

Brehm, V. (1910): Zool, Anz,, xxxv, pp. 425-424,

‘Brian, A. (1917): Monit. Zool. Ttal., xxvili (11).

Brian, A. (1921): Stilt, Lab, Mar, Quarto, Genova, pp, 1-112.

Brian, A, ciel h Monit, Zool. Ital, xxxiv, pp. 126-135,

"Brian, A, (1925): Jbid,, xsxvi, pp, 15-24,

Brian, A. (1927): Boll. Mus. Zool. Anat. comp. Univ. Genova, Ser, 2, vil, No, 9.

Brian, A, (19270): Boll, Soe, Bnt, Thal, lex, pp, 34-41.

Brian, A. (1928); Boll, Mus, Zool, Anat, comp, Univ. Genova, Ser. 2, vii, No. 18.

*Brian, A. (1929): Areh. zeal, Torino, xiii, pp. 269-281,

Brian, A (19298): Zool, An2., Ixxxvi, p. 94.

Campbell, M. TT, (1929): Trans. Roy. Soo. Canada, 3rd Ser., xxiii, pp, 808-332,

Car, L, (1884); alreh, f. Naturg,, 1, yp. 287-256.

Cha'ppuis, Py nx (1931): dreh. f. Tydrob, Supp. Bad, viti ahs pp, 512-584,

Chappuis, P. A. (1988); Bull. Soe, Set, Elnj, ix, pp 158-18

Claus, C. (1863) : : Die freilehenden Copepoden (Leipzig)

*Claus, G. (1866): Die Copepaden Fauna von Nizza (Leipzig).

*Ozerninyski, V, (1868): Perk, Persamml, Russ, Naturf., St. Petershurg, Abt. Zool,, Copepoda,

p. 39-57.

van Douwe, C. (1920): Zool. Ang., Ixxxili, pp. 283-204.

Edwards, C, L, (1891); Arch, f, Naturg., iwi, pp. 75-104,

Farran, G. P. (1913): Proc. Roy. Trish Acad., xxxi, No. 45,

* Fischer, S. (1860): Abh. Kol. Bayer. Akad, Wiss., viii,

“Giesbreeht, W. (1882): Ber. Komm. Deutsch Meere, iv,

*Giebreeht, W. (1902): Rapp. Sei. Zool., Anvera.

i iempar® R. (1925): Boll. Ist, Zool. Univ. Roma, iil, pp. 38-70.

Gurney, R. (1927a): Trans. Zool. Soe. Lond., xxii, pp. 178-177,

(12) For the purposes of this key the male of gravilipes Brady (1910) is assumed to have a

Twwemented Ist antenna like the female; Brady makes no statement on the subject.

NicHoLi~s—Di0saccIpAE AND LAOPHONTIDAE 109

Gurney, R (1927b) + Ibid., xxii, pp. 451-577.

Gurney, R. (1928); Proe, Zool, Soc, Lond,, pp, 817-382,

Gurney, RB, (1982): British Fyesh-Water Copepoda, ii (Ray Sovicety, London).

“Terrick, C. L. (1887): Mem. Denison Sci, Assoc, i,

Jakubisiak, 8, (1982): Bull. Sor, Zool, France, Wii, pp, 506-313.

Jakuhisiak, 8. £7933) : [bid., liii, pp. 18-17.

Klie, W, (1918): Fer. Naturk, Untermeser, lil, pp, 1-48.

*Klio, W. (1923); dreh. f. Hydrob., xiv, pp. 339-839.

Klie, K. (1925): Milt. Geogr. Ges. Nat, Hist, Mus, Diibeok, 11 Bev, xxx, pp. 123-136,

Klie, W. (1929): Zool, Tahrb., Syst., vii, pp 329-386,

Rlie, W. (19387): Mitt. Honig. Naturw, Inst, Sofia, x, pp. 1-42.

Klie, W. (1989): Zool, Ana, exxvi, pp, 223-226,

Lang, K. (1084): Kungl, Pysiogr. Sallsk. Hand, N.E, xiv, No. 14.

Ling, KX. (1935) 1 Kungl. Fysiogr. Silisl. Lund Furhanadl, v, No. 9,

Tang, K, (19360) » Lbid,, vy, No. 21,

Lang, K. (19860): Zool. Anz., exiii, pp. 174-177.

Ling, IK. (1986b): Lbid,, exiv, pp, 83-40,

Lang, K. (1936e): Thid., exv, pp. 152-156.

Lang, K. (1986d); Zvol. Jahrb, Syst, xviii, pp, 445-480,

Lang, K, (19360): Swedish Antare. Rxrped. (1901-1903) + iii, 6.

Monard, A. (1924): Bull, Soe, Zool. France, xlix, pp. 646-672,

Monard, A, (1926): Rew, Suisse Zool, xxxiii, pp, 619-628.

Monard, A. (1926): Areh. Zool. exp, gen, Ixv, pp. 89-54,

Monard, A, (1928); Lbid,, levii, pp, 259-443,

Monard, A, (1928a): Rev, Suisse Zool., xxxv, pp. 853-388,

Monard, A, (1984); Rev, Zool, Bol, Africaines, xxvi, fase. 1,

Monard, A, (1935): Trav. Stat. Biol, Roscoff, fase. xiii.

Monard, A. (19851): Stat. Oceanogr. Salanunbo, Bull, 34,

Monard, A. (1936); Bull. Trav, Stat. d'Aequic, et de Peche, Caxtiglione, Alger.

Monard, A. (1987): bid.

Nicholls, A. G, (1939); Le Nat, Canadien, xvi, pp. 241-316,

Nicholls, A. G. (1941): Ree. South Austr. Mus. vi, pp. 381-427.

Norman, A. M. Srey : Proc, Roy, Soe. Lond,, xxv, pr 206,

Norman, A, M, (1911); Trans, Linn, Soc. Lond,, 2nd Ser., xi, pp. 137-148.

Normun, A, M. und Seott, T. (1905): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, (7), xv, pp. 284-800,

Norman, A, M, and Seott, T, (1906); The Crustacea of Devon and Cornwall. (Wesley & Son,

London).

“Pesta, O, (1916): Betty, Heant. Meeresfauna Westafiieas, it (Hamburg)

Philippi, A, (1840): alreh. f. Naturg., vi, pp. 188-190,

ei 9 O, (1908-11): An Aceotmt of the Crustacen of Norway, v, Copepoda (Warpacticoida).

ergen),

Sars, (+, 0, (1905a) = Zao, Jalirb,, xxi (4), pp. 871-414,

Sars, G, O. (19099): Report of the Sceond Norwegian Arctie Mxpodition in the ‘*Fram'’

— 1898-1908, iii, No. 18. Crnstueea. Videnak.-Selsk, Kristiania,

Bars, G, O. (1909); Prac, Zool, Soe, Lond, pp, 21-77.

Sars, G. O. (10a3) : An Account of the Crustaeca of Norway, vii, Copepoda Supplement.

(Bergen),

Seott, A. (1896): Trans. L"pool Biol. Sac., x, pp. 184-158,

Scott, A. (1902): Ubid., xvi, pp. 397-428,

Seott, A. (1909): Siboga-Ruped., Mon, xxixa, pp. 1-323 (Leyden).

Beott, T, (1892): 10th Ana. Rep. Wish. Board Scal., pp. 244-272.

Beott, T. (1894): Trans. Linn, Sov, Lond, 2nd Ser, vi, pp. 1-161.

Scott, T, (18940): 71h Ann. Rep, Fish. Board Scot., pp, 231-271.

Seott, T, (IBIS): Lh Ann, Rep, Fish. Board Scuty pp, 145-174,

Seott, T. (1897): toth Ann, Rep. Fish. Board Seot., pp. 07-174,

“Seott, T. (1898): léth ann, Rep. Fish, Board Seot,

Scott, 'T. (1890); Journ. Linn, Soc. Lond., xxvii, pp. 60-126.

*Seott, T. (1902): oth daw, Ren, Kish, Board Scot.

BScolt, T, (1903): 21st Ann. Rep. Mish, Roard Scot,, pp. 109-185,

Scott, T. (19030): Journ. Linn. Soe, Lond., xxix, pp. 1-11.

Heott, Tl. (19038b): dann. May, Nat, Hist. (7), xi, yp, 4-32.

Seott, T, (1905); 28rd Ann, Rep. Fish, Board Seot., pp. 41-153,

Seott, T. (19050) : Aan. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), xvi, pp. 567-571.

Seott, T, (1906); Thid, (7), xvii, pp. 458-466,

Seott, T. Srttty : 24th Ann. Rep. Fish. Board Scol., pp. 275-280,

Seott, T. (1913): Trans. Roy. Soe, Edin,, xlviii, pp, 521-599,

Seoth, T, (1914); Ann, Mag, Nat, Hist. (8), xiii, pp. 1-11, 869-379,

Scott, T. and Scott, A. (18930): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, (6), xil, pp. 237-246,

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Scott, T. and Seott, A. (1894): Tbid. (6), xiii, pp. 187-149.

Scott, T. and Scott, A, (1895): Ibid. (6), xvi, pp. 353-361,

Seott, T. and Seott, A. (1901) : bid. (7), viii, pp. 837-856,

Seiwell, H.R. (1928): Proe. 0. 8. Nat. Mus., Ixxili, Art, 18.

Sewell, R. B. S. (1924); Mem, Indian Mus., vy (12).

Sewell, R. B. 8. (1934) : Ree, Indian Mus., xxxvi, pp. 45-121.

Stephensen, K, (1935): K. norske vidensk. Selsky. Trond., Pt, II, No. 39, 1936.

Thomson, G. M. (1883): Trans. New Zealand Inst., xv, pp. 93-116.

Thompson, I, C. (1889): Proc. L’pool Biol. Soe., iii, pp, 192-194.

Thompson, T. CG. (1893): Trans, L’pool Biol. Soc., vii, pp. 1-56,

Thompson, I. C. and Seott, A. (1903): Report on the Copepoda. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries,

Supp. Rept., Pt. 1, No. 7 (London).

Willey, A, (1928): Contrib. Canadian Biol. (N.S.), i, No. 16, pp. 803-34.

Willey, A, (1929): Ibid., iv, No. 33, pp. 527-539.

Willey, A. (1930): Aan. Mag. Nat, Hist. (10), vi, pp. 81-114.

Willey, A. (1931): Areh. Zool. Ttal., xvi, pp. 601-617.

Willey, A. (1985): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10), xv, pp. 50-100.

Wilson, C, B. (1924): Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. Ixiv, Art. 17 (1925).

Wilson, C, B, (19382): Bull, U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 158.

Wilson, C. B, (19324): Proce. U. 8. Nat. Mus., xxx, Art, 15

*Wolfenden, R. N. (1905): Plankton Studies I. Copepoda (Rebman Ltd., London).

Wolfenden, R. N. (1905a): Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes,

ii,, Suppl. 1, pp. 989-1040,

INDEX TO GENERA,

(Descriptions, Tables, Keys, and Synonomy only.)

Amphiascopsis, 66, 68, 70, 74, 76, 89.

Amphiascoides, 67, 68, 70, 81, 82, 89.

Amphiascus, 66, 68, 69,70, 77, 78, 89.

Asellopsis, 94, 97.

Beatricella, 66.

Canthocumptus, 94.

Cleta, 92, 94, 95,

Cletopsyllus, 93.

Dactylopusia, 71.

Delavalia, 69.

Diosaccopsis, 67, 68, 89.

Diosaccus, 66, 68, 90.

Donsiella, 93.

Echinolaophonte, 95, 97.

Esola, 94, 96.

Harvrietella, 94, 96, 97,

Hemilaophonte, 94, 96, 97.

Talysus, 66, 67, 68, 90, 91.

Laophonte, 94, 97, 99, 106.

Laophonte, 97, 99, 101.

Laophontella, 92.

Laophontina, 04, 96, 97,

Laophontodes, 92.

Luophontopsis, 94, 97.

Lobitella, 94, 96, 97.

Mesamphiasceus, 68, 70, 79, 80, 89.

Mesolaophonie, 97, 99, 102, 108.

Metalaophonte, 97, 99, 103, 104.

Microthalestris, 66.

Monolaophonte, 99, 104.

Neolaophonte, 98, 99, 104,

Normanella, 93,

Parastenhelia, 66.

Parialysus, 66, 67, 68, 90, 91.

Platychelipus, 93.

Pseudolaophonte, 94, 96, 97.

Pseudodiosaccus, 67, 68, 90.

Pseudomesochra, 66, 69, 91.

Robertsonia, 66, 68, 85, &8, 89,

Sarsocletodes, 92, 93.

Schizopera, 67, 68, 85, 88, 89.

Stenhelia, 66, 69, 97.

Stenheliopsis, 66, 97.

‘Teissierella, 66,

Tetragoniceps, 94,

Tydemanella, 66, 67, 68, 90, 91,

Varnaia, 66, 87.

FURTHER RECORDS OF LIZARDS AND FROGS

FROM KANGAROO ISLAND

By H. T. CONDON, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Some reptiles and amphibians were collected by the members of the Tate Society,

University of Adelaide, during an expedition to Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, in

January, 1940, under the leadership of Dr. C. T. Madigan. In addition to some species

previously recorded from this region by Waite (1927), five forms new to the locality,

including two further geographical races, were collected. The parasitology of these

specimens is being dealt with by Prof. T. Harvey Johnston and Miss P. Mawson.

’ FURTHER RECORDS or LIZARDS ann FROGS

rrom KANGAROO ISLAND

By H. T. CONDON, Sourn Ausrratsan Museum.

Some reptiles and amphibians were collected by the members of the Tate Society,

University of Adelaide, during an expedition to Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island,

in January, 1940, under the leadership of Dr. C. T. Madigan. In addition to

some species previously recorded from this region by Waite (1927), five forms

new to the locality, including two further geographical races, were collected.

The parasitology of these specimens is being dealt with by Prof. T. Harvey John-

ston and Miss P. Mawson.

LACERTILIA.

Famity GEKKONIDAE.

Gyunopacrynus Miu (Bory 1825),

Phyllwnus milii Bory de St. Vincent, 1825, vii, p. 183, fig. 1.

Two specimens collected under rocks along Stunsail Boom River; the larger

has the tail regenerating and measures 98 (81-+-17) mm. The smaller measures

103 (66 + 87) mm. Previously recorded by Waite.

Famity SCINCIDAE.

Ecernia wittrer (Lacepede 1804),

Scineus whitit Lacepede 1804, iv, p. 192: Australia.

Lygosoma moniligera Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, vy, p. 786; Australia.

Tn all six examples of this species were collected by the Tate Society. All

are wniformly much darker below than the typical mainland forms. Two lack

eompletely the characteristic dorsal black lines with pale brown spots, and present

a dull brown appearance (No. R2160). They also differ from mainland indivi-

duals examined in that the parietals are completely separated by the interparietal,

and there are no nuchal shields.

Tubb (1937) has recorded some colour variations of this skink on Lady Julia

Perey Island, Victoria, and whited is undoubtedly a very variable species. The

Kangaroo Island specimens, however, both from the uniformly dark undersurface

and other features, appear to constitute a distinet insular race, and it is proposed

to separate them as follows:

EGERNIA WHITE! TENEBROSA subsp. nov,

Deseription: Supranasals absent; eyelids well-developed; the lower eyelid

scaly; prefrontals, frontoparietals and interparictal distinet; frontonasal widely

separated from the frontal by the prefrontals which form a median suture; parie-

tals completely separated by the interparietal which is nearly as large as the fron-

tal; five supraoenlars, the second the largest; 7-8 supraciliaries, the first greatly

enlarged; three large temporals; no nuchals; 3-4 anterior lobules in the ear-

112 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusSEUM

opening; 34-38 smooth mid-body scales; 22-28 lamellae beneath the fourth toe;

the adpressed limbs overlap; rmdersurfaces dark slaty grey.

Type: S.A. Museum Colleetion no, R2161, a subadult from Flinders Chase,

Kangaroo Island, South Australia, collected by members of the Tate Society,

January, 1940,

Measurements of type: Total length 210 mm. ; tail 125; snout to anus, 85; fore-

limb 24; hindlimb 29.

Figs. 1-8. 1. Head of Kgernia whitel tenebrosa, subsp. noy,, S.A; Museum Collection No.

FR 2161, locality Kangaroo Island. 2. Ayla jermisiensis, Dumeril and Bibron, male, R 2071, locality

Woodside, South Australia. 3. Ditto, female, R 2166, locwlity Rocky River, Kungaroo Island.

Remarks: This insular race is at once distinguished by being generally darker

above and below, the characteristic dorsal markings being obscured or even absent,

while the sealation also differs. Although this skink may grow to a length of 850

fam, (12 inches) or more, it is better known as a much smaller reptile, when in a

general way it resembles members of the Sphenomorphus Section of Lygosoma; it

may he recognized at onee, however, by the characters of the head shields,

Lyeosoma Hardw, and Gray.

Section Lero.vorismMaA Dumeril and Bibron.

Tridactylus (not of Latreille 1802) Cuvier, 1829, p, 64 (type decresiensts ).

Velradactylus (not of Merrem 1820) Cuvier, supra cit., p, 64 (ype decresiensis),

Peromelis Wagler, 1830, p. 160 (substitute name for Tetradactylus Cuvier).

CoNDON—LIZARDS AND FROGS FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 113

Hemiergis Wagler, supra ett., p. 160 (substitute name for Tridactylus Cuvier).

Leiolopisma Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, y, p. 742.

Chelomeles Dumeril and Bibron, supra cit. p, T7T4 (type quadrilineatus) ,

Lampropholis Fitzinger, 1848, p, 22 (type L, guichenati),

Eulepis Fitzinger, supra cit., p. 22 (type L. duperreyt = trilineatum).

Mocoa Gray, 1845, p. 80 (type guichenoli).

Lygisaurus deVis, 1884, p. 77 (type foliorwn = mundus).

Mijophila deVis, supra cit., p. 77 (type vivdas = blackmanni).

LEMOLOPISMA ENTRECASTEAUNT (Dumeril and Bibron 1839).

Lygosome entrecasteausti Dumeril and Bibron, 1839, v, p. 717: Australia,

A single specimen collected on Flinders Chase (R2164) ; tail regenerating

inid-hody seale rows 28 ; ear-opening roundish and smaller than the palpebral disk;

nostri] pierced in nasal; no supranasal; frontonasal broader than Jong, forming

narrow sutures with the rostral and the frontal; four supraoeulars, the second

the largest; six supraciliaries; frontal in contact with the first and second supra-

oenlars; two frontoparietals; interparietal small, parietals forming a suture be-

hind it; dorsal seales with distinct striations; subdigital lamellae 19; adpressed

limbs just meet, pentadactyle. Colour: slate grey below, very dark olive-brown

above wilhout longitudinal black bauds. This is a uew record tor Kangaroo

Island.

LETOLOPISMA PERONI (Fitzinger 1826),

Seps peronw Fitazinger, 1826, p. 53; Kangaroo Island.

Lygosoma (Hemiergis) quadridigtalum Werner, 1910, ii, p. 480.

Hight individuals were collected :

Total length,

R 2162 (melanie)—very dark above and below 174 (75 +99) min,

R 2168

A normally coloured 129 (55 + 74)

‘ ” " 65 +4 ))

“C very dark above, except tail) vellowish-white below 60+ 7

*D normally coloured 148 (61 4-77 ?)

Di ” ” 131 (55 + 76)

roo, . 114 (51 + 63)

6 ” 55 +0

‘Tail regenerating, Loewity: along Stunsail Boom River, under rocks.

An undivided transparent disk in the lower eyelid, frontoparietals paired,

interparietal large, subdigital lamellae not enlarged transversely, limbs tetra-

daeivle, ear covered with seales, 18-21 mid-body seale-rows.

Formerly placed under Hemieryis, {his species according to Dr, M. A, Smith

(1987) should be included under Letolamisma, as Heimtergis does not warrant

recognition as a separate section in Lygesoma,

LEIOLOPISMA GUICHENOTL (Diumeril and Bibron 1839),

Lygosome guichenoté Dumeril and Bibron, 18389, v, p. 718; Australia.

A sivele damaged example was taken (R2167). The suture between the ros-

tral and frontonagal is almost as broad as the frontal, the interparietal is very small,

mid-hody seale-rows about 80; trontoparietal single; limbs pentadactyle, just

meeting when adpressed; lamellae beneath fourth toe 26; preanals moderately

enlarged,

Total leneth 102 (38 + 64) mm,

Lacality : Near Stunsail Boom River.

This species has Hot previously beeuw reeorded from Kangaroo Island,

114 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

AMPHIBIA.

Mamity LEPTODACTYLIDAE.

LYMNODYNASTES PLATYOREPTALUS Gunther 1867,

This species was not listed by Waite (1927), but has since been recorded from

the Island by Loveridge (1935),

Crimi ‘Tsehudi.

Crinia, Tschudi, 1838, Batr., p. 78.

As shown by Boulenger (1882) the members of this genus can readily he

divided into two groups, namely those in which the under surfaces are granulate

und those in which under surfaces are sinooth, Speeies of the latter seetion inelude

lusmanivnsis (Cranther) 1864, /aewis (Gunther) 1864, /. froggatli Fleteher 1891,

darlingtont Loveridge 1933, rosea Harrison 1928, leat Fletcher 1897, and aeuli-

rostris Andersson 1916,

The following isa key to members of the first-named sroup in which the lower

surfaces are eraiular or areolate,

Lower surfaces granular, two metatarsal tubercles normally present.

T. Baek with two prominent lyre-shaped dorsal plicae aud small warts,

georgiana Taehiidi 1838, glaverti Loveridge 1988, signiferd. (Giravd) 185%.

Lf, Baek smooth without dorsal lyre-shaped pliene , . b ceffinis (Quather) 1864,

The ouly species of Crimia previously recorded from Kangaroo Island is

signiferd (Waite, 1927), whieh is apparently of the typical race. The two known

forms o£ Crinia signifera can be distinguished as follows:

a Lower surfaces white, very heavily covered with dark (brown or black) mottlings a7 spots,

signifeorna (Girard) 1854 (N.S.W,, Vie, Tas, S.A.).

oan Lower surfaces lightly flecked with dark (brownish) markings or immaculate.

iquita Cope 1866 (W,A,).

No examples of Crime signifera siqnifera were colleeted hy the Tate Society

Expedition, although a further race of affints was taken and is described below.

The races of Crinia affinis can be separated as follows:

i Baek uniformly grey or pale brown, with a black or brown lateral dine (whieh may be

interrupted above the arm).

h ‘Throat and belly white or lightly flocked with brown .. ajinis (Gunther) 1864, WIA,

bh Under atirfaees heavily overlaid with brown or black markings

haswellt Pleteher 1894 (NVS.W., View, S.A.).

on Baek uniformly very dark brown or black, no dark lateral line, under surfaces lightly marbled

with brown ys 5 halmatuying subsp. nov. Kangaroo Island.

CRINIA AFFINIS HALMATURINA subsp. hHov,

Description: Wabit not as stout as georgiana, but more so than in signifera.

{lead about as broad as long; snout vather pointed ; nostril slightly nearer tip of

snout than anterior border of eye; canthus rostralis feebly marked; interorbital

region slightly broader than upper eyelid; pupil horizontal; tympanum hidden ;

tongue oblong, slightly nicked and free behind; vomerine teeth absent. Fingers

slender, first anc last shortest, third longest; {wo metatarsal tubercles; a distinet

nietatarsal fold; subarticular tubercles present; toes slender, slightly fringed;

the tibiotarsal articulation of the adpressed hind limb reaches to the temple;

skin smooth above with a few small warts; below strongly granular, Colour, very

dark olive-brown above, including the limbs; a whitish line from the eye to the

elbow; no lateral black line; below, white and with sparse mottlings of dark

Conpon—LiZaArRbs AND FROGS FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 115

brown: thighs (?) pale yellow, with brown mottlings. Total length 20°43 mm-

Subadult. Sex: (?) male. Type in South Australian Musemn Collection (R2165)-.

Loculily >» Minders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Two examples

were colleeted by the Tate Society in January, 1940,

Hyua aervistexsrs Dimer and Bibron 1841,

Ayla jeveisiensis Dumevil and Bibron, 1841, viii, p, 580: Jervis Bay, N.S.W,

Hyly krefflit Gunther, 1863 (3), xi, p. 28, pl. iv, fig. C: Sydney, N.S.W.

Hyla ealliseelis Peters, 1874, p. 620: Adelaide, South Australia.

Tyla unaguinalis Al, 1985, eix, pp, 252-3; Adelaide, South Australia.

A single adult female apparently referable to this species was collected at

Rocky River in Jannary, 1940, (S,AM, R2166,)

It as doubtful if all the frogs taken in South Australia in the past and identi-

fied by Waite and others as Lyla ewing? are of that species,

Bor many years jeroistensis has been known only from the type, taken at

Jervis Bay, New South Wales, and we ave indebted to Loveridge (1985) for sug-

gesting that the later deseribed href tii is merely a synonym of it, as well as for

clarifying the position of ewingt, of which for a mumber of vears kreffli was re-

garded as a synongnn,

Loveridge dlso records a South Australian specimen of yervistensis, but

Waile (1929) did not list the species for South Australia.

Comparisons of South Australian diainland material with specimens of Ayla

Jjervisiensis from Tasmania, aud with oxamples.of H. ewing? verreaurt and H.e,

alpind incieate that these frogs are not ewingt.

The main distinguishing leature of jervisionsis is the glandular fold at the

vorner of the mouth, and this is very distinet in one fly adult breeding male

taken at Woodside, South Australia. [n females whieh the writet has examined

the glandular fold is slightly indivated. The colour markings and ¢igital web-

bmg, however, in all agree with that of jervisiensis.

Ahl (1935) described a new species of Ayla reeeived from Zietz of Adelaide

as ITyla wnguinalis, and his deseription, based on six individnals, agrees well with

the matemal now examined, In bis deseription he does not inelude a glandular

fold at the corner of the mouth, while the bright yellow thighs are not mentioued,

although the other colours are those of jeruisiensis. LY the frogs tides diseussion

ean be regarded as true jervistensis, then additional characters for the species

might be the relatively more slender habit, as compared with ewe, and also per-

haps, the relatively greater leneth of the limbs in jerwisiensis,

It is suggested, however, that wguinalis might eventually be proved to be

a sepavate species, although the deseription given recalls that of ealliscelis by

Peters (1874), whieh was also described from Adelaide specimens, and thus this

latter name would have to take preeedence over Ahl’s name.

There is some variation in the markings of the thighs in the speeimens e&x-

amined ; the dark markings are either in the form of dark purplish streaks, blotches

orsmall spots and fleekings, and there are similar small blofehes on the groin, while

in two specimens, females, there are also u few dark spots on the hinder parts of

the flauks. Theve is io sign of yellow on the thighs, The vomerine teeth aire

sitnated between oar slightly forward of the choanae.

Measurements:

No. R266 female, Rocky River, Kangaroo Tsland $8 mt.

No. RIBS female, National Park, Relwiv, South Austraiia 35 mm.

female, Nutional Park, Belair, South Austratia ad mam,

No, R207] male, Woodside, South Austealia 28 mim

Ne. R079 immature, Launceston, asmania. 24mm,

\immatare, Latneeston, Tasmants 17 mm,

116 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES CITED.

Ahl, E. (1935): Zool. Anz., cix, p. 252.

Blyth, E. (1853) : Journ, Asiat. Soc. Bengal, xxii.

Bory de St. Vincent (1825): Dict. Hist. Nat., vii, p. 183.

Boulenger, G. A, (1882); Cat. Batr. Salienta s. Ecaudata, Brit. Mus.

Cuvier, G. (1829) : Régne Animale.

De Vis, C. W. (1884) : Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., i, p. 77.

Dumeril, A, and Bibron, E. (1839): Erpet. Générale, v.

Dumeril, A. and Bibron, E, (1841): [bid., viii.

Fitzinger, L. F. J. (1826) ; Neue Classif., Rept., p. 53.

Fitzinger, L. F. J, (1843); Syst. Rept., pp. 22-3.

Gray, J. EK, (1845): Cat, Liz., Brit. Mus,

Gunther, A. (1863): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), xi, p. 28.

Lacepede, B. G. (1804): Ann. Mus. Paris, iv, p. 192.

Loveridge, A. (1934): Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool, Harvard, \xxvii, No. 6.

Loveridge, A. (1935): Ibid., Ixxviii, No. 11.

Peters, W. C. H. (1874): Monatsh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 620.

Smith, M. A. (1937): Ree. Indian Mus., xxxix, p. 213.

Tubb, J. A. (1937): Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., xlix, p. 425.

Wagler, J. G. (1830): Nat. Hist. Amphibia, p. 160.

Waite, E. R. (1927); Proe. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr., li, p. 326,

Waite, EK. R. (1929): The Reptiles and Amphibians of South Australia, Adelaide.

Werner, F. (1910): Fauna Sudwest Austral, ii, p. 480.

THE AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS

(SUBFAMILY PLATYCERCINAE)

By H. T. CONDON, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The birds forming the subject of this account comprise a mixed assemblage of

medium-sized, long-tailed Parrots, and include such well-known forms as_ the

Rosellas (Platycercus), the Ringneeks or Yellow-collared Parrots (Barnardius), and

the various “Grass Parrots” (Psephotus).

In these birds the tail is longer than the wing, and has the central feathers more

elongate than the outer rectrices. The principal other external features apart from

plumage colour, by which they may be readily distinguished, are the horn-coloured

bill and the peculiarly scalloped primaries.

THE AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS

(SupraAmity PLATYCERCINAE)

By H, T, CONDON, Sour Ausrrauian Museum.

Plate viii, and Text-fie, 1-3,

INTRODUCTION,

Tue birds forming the subject of this account comprise a mixed assemblage of

medium-sized, long-tailed Parrots, and include sueh well-known forms as the

Rosellas (Platyeercus), the Ringnecks or Yellow-collared Parrots (Barnardius),

and the various ‘Grass Parrots’? (Psephotus).

In these birds the tail is longer than the wing, and has the central feathers

more elongate than the outer rectrices, The principal other external features apart

from plumage colour, by which they may be readily distineuished, are the horn-

coloured bill and the peeuliarly sealloped primaries. The structure of the wing

feathers appears to be one of the most conservative features of the group, for it

oceurs in all the Australian forms as well as in related exotic genera such as the

Pacifie Parrots (Cyanorhamphus) of New Zealand and adjacent regions, Tn all,

the second, third, fourth, and filth primaries ave markedly scalloped on their outer

edges, exactly as oceurs in the Cockatoos (Kakatoeinae). As noted by Thompson

(1899), the affinities between the Platycercinae and Kakatocinae may be closer

than is usually recognized, Not only are there some similarities between the

cranial osteology of certain forms, but both groups are characterized by the ab-

sence of an ambiens leg musele and the presence of an oil gland, although this latter

feature may not be pnportant taxonomically, In the Coekatoos the orbital ring

is complete in the adult, but as in the Subfamily Pezoporinae, in which a similar

arrangement occurs, the completion of the orbital ring can only be regarded as a

secondary development.

In the Platyeercinae the orbital ring is incomplete, and while we can trace

other structures in the eranim of this group whieh are homologous with those

found in the Kakatoeinae, it ig apparent that the development of the architecture

of the skull of the former has not proceeded as far as in the last-named.

Another feature generally quoted as characteristic of the Broad-tails is the

ubsenee of a furculam, but this structure has also been lost in the Pezoporinae, and

its presence or absence is probably not of great taxonomic importance, The prim-

aries Of the Pezoporidae, which include such genera as the New Zealand Kakapo

(Strigops), the Night Parrot (Geopsittdcus), Budyverivgar (Melopsittaeus) and

Ground Parrot (Pezoporus), are unsealloped, and it may be that these forms are

only remotely connected with the Platycercinae.

The small parrots of the genus Neophema, which are visually associated with

the Platyeeremae, have no fureulum and ambiens, and the primaries are only

slightly sealloped.

Peters (1937) has proyided the most recent taxonomic arrangement of the

group, and the present paper is a review of the distribution and status of all the

known genera, Species, and subspecies.

118 Recornps OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CLIMATE AND GEOGRAPHICAL Distrisurion,

The Jarger Australian Broadtails are non-migratory, and the various species

appear to be confined to distinet climatic zones,

Their evolution and distribution is imimately connected with the past history

of the Australian continent. The serious deterioration of the climate in late Pleis-

tocene tintes probably exterminated species of which now theve is no trace, whilst

those whieh were able moved before the encroaching eremeae, and at present in-

habit the wetter peripheral districts,

With the more aecurate digerimination of many of the subspecies of Broad-

fails, the nature of the regions in which they oeenr may be examined to diseover,

if possible, the factors responsible for their development and distribution apart

from food and competition, [ seems apparent that the breeding eycles of many

are dominated by the ineidenee of seasonal rains, but less obvions is the question

of changes of climate and geography in Australia since the last geological period,

Many of the avian forms now living in the wetter peripheral districts of the Con-

tinent are probably remnants of races whieh once extended much further inlaud,

and it is often difficult tu deeide whether those subspecies now confined to the

various concentric climatic zones have originwted in those areas or whether they,

too, have moved outwards towards the sea from the interior before the spread of

the successive eremeae, which have been considered to be the reeurring charae-

teristic of world elimatie history since the end of the Pleistoeenc.

Most parrots are good indicators of present clintatie conditions, and if we ea

assume that present-day forms evolved in Pleistocene times, it inay be possible to

trave their fowner distribution with referenee to the climatie zones of that time,

In this connection it would appear that those forms now living in regions in the

north of Austraba have not moved far from the areas they originally oveupied, as

here the districts which have experienced climatic chanves are much less extensive

ihan those in the south.

In recent years several generalized climatological maps have been published,

and the zones indieated approxiniate closely to the weeepted areas of sulspeciation

at present recognized in Australian ornithology. This observation is supported by

reference td many groups of birds.

Prescott (1981) published a vewetation map of Australia, and there is a close

correlation between yegetation types and the avifanna, It is probable, however,

that the oeeiirrence of many species ty dependent nat onty on the physical environ-

ment, but is intimately connected with temperature, rainfall, and also, perhaps,

the duration of the arid period, which is a feature of the climate of many parts of

Australia at the present time. Davidson (1936) clisensses the climate in relation

to insect, ecology, and considers that owing te the mild climate and markedly

seasonal rainfall, moisture is the main infinence affecting the distribution of these

creatures. This tea could probably be extended to many other evoups of animals,

and is well illustrated in the Broadtailed Parrots,

The areas occupied by the many geographical races correspond closely with

the zones indieated ut mans showing the mean duration in months of the arid

period (Andrews and Maze, 1933), and the inean annual values of the Meyer Ratio

(Preseott, 1984),

Davidson (1926) constructed a map of bioclimatie zones based on a critical

ratio of rainfall to evaporation of 0-5 for each month. From publisbed data and

further information it has been possible to prepare a revised map of the moisture

zones based on mfluential rainfall and available moistuce (tig, 1).

The margins of the majovity of the zones indicated are the same aa those of

Davidson, bit the southern boundaries. of the ‘‘desert’’ areas have been modified

and additional ‘humid’’ areas have been imeloded based on the known occurrence

CONDON —AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 119

of large rain jungles in the Coen district of North Queensland, and smaller areas

on Groote Eylandt and elsewhere in Northern Australia.

The nomenclature nsed is that of Davidson, being based on the number of

consecutive months during the year the value of the Previpitation/ Evaporation

ratio is greater than 0-5, as follows: Desert zone (0 months); Arid zone (1-3

months); Semi-arid zone (4-6 months); Semi-bumid zone (7-9 months); and

Tlumid zone (10-12 months).

desert

semi-arid

semi-humid (Hi#EH) humid

Fig. 1. Moisture Zones of Australia, based on qumber of consecutive months P/W is greater

tham 0-5,

In the north the approximate margins of the desert areas shown in fig, 1 cor-

respond closely with a value of 10 for de Martonne’s Index of Aridity for inean

annual conditions (Andrews and Maze, 1933), but in the south this index figure

marks the limits of the arid region. Similarly a value of 20 marks the approximate

limits of the semi-arid belt in the north and south. A table has been prepared of

the ranges of the various subspecies of Platyeercines with reference to the moisture

zones (fig, 2), and the various niches they oceupy are indicated.

From this table it will be seen that the races of Barnardius, Northiella, and

Psephotus predominate in the more arid or even desert zones, while the Rosellas

120 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

(Platycercus) and Purpureicephalus ave confined ti hamid, semi-humid, or more

rarely semi-arid areas which are subject to some influential snmmer as well as

Winter rains.

Tt is suggested that those forms whieh are shown in the diagram to oceu iy

more than one zone may be further divided subspecitically, or alternatively that

they are relatively more recent arrivals from other areas,

The above intimate relationship between race and inoisture does not seem to

hold for all Ausiralian birds, however, as in some Passeriformes local flietiiations

in thew ocerrrence is largely determined by seasonal weather changes in whieh

temperature js an additional dominant factor,

PrHyLoapNy AND CLASSIFICATION,

The Psittariformes are an extremely aneient growp, and in the present state

of our knowledge if is diffieult to trace the phylogeny of the entire order The

divisiuns proposed by many wodern workers may not be based on sound anatomical

leatiores, for the trae value of many quoted characters has never been properly

decided,

The features on which genera are separated appear to be contradictory, ard

itis Fell that niche importance has been placed on certain osteologieal vharaeters

and other internal feahires which oecur m widely differing eroups and may have

evolved independently. Several cistinet lines of evolution are recomnizable, and

the highest forms superficially have come tu resemble one another. Such charac-

fers as the loss of the firreulum, the completion of the orbital ring and the appear

anee of other cranial ossifieations, as well as the loss of the ambiens lee inusele,

while valnable in demonstrating minor relationships, are only secondary develop-

ments in the Various subfanules. Even the aborted condition of the sternal keel

in Sérigops may not in itself be of more than generie importance,

The Platyeercinae belong to a section of the Parrot tribe in which the second

to fifth primaries ave markedly sealloped, anc ure apparently allied ty the Kaka-

toeinae (Cockatoos), Pioninae (Amazons and others) in which there is-a similar

condition, Lt is conceivable that the Joss of vertain skeletal structures in resporse

to changes in habits has oceurvred independently in many genera, and is further

evidence supporting the antiquity of the group. ‘The number of species aud genera

in former times must have been mueh greater than it is to-day, Owing to the dis-

appearinee of many related forms, presert-diay species which are only remotely

connected have often been associated in the varions families and subfamilies,

Porhes (1879) made mueh of the sinilarities between the pterylosis, nsteolagy

and other anatomical features of Lathawus and Platycercus, but examination of

Mirther material seems 10 indicate that the affinities of the former ave with those

parrots in which the primaries are unscalloped, sneh as the Loriinae (Lories), and

we nay dismiss the genus from further discussion in this paper,

Salvadori (1891) proposed separating the Australian Broadtails as a distinct

subfamily, Platyeercinae, of the Psittacidae, one of the six major families of Par-

rois recognized by him,

Mathews (1931) regarded them as a distinet family Platycercidae. Aceord-

ing to his arrangement the Pezoporine (Grownd-Night Parrot) group should be

regarded as a separate family, Pezoporidae, although Salvadori and other authors

have included them with the Broadtails, [tis here suggested that the first-named

are closer to the Strigopimas, and with them may vonstitute a separate family.

The genera conprising the Platyeereidae, according to Mathews are as follows :

Platycercus, Barnardius, Purpureicephalus, Psephotus, Northiella, Psephatellus,

Neopsephatus, Neananades, Neophema, Cyanorhamphus, Bulleria, and Lulhumus,

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 121

subadelaidae

adelaidae

myrtae fleurieuensis

Barnardius

occidentalis melanoptera

connectens victoriae

macgillivrayi elegans

nigrescens

barnardi

cecilae

augustus eximuis

Barnardius

whitei diemenensis

Purp, spurius

pallescens haematonotus

narethae

caeruleus

haematogaster

ethelae

Northiella

Psephotus

alter

haematorrhous

venustus

adscitus

palliceps

Platycercus

xanthogenys

icterotis

Fig. 2, Table showing correlation between distribution of subspecies and moisture zones,

122 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The last-named is best excluded from this list, while Psephotellus, Neopsephotus

and Neonanodes do not seem worthy of generic rank. The remaining genera may

then be regarded as a subfamily, Platycercinae, although Neophema is a doubtful

inclusion.

Peters (1937) in revising the taxonomy of the Parrots of the world included

the Broadtails in the subfamily Psittacinae, in which he includes also the Macaws

and a host of other forms. This author’s arrangement differs greatly from that of

other workers in that he recognizes only one family, with six subfamilies, for the

whole order Psittaciformes.

It is anticipated, however, that the Psittacinae of Peters later on will be

further subdivided, when the Broadtails, probably together with other Australian

and New Guinea forms not now associated with them, will be recognized as a

distinct family group, The osteology and other anatomical details of many genera

is still quite unknown, and it is difficult to assess the true value of many superficial

features, such as differences in colour pattern. It is believed that these characters

may later be proved to be good indices for the separation of the different groups

and will be supported by more deep-seated structural characters, when further

anatomical studies are undertaken.

It is reasonable to asstme from the development of present-day forms that the

veneralized ancestral type was a plain green bird, which in turn may have pre-

viously passed through a blue stage, although this is scarcely more than conjecture.

From these birds the various highly-coloured species of Broadtails we know to-day

have evolved. In this connection it is significant that those forms of Cyanor-

hamphus which are found in the region of the south-western Pacific are reminis-

cent of the immature stages of many Australian species.

The following artificial key may indicate the affinities between the Australian

eenera :

IT, Second to fifth primaries markedly scalloped on their outer edge.

a, Bill with hook greatly lengthened we : bs : .. Purpureicephalus

aa. Bill short, hook not lengthened.

b. Well-defined cheek-patches,

¢, Feathers of back uniform.

d. A yellow collar around the hindneck . v. .. Barnardius

dd. No yellow collar ats oe ~ =A .. Northiella

ee. Feathers of back bicoloured ah 44 = .. Platycereus

bb. No well-defined cheek-patches .. oe ns J .. Psephotus

IT. Second to fifth primaries only slightly scalloped .. wit . Neophema

(not dealt with herein),

REVIEW or SPECIES AND GHOGRAPHICAL RACES.

In the discussion which follows no complete references to the genera, species,

and subspecies are given, and for the full quotation of the original place and date

of publication of the various scientific names reference may be made to the

R.A.0.U, Check-list (1926 edition), and Mathews’ ‘‘A List of the Birds of Aus-

tralasia’’, 1931, pp. 196-210. The first of the quoted vernacular names are those

which were adopted by the R.A.O.U. Check-list Committee (1926), and they are

followed by names used by Gould, North, Campbell, Hall, and others, including

those applied to subspecies. The use of common names for subspecies is not ad-

vocated, however; many were originally used for forms which were then regarded

as full species.

Genus PuRPUREICEPHALUS Bonaparte 1854.

Diagnosis : Strongly characterized by the long projecting bill and distinctive

coloration, The pre-orbital process is larger than in other genera and the post-

frontal process is reduced, while the whole cranium is more slender than in allied

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED FARROTS 123

forms. The orbital ring is incomplete as in other Platyeercitiae, and the artieula-

lion of the quadvate is nnobscured. The form of the primaries is exactly as in

related genera, the second to fifth feathers being markedly scalloped.

There ave mo well-marked cheek-patehes as in Barnardius, Northiella and

Platyoercus, but the entire facial region, with the exception of the lores, is bright

yellowish-green. Genotype: Purpurcicephalus spurius (Kuhl, 1820),

Discussion; Confined, so far as is known, ta the coastal areas of South-western

Australia, where it is called the ‘‘ King Parrot’’, this speeies is remarkable for the

ereatly elungated upper mandible,

No evidence is yet available as to the special uses of the beak, whieh is quite

unlike that of any other Platyeereine, but Serventy (1988) has suggested that it

may be a ease of over-specialization, comparable in some witys with the excessive

tlevelopment of the wide heak of the Tawny Frogmouth (Podurgus), The over-

development of the beak may have been partly responsible for the extinetion of

the genus in other parts of Australia, its possession proving a banilieap in com-

petition with other forms of a move generalized type,

We can he moderately certain that the species did not origmate in South-

western Australia, and it is the sole surviving member of an assemblage of parrot

forms which became extinet probably im the Pleistocene, and may have been more

widely spread than at present,

Althongh many aitthors have suggested that Purpurcicephalus has affinities

with Barnardius, i is more likely that it is ay independent development from the

ancient prototype of the Jarger Platyeereines. Not ouly is the colour pattern

unique, but the absence of blue cheek-patehes at onee marks if as distinet; as a

matter of fact, it is ummeccssary to go beyond the feature of the eranial strneture

to emphasize ts isolated position in the Australian parrot fauna.

Differences hetween Juveniles amd Adulls: The immature plimage differs

mharkedly from that of the adult. Aeeording to Tavistoek (1929), the adult plam-

age is acyuired with the first moult when the bird is little less than a year old, In

young birds the red-cap is absent, being simply represented by a narrow ved har

across the forehead, the nnder tail coverts are mainly yellow with red streaks in-

stead of entirely red, and the upper breast is dull green with faint red transverse

barrings, while the abdomen is pale mative, The baek and wpper tail are yellowish-

ereen. and the rump is yellow. As noted veeently by Lendon (1940, p..91) there

is a wellanarked white “‘wing stripe’ in the young of both sexes.

Sexual Differcnees: The sdult female is considerably duller than the male,

und resembles the immature bird. There is no red cap, hut a restricted frontal

band of red, aud ite mauve of the breast is much doller. Ag in most Platycercines,

females are further distuguished by the presence of a ‘white wing atripe’’.

PURPUREICEPHALUS spurius (Kuhl 1820).

Synonyms: pileatus (Visors), rufifrons (Lesson), purpurecocephalus (Quoy'

and Gaimard), carter? Mathews.

Names: Ked-eapped Parrot, King Parrot, and Pileated Parrakeet.

Range: South-west Australia.

Mathews (1931) proposed distinguishing two races, spurns and cartert. The

ivpteal form is stated to be confined to the coastal areas; carter? oes foriher

inland.

Mathews (1915, p, 1288, and 1917, fig.) gives the following characters for

carteri: “Differs from Ps, spurs in bene darker above, the cheeks sreener and

the unider-surface dark purple.’’

Rxamination of five specimens from representative localities has failed to lend

support. to this proposed subdivision,

124 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

Genus Barnarpits Bonaparte 1854.

Diagnosis: The Ringnecks. (genus Barnardius) ave a purely Australian group

characterized by the presence of a ‘yellow collar’ around the hindneck, reminis-

cent in some ways of the vivid pink neck-ring of some of the Asiatic Ring-necked

Parrots (Psittacula). The eranial osteology of all species differs from that of

Platycercus, especially in the auditory region, The condition to be noted is similar

to that found in the genera Norihiella, Psephotus and Purpureicephalus. In these

last-named Platyeercines the articulation of the quadrate with the cranium is

clearly visible and similar to that found in the Polytelitine parrots (Aprasmictus

and Polyltéelis) and the Lories (such as Trichoglossus), In Platycercus there is a

well-developed bridge of bone which connects the zygomatic process with the supra-

meatal tuberele and which conceals the articulation of the quadrate with the

cranium, (See fig. 3.)

SuPRAMEATAL

Process

ORGIT SUPRAMEATAL

Process

ZYGomaric

Process

ZyYaomMaTic

PRocess

QuADRATE TYMPANIC

Tt ie

once MPA ME

A ORNMICE

Fig. 3. Auditory Region of crania of (A) Platycercus, and (B) Barnardings, showing strue-

tural differences. About twice natural size.

As in related forms, Barnardius has the orbital ring incomplete, the post-

frontal process small, and the squamosal process crossed at its base by a deep

froove above the meatus and in front of the supra-meatal process or tubercle.

The upper mandible is relatively large and heavier than in Platycerens, and

the auditory meatus is narrowed and curved. The fureulum is also absent as in

other members of the subfamily.

Barnardius is characterized by the presence of blue cheek-patches exactly as

oeeur in Platycercus, but the colour pattern of the plumage differs markedly from

all the other genera of the subfamily. Genotype: B, typicus = Platycercus bar-

nardi Vigors and Horsfield.

Discussion : Some workers prefer to include all the forms of Barnardius under

Platycercus as members of a single species (e.2. Peters, 1937), but this view is

not supported herein.

Peters says (p. 263); ‘‘There are no structural characters of importance that

justify the existence of the genus Barnardius; those who do admit it do so only on

the basis of colour."’

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 125

Examination of crania of Barnardius and Platycereus reveals that there are

differences between the two in the auditory region, and these give support to the

contentions of Salvadori (1891) and Mathews (1918) that Barnardius is worthy

of recogzuition,

Advocates of the distinctness of Barnardius haye always stressed the differ-

enees i eoloue pattern between the two genera; these are ohyiously of more than

superficial importance.

it is anticipated that Peters’ (1937) proposed scheme, including all the forms

of Baruardius as embers of a smgle species will not be acceptable to Australian

ornithologists,

Rather it is suggested that there are two Formankreise the members of which

form excellent examples of Ifuxleyian geocline series; the character gradients

inyolve size and colour. One series occurs west of about 138 deg. east longitude,

the other east of that line.

a

C v

semitorquatis barnardi

zonartus Formenkreis. barnardi Pormenkreis.

acaidentatin vets .

wiyrtae macgillinrays

zonarina whited

aunderi | auguatus

(West of about 188° east long, ) (East of about 138° eust long.)

The mnost conservative feature in Barnardius seems to be the coloration of the

cheek-patehes, which are blie-violet in sonerius and ereen-blie in barnardi. he

geographical races of both species which inhabit more humid southern zones have

retained the red forehead band which was probably characteristic of their common

aneestor,

Juvenile Plumage; Tmmature birds resemble adults but are generally paler

and duller with the markings less clearly defied, Tn B.z. semitorquatus the ved

forehead band is completely assumed in the adult only, while in B, barnardi the

head is uniformly dark-coloured in the young, changing to green in certain races.

There is a white wing stripe in both sexes which is usually retained im the adult

female,

Serual Differences ; Females differ from males in being slightly smaller and

duller in colonr, having the head aud beak smaller, In those forms with a red fore-

head band, this is greatly reduced in extent in the female, As stated aboye, females

may he torther distinguished by a white wing stripe which is almost invariably

present,

Distribution: The members of Barnardins are mainly confined to the drier

interior, and with a few exceptions oecur within the 15 ineh isohyet, From the

accompanying table (fig, 2) it will he seen that nearly all the races of Barnardius

are coufined to warm or hot arid moisture zones which reecive no influential

suinmer rains, ‘Two exceptions oceur, In the semi-humid eoastal zone of South-

western Australia, which receives some effeetive summer rain, there lives the large,

distinctive race, B.c. semitorqualus, Tn the Cloncurry district of North Queens-

land is a hot arid area whieh receives no effective winter rains, but has P/E > 0-5

for from one 10 three months in the summer. Tere we find another most distinctive

race Bob, macgillivray?., These forms are best regarded as the ‘‘end members’ of

the various cline series and not as full species.

126 ReEcoRDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Barnarpivs zonartus (Shaw 1805).

Names: Port Lineoln Parrot, Yellow-banded Parrot, Yellow-collared Parrot,

lwenty-eight Parrot, Yellow-naped Parrot, Banded Parrot, Bauer’s Parrot or

Parrakeet, aud North Parrakeet.

Range: Australia west of about longitude 138 deg. and south of about 20 deg,

Sonth latitude.

Races: Barnardius concrius semitorquitus (Qhoy and Gaimard) 1830; B.z.

dundasi (Mathews) 1912; Bug, zonarius (Shaw) 1805; B.co myrtae (8S. A. White)

1915; Biz, oceiduntalis (North) 18938,

Tn 1929, Kinghorn expressed views on the status of the various forms of Bar-

nardius, and published a distribution map. Jenkins (1931) reviewed the western

forms of Barnardius zonarinvs, and his findings are approximately the same as those

of Mathews (1931). Exaniination of further material confirms most of the sig-

gestions offered by these workers, although it seems preferable, in the light of

further knowledge, (o regard as subspecies some of the speeies reeognized try

Minghorn.

BArNakDIUS YONARLUS SEMITORQUATUS (Qunoy and Gaimard 1830).

Names: Twenty-eight Parrot, Yellow-naped or Yellow-banded Parrakeet,

Yellow-collared Parrot.

Synonym: woolundra Mathews.

Tn regarding the Twenty-eight Parrot asa race of zonarius the modern trend

towards a “broader concept. of species is followed, while it is also felt that such is the

consensus of opinion among present-day Australia ornithologists.

Rarher workers allotted semitorquatus fall specific rank, as also did Kinghorn

(1929), despite the fael that there are intergrades between it and zonarius, This

is one of the exceptional forms of Barnardius, and inhabits districts subject to

influential summer rains, as well as winter rains. The total vumber of months

P/E > 0:5 is 7-8, which is relatively higher than that of areas where other races

of zoverius oeeur, The mean annual temperature also is less, being 55-60 dee, F., as

compared with 65-75 or even 80 dee, FM, of areas inhabited by other races, Mathews

was probably the first to regard semitorquatus as a race of gonarius, but in this he

was not followed by the R.A.O.U, Cheek-list Committee (1926), The various inter-

mediates produced by the natural interbreeding between semitorquatus and

zunarius along their line of contact, such as woolundra, wight almost be dis-

regarded as time geovraphieal races; they comprise very yariable populations und

furnish good examples of genocline series.

The green plumage of this race has a more yellowish tinge than that of gon-

artus; the yellow abdominal band varies greatly in extent and may be absent or

rreatly restricted, and is never as wide ag in adjacent forms.

Range; South-western Australia, prineipally in the wetter (semi-humid)

coastal areas with an average rainfall of from 20 to above 40 inches, comprising

six months of winter rains and one to two wonths of influential summer rains.

DARNARDIUS ZONARTUS DUNDAS! (Mathews 1912),

Name: Dundas Yellow-collared Parrot,

Characters :*' Differs from P.z. semtterquatus in lacking the red frontal band ;

ae from P.z, zonarins im the deep green of the upper surface,"? (Mathews, 1912,

274.)

Jenkins noted (1931, p. 259) that the female of dundasi which he examined

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 127

was ‘'smaller than typical zonariws, back darker . . . . in other respects resembles

B.z. woolundra"’.

Although recognized by Mathews (1931) and Peters (1937) this is a doubtful

race, and it might more correctly be regarded a synonym of gongs, Hor further

remarks see under that name.

Range: Drier interior of South-western Australia, roughly between the 10

und 20 inch isohyets.

BARNARDIUS ZONARIUS OCCIDENTALIS (North 1893),

Name: North Parrakeet, Northern Yellow-banded Parrot.

Synonym: connectens Mathews 1912,

Chardctors : ‘In the disposition of its markings P. occidentalis resembles P.

sonarins, but it differs from that speeies in having ght blie (i.e, pale blue-violet)

instead Of dark blue cheeks; in the greater extent of the eonspieuous lemon-yellow

of the lower portion of the breast and the whole of the abdomen and which extends

ws fur as the vent, instead of the deep gamboge yellow of the centre of the abdomen

only; in the verditer green of the chest, back, wings, seapulars and inter-seapular

region, instead of the dark green, and in the absence of the narrow black band

immediately below the collar.’’ (North, 1905.)

OF connectens Mathews (1912, p, 274) says: ‘‘ Differs trom P.z. occidentalis

in having the rump uniform with the back; the yellow band of the abdomen more

cistinet, but not as bright as P.z. zonarius.”’

Jenkins stated of connectens: ‘‘Resembles B.z. occidentalis, but the band of

yellow on the under-surface is much deeper in tone, haying an orange tinge.’’ There

is some confusion as to the extert of the range of ocerdentalis and cunnectens.

Tanghorn (1929) shows conneetens about Geraldton and the Murchison, with

occidentalis to the north beyond Roebourne.

Jenkins (1931) gives occidentalis in the Murchison area, with connectens

further worth, which is exaetly the reverse of Kinghorn’s statement. Specimens

examined from the Fortesene River are of both forms, and do not support the

proposed differences between the two, although a North-west Cape example is

typical oceidentalis. This race inhabits the hot arid and desert zones of North-

west Australia, and its paler, more yellowish coloration is probably an expression

of this difference in climate, where the mean annual temperature (70-80 deg, 1.)

is far higher than that experienced by other races.

Although recognized by Jenkins, connectens is not now regarded as valid by

Mathews (1931) or Peters (1987),

Range: North-west Australia from the Fortescue River in the north, south to

the Murchison district, Geraldton and eastwards to Lake Way-

BARNARDIUS ZONARIUS MYRTAE 8S. A. White 1915,

Name: Central Australian Yellow-banded Parrot.

This form, which is regarded as a synonym of zonarins by Mathews (1931),

should nevertheless be recognized as a distinet race, Ino the specimens examined

the green of the back is of a lighter (yellower) shade than in typical zoniriues.

Examples in fresh phamage from the MacDonnell Ranges differ shghtly m colour,

being of a more bluish shade above.

Range; Northern South Australia (interior), from about Oodnadatia north-

wards to the MaeDonnell Ranges and beyond to Tennant Creek, Northern

Territory.

128 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BARNARNIUS ZONARIUE ZONARIUS (Shaw 1805),

Names; Port Lineoln Parrot, Bauer’s Parrot, Yellow-banded Parrot, and

Banded Parrot.

Synonyms: Psitlucus viridis (Shaw) 1812; Ps. cyanomelas (Kuhl) 1820; Ps.

melanocephalus (Kuhl) 1820; Ps, baweri (Temminek) 1821.

Normal examples do not exhibit a red frontal band, which is characteristic of

the South Western Australian wet-country form, Some individuals, however,

necasionally show traces of red on the forehead. This race is an inhabitant of the

warm arid zone of the interior of southern Australia, where there are no influential

summer rains and where P/E > 0:5 exists only for from one to four winter

months,

The form dundasi (q.v. supra) probably refers to this race, and the example

figured by Mathews (1917) may be an abnormally pale individual, <A skin of a

male in the collection of Dr, D, L. Serventy (No, 742), taken at Salmon Gums, 25

niles sonth of Lake Dundas, is of the typical form. It resembles examples of B.z.

zonarius from Eyre’s Peninsnla, South Australia. Examples of this race have

also been taken as far west as Bunbury, South-western Australia, With the ex-

veption of semitorquatus, the members of this race exhibit traces of the red frontal

band more frequently than any other,

Range: Interior of Western Australia, eastwards to Eyre Peninsula and the

western slopes of the Flinders Ranges, South Australia.

THE RACES OF Barnardius zonarius.

(Based on pluinage differences—eolours according to Ridgway.)

Forehead, Back, Oheeks, Upper breast. Abdomen,

semilorquatus searlet-red grassgreen dark soft erase green variable (grass green,

blue-violet ¢alliste green, lemon

yellow abdominal

band present or ab-

sent)

sonarhis usuallya few meadow green dark soft meadow green lemon chrome

scarlet-red blue-violet abdominal band

feathers

oomidentalis vedabsent — biee greon elear endet light oriental pale lemon yellow

blue green hand on abdomen

myrtae redabsent Ackermann durk soft Ackermann — strontian yellow

green bhie-vielot green abdominal band

BaArNARDIUS BARNARDI (Vigors and Horsfield 1827).

Names; Rineneek Parrot, Mallee Parrot, Barnard’s Parrakeet, Bulla-Bulla,

Buln Buln, and Cloncurry Parrot,

Range: South-east portion of the Lake Eyre Basin, Flinders Ranges, Yorke

Peninsula, Murray Mallee areas, South Australia; north-west Victoria, interior of

New South Wales, east to Moree; interior of Queensland, east to Barcaldine and

north to Windorah ; Cloncurry district, north Queensland.

Races; Barnardius barnardi macgillivrayt (North) 1900; Bb, whited (Math-

ews) 1912; B.b. augustus (Mathews) 1912; B.b. barnardi (Vigors and Hors-

field) 1827,

BARNARDIUS BARNARDL MAUGILLIVRAYL (North 1900).

Name: Cloneurry Parvot,

Universally known as the Cloncurry Parrot, this exquisite race is quite dis-

tinct from the remaining forms of barnandi,

North named it as a full species, while both the R.A.O.U. Cheek-list Com-

mittee (1926) and Kinghorn (1929) have treated it likewise, Its association

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 129

with the barnardi Formeukreis, however, is indicated by the possession of blue-

green cheek patches,

The race white’ somewhat resembles it, being only a shade duller on the

back, although it is distinguished from macgillivray? by ils ved forehead and dark

head.

Runge: About 20 deg. South latitude, North Queensland, in the Cloncurry-

Camooweal districts.

BARNARDIUS BARNARDI WHrret (Mathews 1912).

Name: South Australian Mallee Parrot.

Characters; Differs from P.b, barnardi in having the head, from the red

forehead band to the yellow collar, wiform dark brown,’? (Mathews, 1912,

Examination of specimens from the northern Flinders Ranges suggests that in

addition, this race may be distinguished by the back, which is only shehtly darker

than the rump; this feature also links it with the preceeding form.

An example from Yaneo Glen, near Broken ITill, New South Wales, is inter-

mediate between white and barnardi, A further race may be recognized later for

the arid interior of New South Wales and Queensland,

Range: Northern Flinders Ranges from above Port Augusta to beyoud Leigh

Creek and the lower Lake Eyve Basin.

BARNARDIUS BARNARDL AUGUSTUS (Mathews 1912),

Synonyms; lindar Ss. A. White (whitei Mathews 1917, pl, ccevii, nee Mathews,

1912, p, 273),

Name: South Aistralian Mallee Parrot.

Characters: ‘' Ditters from Pb, whited in having a green, not blue. back."

There is some confusion ag to the covreet Hanie for the race of the Mallee Ringneck

which overs in the Fliuders Rauges, for both augustus and lindoi are generally

quoted as synonyms of while, and Mathews’ original figure and deseription are

vontradictory. Although Mathews did not mention the colour of the back in his

original description of white’, the bird figured had a ‘myrtle green’? back, and

the colour of the head and cheeks is that of a southern dark-headed bird, rather

than typical whitet as represented by a topotypieal series. It is suygested, there-

fore, that this Mlustration shonld be referred to augustus, and also that in the

original deseription an error erept in and for ‘‘whilei’! we should read ‘*bar-

narvde’’, as thisis the only form which has a ‘blue?’ baels,

The writer is of the opinion that there are two distinet forms in the Flinders

Range area, white! in the north, and augustus further south. Sonthern examples

from mallee areas west of the River Murray have dark heads, but the baek is blue

as in Bh, barnardi, Vhey ave thus intermediate between vugustus and barnardt.

Range: Brom about Port, Augusta southwards to Yorke Peninsula, and the

mallee areas west of the River Murray as tar south as Lake Alexandrina.

GARNARDIUS BARNARD! BARNARD (Vigors and Horsfield 1827),

Synonyms: B, typious Bonaparte; erammelinae Mathews,

Names: Ringneck Parrot, Mallee Parrot, Barnard's Parrakeet, Bulla-Bulla,

Buln Buln,

This form is immediately distinguished by the deep indigo-blue back, and

also the enerald-green crown of the head, The abdominal band varies in extent,

and may be yellow or orange and large, or almost absent in diflerent individuals.

B, crommelinae of Mathews is now venerally regarded as an extreme variant

which was produced in vaptivity,

Range; Murray Mallee areas of Sonth Australia, Victoria, and New South

Wales as far north as Windorah and Barcaldine in Queensland, east to the Moree

district in New South Wales.

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

THE RACES OF Barnardius barnardt.

(Based on plumage differences—colours according to Ridgway.)

Forehead

band. Top of head. Nape. Back. Rump.

macgillivrayt absent mineral green civette green mineral green emerald green

whitet scarlet dark olive dark olive dark green cobalt green

augustus carmine meadow green dark greenish olive myrtle green mineral green

barnardi spectrum red emerald green green-blue slate dark green-blue emerald green

slate

Genus NortHIeLLA Mathews 1912.

Diagnosis: As emphasized by its author (1912, p. 276) this genus may be at

onee recognized by the first five primaries which are all attenuated into spatulate

tips. Considered alone, however, this structural feature might not be of generie¢

importance, but when taken together with other characters such as the presence

of blue cheek patches and other colour differences, Northiella is at once seen to

be distinct from Psephotus, with which it has been usually placed.

It is here suggested that Northiella has closer affinities with the Barnardius

group. Osteologically it is similar to all other Platycercines except Platycercus.

The upper mandible is slightly more massive than that of Psephotus, and most

of the races are larger than those of that genus.

Discussion: Northiella is to-day represented by a single species, the Blue

Bonnet (N. haematogaster), which oceurs widely in the dry interior of the Con-

tinent. Several races are readily recognized and are apparently confined to dis-

tinct moisture zones, as shown in the table (fig. 2).

Originally associated with Platycercus, and later with Psephotus, there is

little doubt that Northiella is distinet from both genera.

Juvenile Plumage: Immature birds are very similar to the adult, but the

colours of the plumage are less brilliant, and as in Platycercus the blue cheek

patches are less extensive than in the adult. As noted by Lendon (1940) the wing

stripe is fairly constant in young birds of both sexes, although it may be less

marked in males.

Sexual differences: There is no marked difference in the plumage of the two

sexes, although the female is slightly duller. Tavistock (1929) states that females

may be distinguished by the flatter skull; a wing stripe is also characteristic of

adult females.

NoRTHIELLA HAEMATOGASTER (Gould 1838).

Names: Blue Bonnet, Crimson-bellied Parrot, Yellow-vented Parrakeet,

Bulloak Parrot, Red-vented Parrot, also Naretha Parrot.

Range: Arid interior of southern Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria

(mallee), South Australia, lower Northern Territory, and interior of Western

Australia, and Nullarbor Plain.

Races: Northiella haematogaster narethae (H. L. White) 1921; N.h. pal-

lescens (Salvadori) 1891; N.h. haematogaster (Gould) 1838; N.h. alter (Mathews)

1912; N.h. haematorrhous (Gould) 1865.

NoRTHIELLA HABMATOGASTER NARETHAE (H. L. White 1921).

Names: Little Blue Bonnet, Naretha Parrot.

Originally described as a separate species, this, the smallest form, has been

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 131

recently accorded subspecific rank hy the R.A.O.17. Cheek-list Committee (1941, p.

88), as Psephotus haematogaster narethae.

Range; Nullarbor Plain, Western Australia.

NORTHIELLA HABMATOGASTER. PALLESCENS (Salvadori 1891).

Name: Pallid Yellow-vented Parrot.

The type wpon which this well-marked desert race is based, came from Cooper

Creek, South Australia. It may be distinguished by the very pale npper surface

and pale breast, and also by the olive patch on the median wing coverts, which is

yellower than in the other forms, This is another distinetive bird peeuliar to the

Lake Hyre Basin, and has apparently evolved wider the influence of the extremely

dry conditions of the area. The mean annual value of the Meyer Ratio (Preeipita-

tion to Saturation Deficit) is probably the lowest in Australia (0-15 aceordnig to

Preseott, 1984), and aceording to Davidson's nomenclature (1936) the area in

which the Blue Bonnet ocenrs may he termed the warmer temperate desert zone of

the southern half of the Basin.

The other races of NV. haematogaster oecur in progressively ‘‘wetter’’ zones,

and a snecession of changes in plumage colour may be noted, Those living in the

more humid parts exhibit more ved m the plumage markings, while the ‘‘drier’’

forms are paler or with more yellow,

Range: Lake Eyre Basin, South Australia.

NORTHIELLA TAEMATOGASTER HAEMATOGASTER (Gould 1838),

Synanym: vanthorrhaa Bonaparte.

Name: Yellow-vented Parrot,

This geographical race has an extensive range in the desert, arid and drier

sub-arid zones of the interior of the Continent, In the eastern portion of New

South Wales it merges with the red-vented form, haematorrhous, and inter-

mediates between the two are known. In the south it meets the pale yellow-vented

race, alter, which is confined to the Murray mallee areas of Victoria and South

Australia. This form separates pallescens and narethae, pallescens and alter, and

pallescens and haematorrhous.

Range; Avid interior of South Australia (northern mallee and saltbush and

bluebush country), far-western New South Wales, southern Queensland (Interior),

NorRTHIELLA HARMATOGASTER ALTER (Mathews 1912),

Name: Green-vented Parrot,

Characters: ‘Differs from P.h. 2anthorrhous in its ruch larger size, and in

having the under tail coverts greenish yellow.’’ (Mathews, 1912, p. 275.) The

author gives the (ype locality as ‘‘Muttoa, Victoria’, but this is an error for

Murtoa,

In the original deseription the author states that the under tail coverts were

greenish-yellow, but later altered this to green (1931, p. 204), Txamination of a

series from the Victorian and South Australian Mallee shows that the \wnder tail

coverts are very pale lemon-yellow, and there is no greenish colour, The adult

Blue Bonnet seems (0 vary considerably in size, some individuals being much

larger than others.

Mathews’ statement that the race under consideration is much larger in size

than the previous race is not borne out by specimens examined.

Fiange: Mallee areas of Victoria and South Australia.

132 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

NogTUTELLA TAEMATOGASTER HARMATORRIOUS (Gould 1865).

Names: Red-vented Parrot, Red-vented Blue Bonnet,

Besides the erimsou-red inder tail coverts fully adit males of this subspecies

usually lave the inner median aud greater wing coverts blood-red in colour (often

incorreetly referred to as ‘!chocolate-coloured’*), Mathews (1981) has given the

range as ‘South New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia’’, but this muy

be modified in the light of present knowledge,

Range: Seni-arid interior of Northern New South Wales and Sonthern

Queensland,

Genus PLatycercur Vigors 1825.

Diagnosis: The Rosellas (genus Platycereus) are at onee distineuishedl in (he

adult by the sealloped appearance of the back, and have well-defined cheek-patelies

as in Barnardius, and Northiella, Anatomically they resemble other Broadtails,

having no furculum or ambiens muscle. The chief differences ave to be noted in

the cranial osteology. The upper mandible is relatively weaker than in Barnar-

(ius, but a much more important difference oeeurs ut the auditory region, Ex-

umination of erania of Plaetycereus ealedonicus, Pye. elegans, Pe. adelaidae, P.

eximits, P.adseitus, P. venustus, and P_ictcrotis reveals that in the adult the zygo-

miutie process of the squamosal is connected with the supra-meatal process by a

well developed ring or bridge of bone, This faet was first stated by D’Arey Thomp-

gon (1899) for P. elegans, but as he did not mention the differences in the eranial

characters of Barnardius this distinctive feature has never been accorded the im-

portance it undoubtedly deserves. In undamaged erania this streneture ts clearly

seen, and forming an elevated ‘auditory ring’’, slightly above and im trout of the:

Aetna tyupanie oriflee,

A single imperfect eranium of Cyanorhamphus novae-zclandiae has heen ex-

amined, Ilere there is a similar ring in the auditory region, but it is much heayier

voc more extensive. aud the tympanic aperture appears to be completely enclosed

bv this aecessory stroectire, This apparently represents the extreme development

of the avrangement found in the anditory region of Platycercus.

In Barnardius the articulation of the quadrate with the skull is unobseured,

but in Plalyceres. it is concealed by the ‘auditory ring’? (see fig. 3).

The stractuval ditference, together with the more advanced colour patteri

indicates that the members of Plafyeercus constitute a more highly evolvecl section

of the Platyeereines, aud shonld be recoguized as a separate genus, Genotype:

P. pennantii Latham = P. clegans Ginelin,

Discussion: The name ‘Rosella’’, originally applied to one species only,

namely Plotyeercus éciovcus, the Rosehill Parrakeet’’, was adopted with advan-

tuge by the R.A.O.U, Cheel-list Committee (1926) forall forms of Platycercus,

Unlike Barnardius, the genus Platycereus is confined to the more humid areas

of Australia, in whieh inflnential rains fall in summer as well as winter. Dry

conntry forms occur inthe Murray Valley (semi-arid), and in the Mlinders Ranges

(avid moisture zone). In South-western Australia oecurs a diminutive species

(ielerolis) with distinctive races in the semi-humid and semi-arid areas, Here the

elimatie and other factors appear to have affected plumage colour and size. Dis-

tinctive species of Platyeercus occur in the semi-arid zones of tropical Northern

Australia, and in one instanee (P. adscitus) it is of interest ty note that where this

enters au area of winter us well as summer rains, a distinctive geographical race

neers.

The evolution of the plumage colour in Platycercus presents an interesting

problem. The aneestral type of this genus was probably a red bird which was

derived from a green form, of somewhat similar appearance to the immature stage

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 133

of present-day species. The ereen colour is produced by a combinatinn af melaniv

and yellow lipochrome pigments deposited in the feathers. Slight alterations of

either pigment will vesalt ina change of plomave colour, such as is demonstrated

in albinos, where the deposition of melanin is inhibited. Species naw living in

wetter districts are mainly blackish- or reddish-hued, while those oacurring in arid

zones are characterized by an aceuniation of yellow or reddish-brown (phaeo-

melanin) pigmentation. This fundamental mule, which was recognized by Gloger

wore than one hundred years ago, seems to apply to many Australian birds and

manunals, and environmental stimuli such as temperatiive ar huniidity or a eam.

hination of both are probably responsible for such colour changes ov differences,

Ih ts coneeivable, therefore, that those species otf Plalycereus whieh now exhibit

much yellow pigmentation may have evolved under arid conditions, examples

being P. clegans fliveolus, P. caledonicus, P. venustus, and P. adscitus, Ow

limited knowledge of former clitnatic conditions during the Pleistocene tovether

with present-day distribution supports such an idea. Later environmental

changes probably increased the roelanin pienientation, aud this has resulted in the

secondary blackish sulfugion of the apper surfaces of venustus, and the blue eolora-

tion of adscitus, The young of these two forms are similar, except for the colour

of the head, and it is apparent that they are closely allied. The voung of vewuslaes

are yellowey on the tail than those of adsctfus, however, and it is probable that the

first-Named was once much yellower than it is to-day, 11 is also probable that

venustus has always been limited to the northern areas it new inhabits, and bas

heen subjected to sheeessive eliinalie changes.

From the red under-tail eoverts tt can be deduced that venustis, adscilus, and

culedonicus haye retained this feature front a ‘red? ancestor, which may also have

been the vommon ancestor of both elegans and ieteralis. Sinvilar conelisions could

be deduced in other Platveerine genera.

The blue of the cheek feathers is apparently the dominant feature in Platy-

cercus, although it is now inthe process of being logt in twaspecies, namely adseitus

and nenustus. Eyen in ieterotis (yellow cheeks) and eximius (white cheeks) the

young shill exbrbit some blue feathers on the cheeks, which are only lost at maturity,

Many forms originally deseribed as sepatate species can now only be regarded

ag geographical races, und aflor examination of miueb material only the following

ure recoguized as valid species of the genna.

Platycercus caledomeus (Gmelin) ;P. elegans (Gmelin) » P. eximings (Shaw) ;

P. venustus (Kuhl) ; P. adsettus (latham) ; P, ieterolis (Kathl).

The torm Platycereus flaveolus Gould, which up till now has enjoyed full

specific rank almost without question, is to my mind only a colour phase of e/egans,

Peters’s association of it with caledonicus indicates that he had sone misgivings as

to it warranting specific rank, but if is anticipated that few Australian ornitho-

logists would concur with his arrangement, Other ornithologists have advocated

that adelaidee be accorded specific rank: a general opinion is that it is only a race

of elegans.

Two alternatives seem to be open with regard to these forms, namely té regard

all (hee as distinet, ov alternatively to regard them all as races of elegans, The

latter arrangement is here chosen beeause, apart from minor differences in the

plumage colour of the adylt, there do not seem to be any important differences in

the young of the first juyeval plumage or in the habits of the three forms.

Juvenile Plumage; Immature birds have plain green baeks, and the scallop-

ings characteristic of the adult are not assumed until the birds are several months

old, Following this intermediate stage most species assume the fully adult plam-

age when just over iwelye months old. Young males are usually distinguished ly

their slightly brighter coloration almost from birth, ancl the bill, which is at first

yellowish-white, soon darkens in colour. A white wing stripe ocenrs in both sexes.

134 ReEcokpDS UF THE §.A. MUSEUM

In those forms which have while or yellow cheek patches (e.g. extmius and ictero-

tis), there are apparently always sowe bhie cheek feathers im the young: stages,

Sexual Differences: Females are smaller and less richly colored than males,

with smaller heads anc beaks. In Platycercus elegans flaveolus the adult female

apparently bas some red on Lhe breast, while the male is usually pure yellow be-

neath, Remales exhibit a white wing stripe, formed by white spots on the in-

dividual primaries,

Puatycercus GCALEDONLOUS (Gmelin 1788),

Names: Green Rosella, Yollow-hellied Parrakeet, Tasmanian Moutain Par-

rot, anid Green Parrot.

Range: Tasmania, also Kang, Flinders, and other Islands, in Bass Strait.

Races: Platycerous caledanious caledonious (Chnelin) 1788; P.c, henriettae

Mathews 1919; Puce. fendersi Mathews 1917. (Two last-named doubtful.)

PLAPVERRCUS CALEDONIOUS CALEDONTCUS (Gmelin 1788),

Synonyms: Psittacus brownii Kuhl 1820; Ps. flawigaster Temminek 1821; Ps,

flaviventris Temminck 1821; :reanthoyaster Stephens 1826,

Mathews (1918) has suggested that the nearest living representative to the

prototype of the Platycereus group is P. caledonicus. From its restricted range

in Tasmania tl seems very probable that this form is indeed an ancient one, al-

though possibly derived from a ‘red’? uneestor. Its occurrence on the islands of

Bass Straits shows that the avifanns of these areas has greater affinities with Tas-

mama than with the Australian mainland, As noted hy North, Canipbell, Mathews

and others this species takes several years to assume the folly adult plumage, and

in this respeet is siailar to elegans,

It is possible that the two described races were based on immature individuals,

and until large series are examined their status must remain open to doubt.

OF Pic, henriettue Mathews (1915) says; ‘Differs from P.a. caledonicus in

haying mote red on the head, aud in baving the under tail coverts red, Type, King

Island."' ‘Two specimens loaned by the National Museum, Melbourne (Nos, B420,

B21) differ not at all from immature birds from Tasmania, being smaller and

duller than adulls trom thatarea. Mathews (1912) said: ‘* 2... the birds from

Flinders Island (and probably the Kent group too) are the darkest of all, at the

same time they are sinmaller than those from the mainland”? (i.e, of Tasmania). T

have not seen any specimens of this donbiful race (flindersi), but would suggest

(hat the characters given are those of immature birds.

PLATYCRERCUS ELEGANS (Gmelin 1788).

Names: Crimson Rosella, Crimson Parrot, Pennant's Parrakeet, Red Tory,

Mountain Lowry, also Adelaide Rosella, Hindmarsh Parrot, Campbell Parrakeet,

Yellow Rosella, Yellow-runped Parrakect, Swamp Lory and Blam Blam,

Range: North Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, South-east of South

Australia, Kangaroo Island, Norfolk Island (introdueed).

Races: Plutycercus elegans nigrescens Ramsay 1888; P.c. elegans (Gmelin)

1788; P.e. melanoptera North 1906; P.e. flewriewensis Ashby 1917; P.e, adclaidae

Gonld 1841 ; P.e. subadelaidae Mathews 1912; P.e. flaveolus Gould 1827.

PLATYCERCUS ELEGANS NIGRESCENS Ramsay 1888.

Names: Campbell Parrakeet, Northern Crimson Parrot,

Characters:"* . . . . smaller size, thicker and more robust bill, and the deeper

tint of crimson in its plumage; in some a few violet feathers appear on the chest ;

CONDON —AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 135

those on the head, hind neck, and back are almost black, which eolour extends also

on to the cheeks in one speeimen,’? (Ramsay, 1888. )

This small, dark race is instantly recognizable, and supports Gloger’s Rule

that birds inhabiting warn humid regions have more melanin pigmentation than

races of the sane species in cooler drier regions. A geographical race inay oceupy

anarea ranving from a few hundred to many thousands of square miles, Tn this

case, nigrescens is confined to a relatively small humid area on the eastern eoast of

North Qneensland. The type was taken on Mount Bellenden Ker, and specimetis

have been examined which were taken at Allumbah (equals Aloomba), near Cairns.

PLATYCERCOS ELEGANS ELEGANS (Gmelin 1788).

Names: Crimson Rosella, Crimson Parrot, Pennant’s Parrakeet, Red Lory,

Mountain Lowry,

Synonyms: pennanti (athant) 1790; gloriosus (Shaw) 1791; splendidus

(Shaw) 1792; viridis (Kerr) 1792; phallippt (Kerr) 1792; nebbst Tristram 1885.

This large, brightly-coloured race inhabits the humid coastal zones of southern

Queensland, New Sonth Wales, and probably north-eastern Vietoria. — Inter-

mediates Oocur where the range of this subspecies ineets that of nigrescens.

PLATYCRARCUS ELEGANS viotonian Mathews 1912.

Characters; ‘Differs from P.e. elegans in the deeper, dullex red, especially

noticeable on the rimup and aunder-sturfaee, and in the more extensive hlaek marlk-

ings on the baek,’’ (Mathews 1912,)

Some examples of this race approach closely the dark coloration of the Kan-

garoo [sland form, melanoptera. The type was taken at Woori Yallock, a place

37 miles north-east of Melbourne, and near Lilydale.

An example from Healesville, in the National Musewn collection at Melbourne

(No. B331) would appear to be of this race, On the other hand an example taken

at Monegeetta, 87 miles north-west of Melhourne, in the direction of Bendigo (S.A.

Museum No, B20170) is of the coloration of the typieal form. Both specimens

were taken in the month of July,

Lf vietoriae is indeed valid, then its range would appear to be the semi-humid

zone of southern Vietoria and the south-east of South Australia, as far west as

Robe, or perhaps Kingston.

PLATYCERCTIS ELEGANS MELANOVTERA North 1906.

Name: Kangaroo Island Crimson Parrot.

North (1906, p. 78) sepavated this race on the faet that it differed from P.e,

éleqdus not only ‘by the greater amount of black on the feathers of the baek, buat

principally by the inner half of the upper wing-coverts (except the margins of

some of the median and greater series) being black . . . .°’ The stronghold of

the Crimson Rosella on Kangaroo Island is apparently ihe western half to Cape

Borda, it heing nnmerous on Flinders Chase and inthe Vivonne Bay, Middle River

and Western River districts,

POUATYCERCUS ELEGANS PLEURIBUENSIa Ashby 1917.

Name: Hindmarsh Parrot.

Characters :‘' This race (Ashby 1917) is distinguished from all other forms of

P. elegans (with the exception of P, adelaidde) by the scarlet colour replacing Lhe

erimson, and from the latter im the wenerally inore brilliant scarlet plumage, and

136 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in the case of old specimens the green feathers on rump and back are entirely re-

placed by searlet,”’ It might also be pointed out that the nape is not yellowish-

green as in typical adclaidae, but searlet-red. The type, a male (No, B2823) is in

the South Australian Museum,

This form is the end menber of a well-defined geoeline series which comprises

fleuricuensis, adeloidae and subadclaidae, the character gradient being a progres-

sion of colour ehanges from scarlet in the birds of the south to yellow in those of

the novthern Flinders Ranges. The close proximity of Kangarovu Island to Plewrien

Peninsula, whore flewieuensis ocents, has long led certain workers to postulate

that the deeper coloration of the southern taainland bird is due to an infusion of

blood’? front the Kangaroo Island race. Although Kaugaroo Island is only eight-

nine miles distant from the mainland, there is no evidence to show that melanoptera

at any time erosses thia expanse of water, Parrots are weak fliers, and it seems

preferable to vevard the move intense pigmentation of flewriewensis to be an in-

dependent expression of the wetter climatic conditions or other faetors present on

Flemmieu Peninsula.

Range: Fleurien Peninswa, from Cape Jervis to about Mount Compass.

PLATYCERCUS ELEGANS ADELATDAR Gould 1841,

Nome. Adelaide Rosella.

This form was described as a full species by Gould, and for anany years its

status has formed the basis of mueh discussion. Earlier workers, such as North,

Morgan, auc Ashby, did not recognize that the northern yellow race, subudelardue,

was intimately connected with adelaidac, and regarded it as flaveolus,

Ashby’s writings, however, show that he suspeeted the northern yellow race

had affinities with the southern birds, although he retrained from expressing any

iterpretation contrary to accepted notions held at the time. He said: *' . .. -

commencing with the northernmost jlaveolus and ending with the southernmost

adelaidae . . . . the result. will show, I believe, a complete gradation from the

highly coloured flewieuensis i the south to the extreme pale yellow form in the

north or drier distriets.”’? Ashby also suggested that adelwidae might be regarded

asa red form of flaveolus, and fleuriewensts an extremely red form of the Yellow

Rosella. In other words he discounted entirely the idea that the Adelaide Rosella

(adelaidae) was a race of elegans, There is little doubt, however, that adelaidae

is a diveet derivative of elegans, or vice versa, while flaveolus, too, can only be re-

carded asa development of adelaidae.

Considerable variation exists among individuals of adelaidae, bat in general

an average type may be recognized. Changes duc to age are incompletely nnder-

stood ; older birds and males tend to beeome redder. Tn the field these birds often

appear much deeper in colour than is actually the case, and examination in the

hand proves them to be much paler than either feuriewensis or elegans, Generally

gpeaking an adult male may be said to be ‘*searlet'’? (Ridgway) below aid on the

crown of ihe head, while the interseapular feathers are edged with ‘‘tea green”’

often with a tines of scarlet. The nape is tea green, and merges into the searlet

of the erown.

Range: Mount Lotty Ranges, from about Mount Compass in the south to

Burra, avd beyond in the north of South Australia,

PrRATYOURCUS BLEGANK SUBADELATDAE Mathews 1912,

Name: Northern Adelaide Rosella,

Tf flaveolus be regarded as a full species, suhadelaidae cannot he regarded as

a race of it, although Mathews (19381) and Peters (1937) treat it as such.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 137

Early workers, too, regarded this form as flaveolus, but there is now good

reason to believe that the yellow coloration is simply an expression of Gloger’s

Ride, which states that races inhabiting arid regions are characterized hy an

aecumilation of yellow or reddish-brown pigmentation, Mathews originally

considered it to be a torm of elegans, Wut later placed it under flaveolus (1931,

py. 198).

In the original description he said: ‘Differs from P.e, adelaidae in being less

brilliant below and in having less rel on the crown,” To this moght be added the

fact that the black feathers of the InLerseapular region are edged pale yellow, as in

flaveolus, withont any searlet edging as in typical. adelaidae; the birds are much

redder below than flawcolus.

This race forms a trie connecting link between adelaidae and flaveolus, but as

montioned above has slightly greater affinities with the former than the latter, The

intimate connection between its distribution and coloration supports Gloger’s

Rule. The type was taken at Port Angusta, and the race apparently extends as

far south as Wilmington aud Laura, also being found iu the Flinders Ranges

noMh to Leigh Creek and beyond,

Range: Flinders Ranges, South Australia, approximately between 15 inch

and § inch isohyets.

PLATYCERCUS ELEGANS FLAVEOLUS Gould 1887,

Names: Yellow Rogella, Yellowerumped Parrakeet, Swamp Lory, Murray

Smoker, Blam Blam,

Synonym: innominatus Mathews,

The association of this species with P. caledonieus by Peters is wholly un-

warranted, and the author may have heen misled by North’s statement ( 1911,

p. 119) that‘! . . 2. in general appearance, when viewed on the under parts,

the Yellow-rumped Parrakeet (i.e, flaveolus) closely resembles Platycercis flavi-

ventris (equals P. caledonicus) the only ditference bemg in the depth and inten-

sity of the yellow colouring,”

Ashby, iu bis various discussions on the Adelaide Rosella (udelaidae), em-

phasized the affinities between that bird and the present form, and indeed it, may

be proved later that the acdelaidarflaveolus group is distinct from the elegans

group, in which cage three speeies would have to be recognized, naniely elegans,

adelmdac, and flaveolus.

The R.A.O.U, Check-list (1926), Mathews (1981), and Peters (1937) all

regard subadelaidae as a race of flaveolus, This conception probably arose {rom

the fact that many true flaveolus in the adult (7 females) exhibit a reddish pig-

mentation on the upper breast, and in fhis they approach subadelaidae. Flava-

alus, however, ig a much smaller bird than auy of the other forms of elegans,

except nigrescens. The young of adelaidac, suhadeluidac, and fluveolus ave in-

distinguishable from each other in the first Juvenal plumage, while young of

elegans, melanopterd, etc.. can he distinguished often because they exhibit to a

greater or lesser degree the crimson coloration of the adult on the erowh, rump,

and upper breast,

Mathews (1912) has described one race of flaveolus, uamely innaminatus,

from South Australia. The quoted characters sre: “Differs from P,f. flaveolus

im its paler coloration, especially noticeable on tle head and rump, altogether

lacking the green tinge characteristic of the typteal form.’* Brom the limited

material available L am unable to recognize this form,

Hange: Confined to the areas immediately adjacent to the Rivers Darling,

Marrombidgee, and Lachlan (New South Wales), River Murray, Victoria, and

Heir tribntaries, and normally as far south as Manni, South Australia.

138 Recorps oF THE $A, MuskUM

Piaryeercus Eximius (Shaw 1792).

Names: Eastern Rosella, Rosella, Rosehill Parrakeet, Red-baeked Rosella,

Nonpareil Parrot, Yellow-mautled Parrot, and Golden-mantled Rosella.

Range: Southern Queensland, through New South Wales to Victoria and

the south-east of Sonth Australia; Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia; Tas-

mania.

Races: cecilae Mathews 1911; eximius (Shaw) 1792; diemenenisis North 1911,

PLATYCERCUS BXIMIUS CRCILAK Mathews 1971.

Names; Splendid Parvakeet, Golden-mantled Parrakeet, Yellow-mantled

Parrot.

Synonym: splendidus Gould 1844,

This well-marked race with its ‘golden mantle’ and blue-yvreen riop is

readily recognizable, being originally described as a separate species. Although

apparently originally confined to the Darling Downs it is rapidly extending its

range,

Range: North of the Darling Downs, South Queensland, southwards along

(he coastal regions of northeru New South Wales to Scone, Merriwa, aud beyond.

PLATYCERCUS EXIMIUS EXIMIUS (Shaw 1792).

Synonyms: colei Mathews, (1) erythropeplus Salvadori.

Names: Eastern Rosella, Rosella, Rosehill Parrakeet.

Mathews (1917, p. 860) proposed separating the Victorian members of éit-

imius as colet, but there appears to be little or no difference in examples from

gouthern New South Wales, Victoria, south-east of South Australia and the Mount

Lofty Ranges.

The status of the species in South Australia is somewhat obscure, and at pre-

gent it is diffierlt to decide whether or not birds in the Mount Lofty Ranges are

cescendaiits of escaped cage-birds introduced from the eastern States. Examples

collected at Happy Valley and Cherry Gardens appear to he typical eximins, anc

it is possible that they were accidentally liberated at an eatly date in the history

of the colony, In any case they do not occur in large numbers, which may tend to

support this supposition,

P, erythropepuls, generally regarderl as a hybrid, may eventually be proved

an indigenous race of ecimius in the Monat Lofty Ranges ; certain individuals re-

sembling Salvadori’s original coloured plate have beeu noted, allhough none have

yet been taken which can be definitely veferred to it.

Robe or Kingston in the south-exst of the State appears to be the natural

western limit of eximius, and it does uot normally ocenr in the $0 miles of mallee

country separating this area from the Mount Lofly region,

A. G, Campbell (1906, p. 145) recorded eximius from Kangaroo Island, but

no specimeus have been takeu, aud if is suggested that this record may be incorrect.

Characters of P.c, eolet according to Mathews are: ‘* . , . . the yellow of the

back is missing, the greenish tins being smaller, the rim being of a greenish shade,

while the undernen(h coloration of the abdenien is greener,”? (Ballarat, Vietoria. )

Ranges Southern New South Wales, Victoria, south-cast of South Australia,

(2) Mount Lofty Ranges.

PLATYCERCUS EXLMIDS DIEMENENSIS North 1911,

Name: Tasmanian Rosella,

This ig a-well-marked race characterized by North us having a ' sonspienously

larger white cheek pateh ... . also richer and darker searlet head and breast, the

lattor of which extends lower down the body than if docs in birds from the main-

land.”

Range: Tasmania,

CONDON—-AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 139

PLATYcERCUS VENUSTUS (Kuhl 1820).

Names: Northern Rosella, Brown's Parrot, Smutty Rosella, Smutty Parrot.

Range) North-west Australia, Northern Territory, Bathurst aud Melville

Islands,

Races: Platycerenus vw, venuslus (Kuhl) 1820; Platyeercus uv, melvillensis

Mathews 1912, status doubtful ; Platyecerens vo, hilli Mathews 1910, stains doubtful,

PLATYCERCUS VENUSTTS venustus (Kuhl 1820),

Synonwn: brownit (Temminelk).

Examination of specimens from the Northern Territory and Bathurst Island

suvgest that the races proposed by Mathews (iv, supra) may not be valid,

Of meluillensis Mathews sitys in his original deseription ; Differs from Pya,

venustus in its much blacker back, the feathers of the mantle being black with a

very faint edge of greenish-yellow. Type, Melville Island, Northery Territory,

No. 10,597. Range, Melville Island,’’ Specimens from this locality have not been

available, buta large series from Bathiwest Island, a part of the same insular mass,

agrees with his description, as do also two from the adjoining maitlancd,

Of hill the same author says; Dilfers from P. venustus Kuhl, in having the

white feathers of the face reduced to a narrow line, the hlue spreading nearly all

the way wp to the black below the eyes. The bliae on the primary coyerts is also

very much more intense."’ The type came from Napier Broome Bay, North-west

Alistralia,

Observation of aviary birds as well as examination of a large series of skins

reveals that this is an extremely variable form, and Northern Territory hirds

auswer to both cdeseriptions given above.

It is suggested, therefore, Uhat only one form is vecosnizable al present; the

extent of the blue cheek-patelies is not a reliable character. The insular race de-

seribed by Mathews, if not proved valid at some future date, should be regarded

as a synonym of the typical form, and not of hillias suggested by Mathews (1981).

This species is closely allied to the following, viz. P. widseit U8,

PLarycurcus Anscrrus (Latham 1790).

Names: Pale-headed Rosella, Moreton Bay Rosella, Blue-cheeked Parrot,

Grey-rnmped Parrot,

Range: Kastern Queensland and northern New South Wales,

Raves: Platyeercus adscitus udsetlus (Latham) 1790; Platycereus adscilus

palliceps Lear 1832,

The statis of the several deseribed forms of this very variable species has been

the subject of some confusion. North (1912, p. 124) attempted to deseribe a

1Ypieal individual, but noted that ‘it is possible for one to oblain a dozen or more

vatiations of it.”

Mathews (1917, p, 3843) veco@nized four subspecies: P. udseitus adsetitus

(Latham), Cooktown to Mackay, Queensland; P.a, amuthusiae Bonaparte, Cape

York; Pia. elseyi Mathews, Gulf of Carpentaria: P.a. palliceps Viear, New South

Wules.

Tn bis 1941 List, Mathews regarded amiathustae ag a synonym of ddsetlus.

Peters (1987, p. 262) followed Mathews in recogmizimg three races, although he

noted that elseye was doubtfully distinet from P.a. adseitus. Tere it is proposed

that only two races be reco@nized,

PLATYCERCUS AbScrros ADSOITUS (Lathan 1790).

Synanyms: cyanogenys Gould; inathusiae Bonaparte ; elseyy Mathews.

Noes: Pale-headed Rosella, Blie-cheekod Parrot, Moreton Bay Rosella,

According to Mathews (1912, p. 271) elseyi ‘‘differs from P.a. amathusiae

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in its paler rump’’. Specimens examined indicate that this feature may not be

constant,

In a general way this may be referred to us the yellow-rumped race; formerly

if was often referred to as ‘‘blue-cheeked’’, but the colour of the cheek-patch is

unimportant as there are many intermediates, and blue-checked individuals may

also occur in the southern race which is often called the ‘‘ white-cheeked’’ race.

Range: Cape York Peninsula, south to beyond Cairns; also Gulf of Carpen-

taria, North Queensland.

PLATYCHRCUS ADRCTTUS PALLICEPS Lear 1432.

Synonym: caclestis Lesson,

Names: Pale-headed Parrot, White-cheeked Rosella, Greyrumped Parrot.

This is the ‘‘blne-rumped’’ or ‘‘white-cheeked’’ race which extends from

northern New South Wales northwards to Cairns where intermediates of the two

races are to be fonnd, As noted above, the amount of blue on the cheeks varies 71

extent.

Specimens from Charleville and Logan River, south Queensland, agree with

examples taken in northern New South Wales.

Range: From below Cairns, North Queensland, south to northern New South

Wales.

PLATYCERCUS WTEROTIS Kuhl 1820.

Names: Western Rosella, Yellow-cheeked Parrakeet, Stanley Parrakeet, Red-

mantled Parrot.

Range: South-west Australia.

Races: Platycercus +. icterolis Kuhl 1820, Platycercus 1. xanthoyenys Salva-

dori 1891,

Both the above races of the Western Rosella are sow reeognized by the

R.A.O.U. Cheek-list Committee (1941) (vide Emu xii, 1941, p. 88).

PLATYCERCUS ICTEROTIS LUTEROTIS 1820,

Synonyms: stanley) Vigors; salvadort Mathews.

Names: Western Rosella, Red-mantled Rosella, Stanley Parrakeet,

Range: South-west Australia (coastal),

PLATVOERCUS ICTEROTIS XANTHOGENYS Salvadori 1891,

Synonym; whitlock: Mathews.

Name: Dundas Yellow-cheeked Rosella.

Characters; Differs from ictervtis ‘fin beine larger and haying the cheeks of

a paler yellow, the feathers of the back edged with red, the rump feathers and the

upper tail eoverts edged with eveyish olive, the central tail-feathers bluc, with no

green’! (Salvadori). Ogilvie-Grant (1910) said: ‘Tt is very easily distinguished

from P. icterotis (Kuhl) by the darker greenish-erey (not sap-vreen) colour of the

back and the margins of the innermost secondaries, while the middle pair of tail

feathers are mostly dark purplish-blue, instead of green.’’

Range: South-west Australia (drier areas).

Genus Psrenorus Gould 1845,

Synonyms: Clarkana Mathews; Psephotellus Mathews.

Diagnosis: Members of this genus are medium-sized Broad-tails with uni-

formly coloured backs, rps of distinelive colowr, aud the two central tail feathers

slightly longer than the sueeceding pair. Osteologically they resemble other

Platycercines, the furculum also being absent, There are no well-marked cheek-

patches, but the wing feathers are scalloped as in Platycercus, Barnardius, Cyano-

CoNDON—AUSTRALIAN LROADTAILED PARROTS i4]

rhamphus, ete, aud the indiyidual primaries are of similar proportions. Geno-

type: Platyeercus haomatonolus Gould.

Discussion ; Damaged evania of three species of this genus have been examined,

namely haematonotus, varius, and dissimilis, and all present similar features. The

auditory region is similar to that of Burnardius and Northiella, aud from the

limited material 1 have been unable to detect any differences which might warrant

the recognition of Clarkand and Psephotellus as proposed by Mathews (1931).

Members of the geuns are confined to the desert, arid and semi-arid moisture zones

of Australia, and do not oecur on Tasmania (humid).

Juvenile plumage: Generally speaking young birds resemble the adult female,

and males usually assume the adult plamage during the first or second year, Young

of hoth sexes exhibit a white ‘wing stripe’’.

Sexual differences; Females ave always duller in colour than iales, In

Psepholus haematonatus the female lacks the red rump of the male, and. is a dull

green bird, with the rump of a brighter shade, From below the upper breast is

pale olive-green instead of bright greeu, and the abdomen is whitish instead of

yellow. Young males resemble the female, but are greener.

In P. varius the female has a dull red shoulder patch instead of orange-yellow

ag in the male, and there is no red abdominal pateh, while the birds are generally

duller, Immature males resemble the female,

In P. dissimatis the black of the head and baek of the male is entirely absent.

in the female, which is green; also the extensive yellow on the wing is absent. The

rump is blue, and the wnder tail coverts red as iu the male, The wing stripe is

present in the females of all the foregoing, Examples of both sexes of the forms

pulcherimmus and chrysopterygtus have not been examined.

PsepHorus HAbMATONOTUS (Goud 1837).

Names; Red-backed Parrot, Red-vumped Parrot, Grass Parrot.

Range: New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia as far north as the Lake

Ryre Basin South, and west of the Flinders Ranges,

Races: Psephotus haemalonolus huematonatus (Gould 1837). P.h, eaeruleus

subsp. nov.

PSEPHOTUS TAEMATONOTUS JIAEMATONOTUS (Goiltl 1837),

Synonyins virescens Mathews,

Larye series of this species reveal that this bird is extremely variable through-

out its range. older individuals apparently being mnch wore brilliant mn colour

ihan younger ones. In the immature the male and female are approximately the

same colour,

Specimens of males from semi-arid and avid areas, such as the Murray mallee

and northern Flinders Ranges appear slightly smaller and paler, especially on

the rump.

Range: New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia.

PsEPlloTUS HAEMATONOTUS CABRULEUS siibsp. nov.

Adult male; Top of head beryl green instead of emerald green as im southern

birds; back beryl green, slightly duller; rump grenadine red (instead of brazil

ved as in the typical form) ; upper tail eoverts cobalt green (instead of Scheele's

ereen) ; tail feathers with a wash of Tyrian blue (instead of a wash of bice green) ;

cheeks and upper breast beryl green; lower breast wax yellow ; abdomen and tmder

tail coverts white; spurious wing pale yellow green; wing coyerts beryl green;

wing 124 mm.; tail 147 mm.

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MuseUM

Range; Interior arid and desert areas of South Australia; type (B2237 in 8.

Anst. Museum) from Lonainineka Station (Lake Eyre Basin), collected by the

South Australian Museum Expedition, 80th September, 1916,

Remarks ; This race differs from the typical form in its generally blaer eolora-

tian, and paler appearance; the size also is smaller,

The head and back present a uniform blue-green appearance, whereas in the

typical form the head is uch greener than the back.

A specimen trom the National Museum, Melbourne, and said to have been

taken at Cooper Creek (Lake Eyre Basin) by A. W. Howitt, of the South Aus-

tralian Relief Expedition to Burke and Wills in 1861-2, is closer to the type of

caormdenus than it is to the southern, birds, The rump is of the same shade, but the

volour of the heat is intermediate between that of caeruleus and the Red-rumped

Parrots of the northern Flinders Ranges, The upper surface of the middle tail

feathers also much paler than in typical birds from the south, as in eacrulens.

For years there have been persistent reports of this small ‘blue’? parrot in

the arid interior of South Australia, A recent one is by Higginson (1988), who

wrote; “Size a little longer than a Mulea Parrot (Psephetus varius), but slimmer

and smaller than a Port Lineoln Parrot. Colour: head, back, wings and tail very

bright turqnoise-blue, something similar to a sky-blue Budgerigar (Melopsittacus),

bul of a slightly more greenish tinge, the head being a little darker in shade. 2, .

Just before the bird flew it turned around in the bush, and I noted a bar of dirty

white or an extremely pale blue colour (? equals red—I1.T.C.) about half an inch

wide across the back just above the tail. This was the only break in the turquoise

colour that [noted .. . , female (?) . 2. . appeared to be a uniform drab

green,’’ The locality given was 391 miles north-west of Port Augusta,

This deseription suggests that the birds seen were P.h. cacruleus, but the

locality given is a considerable north-westerly extension of the range hitherto

accepted for haematonotus,

Range; Interior of South Australia, from (he Lake Eyre Basin in the south

extending westwards and northwards.

Psprnorus vars Clark 1910.

Names: Mulga Parrot, Many-coloured Parrot, and Varied Parrot.

Range: Mid-western Australia, South-vest Anstralia, Central Anstralia,

Sonth Australia (cry interior), Vietoria (mallee), interior of New South Wales,

and sonth-westerm Queensland,

Races: Pseplotus v, clhelae Mathews 1917 (1); Ps. v. exsul Mathews 1912

1); Ps.e. varius Clark 1910; Ps. v. orlentalis Mathews 1917,

PserVioTUs VARIUS bTMELAR Mathews 1917.

Characters; *’Paler in general coloration, with less and paler red on Fhe

abdomen. A peenliar feature would be the retention of the female ved shoulder

voloration of the males.”’

Lack of sufficient material makes the status of this race douhtfnl, tor examples

seen from the region of the River Piike are of the typical form. On the other hand

the type locality is situated in a hot desert region, anil on theoretical grounds the

race Inay prove recognizable when further specimens are collected,

Range: MacDonnell Ranges, Northern Territory,

Psprnorus varius Exsul Mathews 1913.

Name: Western Varied Parrot,

Characters: Differs from Pov. varius in its bluev coloration aboye and below,

espevially notiveable on the cheeks, which are blue, not green. Mount Magnet,

West. Australia.’ (Mathews, 1912),

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN BROADTAILED PARROTS 143

No examples from the type loeality have been seen, but specimens taken at

Wiluna, near Lake Way, and only 150 miles away from Mount Magnet, are of the

typical race, as are also those from Kalgoorlie. On theoretical grounds it may he

possible to say that this form will be proyed valid when further material is

obtained.

Range: Western Australia (Mount Magnet, type locality).

Pserxsores vArrus varius Clark 1910.

Saynonwus; multicolor (Kuhl 1820) ; duleet Mathews 1911; rosinge Mathews

1912.

Names: Mulga Parrot, Many-colonred Parrot, Southern Many-coloured

Parrot,

According to Mathews (1917, p, 408) the type was taken aft the head of

Spencer Gulf, South Australia, A series of specimens shows that this form has

less red on the abdomen than any other race except cthelae. There is also rmueh

individual variation, both in size and colour,

Range: (Interior of Western Australia, Kyre Peninsula, Yorke Peninsia, aud

northern South Australia.

Peapiorus vARTUS ORIENTALIS Mathews 1917.

Examples taken from various localities in the range given below are at once

distinguished by the generally brighter coloration and deeper and more extensive

red pateh on the abdomen in the male.

Range: Mallee areas of South Australia, Vieloria, and New South Wales, also

southern Queensland.

Peernorus PULCTIERRIMUS (Gould 1845).

Names: Pavadise Parrot, Beautiful Parrot, Ground Parrot, Hlegant Parrot,

and Anthill Parrot.

Synonym: dubvus Mathews.

The only example seen by the writer is a mounted specimen of a male in the

volleetion of Dr, A. H. Lendon, Mathews originally named one subspecies P.p.

dubius, the characters being *‘darker aboye’’ than the typical form. The author

retracted his proposal in 1917, saying that the differences were probably based on

individual varialion, A complete account of the re-diseovery of the species is

given by Chisholin (1922).

Range: Semi-humid districts of south-eastern Queensluud, as [ar north as

Rockhampton, and south to Northern New South Wales.

Psernorus creysorrrrvatos Gould 1858.

Names: Golden-shouldered or Golden-winged Parrot.

Synonyne: nova Mathews.

Ranges Cape York Peninsula (western portion), North Queensland.

Pserrnorus prsstMinis Collett 1805.

Names: Wooded or Black-hooded Parrot.

Synonyms: cucullatus North; blaawur Van Oort ; dovathede Mathews.

Although Peters (1937) has again relegated this form to subspeeifie rank, the

weight of evidence seems to indicate that it is a separate speeies (e.g, see LeSouef

and Kinghorn, 192+). There is little doubt, however, that the two forms, ehrysop-

feryqius and dissimilis, on structural erounds, are very closely allied.

Range: Semi-arid areas of the Northern Territory from Darwin, east to Gulf

of Carpentaria.

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

SuMMARY.

As a result of this review, it is shown that further collecting is still required

before the status and distribution of many races ¢an be properly understood. This

applies particularly to forms inhabiting the Tnterior and Northern parts of the

Continent. There appears to be a close correlation between climate and the oveur-

renee of geographical races, although careful ecological studies may be required in

some instances to confirm this finding, Nine races proposed by Mathews in his

1931 List are not recognizable trom available material, and are almost certainly

not valid ; five others are only doubtfully distinet. Two forms of Platycercus pre-

viously regarded as full species are relegated to subspecifie rank, as also are two

of Barnardius, Although not recognized by Peters (1937) Barnardius is con-

sidered a valid genus on osteological grounds, A further rave of Psephotus haena-

tonotus has been deseribed, and Salvadori’s ( 1891) conclusions are confirmed that

the Australian Broadtailed Parrots should be recognized as a distinct subfamily,

ihe Platyeereinae.

REFERENGES CLTED.

Andrews, J. and Maze, W. H. (1943): Proe. Linn, Soo. N.SLIV,, \iii, p. 105.

Ashby, B, (1917); Emu, xvii, p. 43.

Ashby, E. (1925): Emu, xxv, p, 59,

Beddard, F. E. (1898); The Structure and Clussification of Birds, London.

Campbell, A, G. (1906): Emu, v, p 145,

Chisholm, A. H. (1922): Emu, xxii, pp. 98-99,

Davidson, J. (1936): Trans, Roy. Soe, 8, A ustre, Ix, p. BB,

de Martonne, E. (1927): Comptes Rendus Acad, Sei., Paris, elxs xii,

Higginson, A. RB. R. (1989); 8. Austr. Orn, xv, p. 31,

Huxley, J. (1938): Nature, extiti, p. 218,

Jenkins, C. P. H. (1931); Hmu, xxx, p, 258.

Kinghorn, J. R. (1929): Emu, xxix, p 1.

Lendon, A. H. (1940); 8. Austr. Orn,, xy, pp. 87-94,

LeSouef, A, 8, and Kinghorn, J. R. (1924): Emu, p. 1.

Mathews, G. M. (1910): Bull, Brit, Orn, Ol., xxvii, p. 28.

Mathews, G M (1912): Now. Zool., Xyiii, pp. 269-277,

Mathews, G, M. (1913): A List of the Birds of Australia,

Mathews, G. M. (1915); Austr. Av, Ree., ii.

Mathews, G. M. (1917): Birds Austr., vi.

Mathews, G. M. (1918): Ibis, vi, p, 115.

Mathews, G. M. (1931); A List of the Birds of Australasia, pp. 196-2()4.

North, A. J. (1893): Ree. Austr, Mus., ii, p 83,

Novth, A. J. (1906): Emu, vi, p. 74,

North, A. J, (1911): Ansty, Mus., Special Cat. No. 1, dil,

Peters, J. L. (1987): Choek-list Birds WIL, iii, pp. 260-266,

Prescott, J. A. (1931): Coune. Set, Indus, Kes. (Australia) Bult, 52.

Proscott, J. A. (1934); Trans. Roy, Sue. 8. Austy., lyiii, p. 48.

Rumsay, E. P. (1888); Tal, List Austr. Bda., p. 34.

R.A.0.U. Official Cheek-list of the Birds of Austrnlia (1926), pp. 47-49,

R.A,O.U. Check-list Committee (1941); Bmw, xl, p, 88,

Salvadori, T. (1891): Proe. Zool. Soe, Lond, p. 129, plate xii.

Salvadori, T. (1891); Cat. Parrots Brit, Mus., xx, pp, 589-568,

Serventy, D. L. (1938): Amu, Xxxvii, p. 160,

Tavistock, Marquess of (1929): Parrots and Parrot-like Birds, pp. 194-222,

Thompson, D, W. (1899): Proe. Zool, Soe., Lond., pp, 9-46,

White, 8S. A, (1915): Trans. Roy, Soe. S.A ustr., xxxix, p. 745.

White, 8, A, (1916): Emu, xyi, p. 1, Plate i,

IXPLANATION OF PLATE,

Plate viii.

Red-backed Parrot (Psephotus haematonotus casruleus Condon). Adult male, from Tnnaamineki,

South Australia.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VII, PLATE VIII

RED-BACKED PARROT

Psephotus haematonotus caeruleus Condon

SOME NEMATODES FROM KANGAROO ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON, UNIVERSITY OF

ADELAIDE

Summary

The parasites recorded in this report were collected at Flinders Chase by members of

the Ralph Tate Society, led by Dr. C. T. Madigan, during an excursion to Kangaroo

Island in January, 1940. For identification of some of the hosts we are indebted to the

staff of the South Australian Museum, in which institution the types of the new

species have been deposited. We thank the Trustees of the Flinders Chase Sanctuary

for permission to collect the material studied; and acknowledge assistance received

from the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. The specific

name kartana given to several of the new parasites is based on Karta, which,

according to Tindale and Maegraith (Rec. South Austr. Mus., 4 (3), 1931, p. 286) is

the native name for Kangaroo Island.

Some NEMATODES rrom KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON anv PATRICIA M, MAWSON, University or AvELAIpE,

Fig, 1-14,

Tire parasites recorded in this report were collected at Flinders Chase by members

of the Ralph Tate Society, led by Dr, C. T. Madigan, during an excursion to

Kangaroo Island in January, 1940, For identification of some of the hosts we are

indebted to the staff of the South Australian Museum, in which institution the

types of the new species have been deposited, We thank the Trustees of the

Flinders Chase Sanctuary for permission to collect the material studied; and

acknowledge assistance received from the Commonwealth Research Grant to the

University of Adelaide. The specific name kartana given to several of the new

parasites is based on Karta, which, according to Tindale and Maegraith (Ree.

South Austr. Mus., 4 (3), 1931, p. 286) is the native name for Kangaroo Island.

List of hosts and nematodes identified :

TTYLA JERVISIENSIS Dumeril and Bibron; Zedruris hylae sp. nov.; Aplectana flinderst, sp. nov;

Raillictnema kartanum sp. nov.

VaRanus GouLDI Gray: Physaloptera antaretica Linst, (var, typica Trw, Smith).

TIEMIEZRGIS PERONT (Fitzinger) : Lhelandros kartana sp. nov.

GymyopacryLus Mit Bory de St. Vineent: Pharyngodon bartana ap, nov,

TRYLOGALR KUGENID Peron and Lesueur; Cloacina eurta J. and M.; ©. petrogale J. and M,;

Zonioluimus eugenii J. and M.

THELANDROS KARTANA 8p. NOV.

Fig, 1-3.

From a ligard, Henmiergis perom.

Males abont 2 mm, long; females 4°5 to 6°3 mm, long. Ilead rounded; six low

lips each with small papilla. Mouth leading to vestibule 15y wide, 12» long, with

three rounded teeth at base. Oesophagus long (0-34 mm. in male; upto 1 mm, in

female), narrow, ending in bulb, Nerve ring 0-15 mm. from head end in female

4-9 nm, long.

Male: Anus on prominence about 15» in front of rounded posterior region

from which projeets the tail, 502 long. One pair adanal papillae; one pair post-

anal, more laterally situated ; one median postanal; a pair nearly midway along

narrowed portion of tail. Spicule 55p long, very slightly chitinized.

Female: Tail 0-36—-0-4 mm, long, tapering to sharp point. Vulva 1-5 mm. in

front of posterior end of body. Eggs 75-90p by 35—45p, with pitted shell.

The species resembles closely 7. maplestont (Chatterji) Baylis 1936 in general

form and size, but differs in the length of the tail and the spicule in the male, the

position of the vulva, the number of lips and the presence of cephalic papillae,

PHARYNGODON KARTANA Sp. NOV,

Fig. +6,

From two geekoes, Gymnodactylus malit.

Males 2+2-2-6 mm. long; females 4—5 mm. Head with three low lips; buceal

cavity funnel-shaped, chitinized, 10,2 long in male. Oesophagus 0°33 mm. long in

146 REcorDSs oF THE S.A. Musetm

male, 0-47 mm. in female; its terminal buh with chitinons blades, Nerve ring

0-15 mm. and exeretory pore 0-56 mm. in male, 0-62 mm. in female, from head

end, Hxeretory pore large, cirentar, with strongly chitinized margin; the strve-

ties variously deseribed as ‘‘eilia’’ and “‘bristles’’ present, but appearing in our

speeimens tather as grooves or eredses of posterior part of margin; pore leading

directly to spherical vesicle connected with two anterior and two posterior lateral

ducts.

Male: Tail charaeterized by great length of narrow terminal portion, 0°83 mm,

long, Lateral alae extending from mid-oesophageal region to anterior end of

caudal alae, widening gradually to greatest breadth just before termination. An-

lerior (preanal) pair caudal papillae sessile; near their bases a projection of body

wall supporting aulerior end of caudal alae. Adanal pair papillae bifwreated ;

postanal pair wide, conieal, ineluded in alae. Posterior lip of cloaca projecting as

blunt spike. Spicule, if present, very lightly ehitinized, 60, lone.

Female; Tail tapering suddenly 0-25 mm. posterior to anus, ending im long

narrow portion 0-95 min, loug, provided with about seven spines on proximal two-

thirds of length. Vulva immediately hehind excretory pore. Hgex 115. x 30.

with one side slightly flattened, anc with pligike structure at each end, embryo

in early segmentation.

This species agrees with P. liliquae Baylis from Tiligua seineoides from

Queensland, and with 2. dindled Thapar from the same host species (recorded in

error as 7, sentcordis) in the wumber and arrangement of papillae on the male tail,

Inet differs in the length of the tail in both male and female, and in the size of the

spieile (if present). Tt also differs from P. tihtquae in the width of the lateral

alae in the male; and from P. finedlet in the absence of two additional pairs of

papillae, It differs from Pharyngodon sp. Thapar 1925 from Eyernia cunning-

hint m the absence of spines on the female tail, as well as in the length of the latter.

RAWLIETNEMA KARTANUM Sp. DV.

Big, 7-8,

Hrown a frog, Hyle jervisiensis,

Males 8-38 mm. Jong; female 41m, Lateral alae present in both sexes, in

male extending to eloaca, mi female to level of candal papillae, Mouth with three

lips; presence of cephalic papillae doubtful—true bueeal eavity absent but chiti-

nous lining of cesophazus covers inner border of each lip and projects as three thin

plates resembling clements of a leaf crown. Oesophagus 0-48 mm, long in male,

natrow, with terminal bulb longer than wide. Nerve ring at about midlength of

vesophagus, Exeretory pore slit-like, at level of anterior end of bulb.

Male: Caudal alae with seven pairs pediuneulate papillae; also six sessile pre-

anal pairs, three adanal pairs, a pair at midlength, and a pair near tip of tail,

Body gradually narrowing posteriorly to anus; tail 0-14 mm, long, ending in

sharp point. Spieules 0°18 mn, long, subequal, similar, acieular, not strongly

chitinized but marked with transverse striations.

Female; Tail 0-3 mm, long, tapering to blunt point; paiv of caudal papillae

M12 min, from try. Only specimen present is immature, with eges not yer fer

lilized and vulva not recognisable.

We assign the species to Jtaiietnema with some reserve. [t agrees in the

possession of eaidal alue and the absenee of a eubernaculum, U. differs from the

type species of Oxysomatinm in these teatnres, as well as in the number of cephalic

papillae; and from other species of the genus in the number and arrangement of

(he vaudal papillae and in the length of the spicules.

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM KANGAROO ISLAND 147

Fig. 1-8. Thelandros kartana. 1, head; 2, male tail, ventral view; 3, male tail, lateral view.

Fig. 4-6. Pharyngodon kartana. 4, anterior end; 5, male tail; 6, female tail.

Fig. 7-8. Raillietnema kartanum. 7, head; 8, male tail.

Fig. 9-11. Aplectana flindersi. 9, head; 10, anterior end; 11, male tail.

; Fig. 12-14. Hedruris hylae. 12, head, lateral view; 13, head, ventral view; 14, tail, lateral

view.

Fig 1, 7 and 9 to same seale; 2, 3,5 and 11; 4, 6 and 14; 10,12 and 13. a, anus; ¢, cloaea;

e, excretory pore; g, gubernaculum; v, vulva.

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

APLECTANA FLINDERSI sp. NOV.

Fig. 9-11,

From a frog, Hyla jervisiensis,

Only one male available, 2-1 mm, long. Head with three shallow lips; behind

latter four large and two small papillae. Buccal cavity 10” wide, 7p long, with

three teeth at base. Oesophagus 0-34 mm, long (including posterior bulb, 70m

long, 80u wide) ; bulb shghtly constricted from remainder. Nerve ring 0-13 mm.

from head end. Exeretory pore slit-like, at level of anterior end of bulb, Posterior

end curved ventrad ; tail about 0-17 mm, long, tapering to point. Two pairs pre-

cloacal papillae. Cloaca on elevation surrounded by three pairs small papillae;

laterally from latter two pairs; posteriorly five pairs arranged as in fig, 11.

Spicules similar, equal, 1104 long, very fine but well chitinized. Gubernaculum

180 long, much stouter and more strongly chitinized than spienles, and protrud-

ing through cloaea; with two stout lateral projections near proximal end.

We have assigned the species to Aplectana because of the presence of a buceal

cavity, two equal spicules and a gubernaculum. It is distinguished from other

species of the genus of which aecounts are available, by the large size of the guber-

naculum relative to the spicules.

H&pRURIS HYLAE sp. nov.

Fig. 12-14.

From a frog, Hyla jervisiensis,

One female present; 9 mm. long, 0°55 mm, wide. Head 0-25 mm. long, 0:23

tim. in maximum breadth. Sips narrower than interlabia, but of essentially

similar shape; each lip and interlabium with a median, two antero-lateral and two

postero-lateral projections ; median anterior projection on lips more sharply differ-

entiated from anterio-laterals; each latter with small conical papilla. Oesophagus

ending 1-4 mm. behind anterior end. Nerve ring at 0:35 min, and exeretory pore

at 0-48 mm. behind head end. Cervical papillae very small, 0-54 mm. behind base

of lips. Sucker-like invagination of tail in dorsal position, hook 0-3 mm. long.

Anus 0:35 mm, from posterior end; vulva 0-2 mm. in front of anus; eges thiek-

shelled, 354 diameter.

The species differs from all others whose description is available to us, in the

shape of the lips. The genns had not been identified previously from Australia.

OrHer Sprcies ov NEMATODES.

The parasites listed above from the Kangaroo Island wallaby, Thylogale

eugentt, and from the lizard, Varanus gauldi, present no new features of interest.

LITERATURE,

Baylis, H. A, (1930): dun, Mag. Nat. Hist. (10), v, pp. 364-36

Baylis, H. ay Ga: Nematoda of British India, i,

Chatters) CG. (1933): dun. Trop, Med, Parasit., xxvii, pp. 131-134.

Thapar, G 8 (1925) ; Journ, Helm., iii, pp, 83-150,

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol. VU, No. 2

Published by The Museum Board, and edited by the Museum Director

(Herbert M. Hale)

Apetarpz, DecemBer 24, 1942

PRINTED AT THE HASSELL PRESS, 104 CURRIE STREET

CEREMONIAL OBJECTS OF THE DIERI TRIBE,

COOPER CREEK, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(OCHRE BALLS, WOVEN STRING WRAPPERS, AND

POINTING STICKS) CALLED THE

“HEARTS OF THE TWO SONS OF THE MURAMURA

DARANA”

By T. VOGELSANG, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Among recent ethnological acquisitions the South Australian Museum has received

(Reg. No. A.31127) a large parcel of pointing sticks, two large oval balls apparently

made by successive layers of ochre and grease, enclosing some sort of core, and two

pieces of woven string wrapper, the whole packed in a heap of ochre and grease-

stained emu feathers. The two oval balls are the “hearts” of the two sons (Dara-ulu) of

the great Dieri mythical being Darana.

CEREMONIAL OBJECTS of rut DIERI TRIBE, COOPER

CREEK, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(OcurE Batts, Woven String Wrappers, AND PoINTING 51 ICKs)

CALLED

Tue “Hearts or THE Two Sons or THE Muramura Daxrana”

By T. VOGELSANG, Souta Ausrrauian Museum,

AMONG recent ethnological acquisilions the South Australian Museum has received

(Reg, No. A.81127) a large parcel of pointing sticks, two large oval balls appa-

rently made by successive layers of ochre and grease, enclosing some sort of core,

and two pieces of woven string wrapper, the whole packed in a leap of oehre and

erease-stained emu feathers. The two oval halls are the ‘hearts’? of the two sons

(Dara-ulu) of the great Dieri mythical being Davana.

Ngantjalina, a member of the Darana Totem, has informed the writer that

these two objects have been tor sevoral gencrations under the eare of a trustworthy

person aided by a council of six or seven men and women. When the father of

Neantjalina grew old, he vequested his son to take over the charge of these sacred

stones, but the sou. who lived at the now abandoned Killa] paninia M ission, refused,

saying that the secrets and beliefs in connection with these hearts did not agree

with his Christian outlook,

In attempting to learn details of the secrets, T requested Neyaitjalina to men-

tion some of the beliefs, but he refused, saying that he had promised his father never

to give away the scerets and he felt that he could not break his word, Instead he

told me that there were quite a number of dangerous pointing sticks preserved in the

parcel, together with the ‘hearts’. Each of the stieks had been ased in the killing

of a person who had attempted to give away the seerets of the cult; for fear of these

sticks, none of the members of the council would give them wp, or mention any-

thing about them.

Mr. N, B. Tindale points out that several of the sticks are of the slender

double-ended kind used in the Murray River district as Irilling agents; the victim

was seized abd the stick, previously soaked in dead body jnices, was forced into

the body cavity insice the anus so that there was no external wound,

Neantjalina further stated that from his father and grandfather he had

learned that Durana was the most powerful Muramura of them all. Te was the

first one to come ont of the earth, Darana came out of the earth at Kandrimoku

Lake, about 16 miles east of the late Killalpaninna Mission Station, on the Cooper’s

Creek, was the controller of the sky, and of the winds, and conld cause droughts

and make rain ta fall, especially around Pandu Pirna (lake Hope). Onee a great

number of ‘mulurn or Witehetty grubs appeared in the ground after a heavy

rain, the Murawnra Darana gathered together a great many of them by singing

one of his songs; he dried them and put them into string bags which he hung on

atvee, When his two sons, the Dara-ulu, came to the place and saw the bags hang-

ing, they wisehievously threw their hoomerangs at them, One of them struck a bag,

causing a great vent in if; dust poured ont and blew everywhere, the far-reaching

clouds of dust darkened the sun and caused a terrible drought,

Duving the drought Darana was asked by one of his friends, another Mura-

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

mura, to come and share a ‘pana or grass seed feast, Te went ta his friend's

country, taking all his starving people; some were cripples and others were so

weak that ‘they erawled along on their elbows.’' When the Muoramuras learned

what the Dara-ulu youths had done by their mischievous scattering of the dried

caterpillar dust, they quickly followed and strangled them, The old Muramura

Daraua interfered at onee with their iitention and magically brought the lads back

to life again. Towever, they were again both strangled and the Muramura volled

their bodies up to form the two eze-shiaped ‘hearts’? which have now been vevealed.

To this day the natives believe that the Dara-uly objects bring rain, and at every

rain-making ceremony the two stones were freshly smeared with fat.

Av event at Killalpaninna, about the year 1917, while the writer was at the

Mission station throws indirect light on the significance of these objects. An old

native tamed George frequented the camps near Killalpaninna; he was one of the

menthers of the Darana cult, Undeed, he claimed to have received, from Darana,

apecial powers enabling him to kill people with the aid of lightning or by means of

|'Marda tury |—titerally ‘stone fire’’—that is, by oid of meteors. At the time

of the incident George was living in a canip at a place about a quarter of a mile

west of the Rillalpaninua Station, with lis ‘niece’? (exaet social relationship not

known) and her husband, named Ned. Avery morning before sunrise, for over a

week, George kept the eamp awake by shonting boasts in a singing yoieo and talking

about the power he had of killing others by means of ['Marda turul, Tn the course

of his boastings, he elaimed to have nsed this power upon some women at Murn-

piowt Tt was about this time that a meteorite actnally fell at Murnpiowi and

shorily after several individuals died. A east of this meteorite is in the South

Anstralian Mnsewm, The continued boasting so annoyed Ned and his wife, that

the latter strnek him rneonseions with a fighting hoomerane. and he was then dis-

patched hy Ned. Some details of the lalling of George are mentioned by Horne

and Aiston (‘‘Savage Life in Central Anstralia,’’ pp. 147-8). The information

there recorded was principally aupplied by myself. A few of the details of the

miblished record are confused; George was not a trne “Ioirdaiteha.’’ and the

inerdent of the killing by lightning was at Murnpiowi, not Tamamincka. The old

man when attacked hy his ‘‘nieee'! retired only a short distanee away, not to

Nesnangana Lake, The weapon used in the killing was a ‘mariwira or fichtine

hoomerang. Mr. Aiston did not hear the actnal challenge as he was at Munceranie,

fifty miles away, (irhie the period of the events narrated,

The writer has known of (hese (wo sacred objeets of the Darana totem far

many years, and for the last eight years has followed the movements of the natives

Who have had charge of the stones, in the hope that they miaht be secured even-

tually for this Museum, This was done by corresponding with natives who had

grown np with me and who can read and write in heir own langnage. T first heard

of the objects when they were kept at Murnpiowi. Later on they were taken to

Kunatwina (Kanowinna), then to Kaladear Bore, whence they were returned to

Marnpiowi. From this place they were taken to Pandipand. thenee to Kurininna,

and lastly back to Kunanwina where the last member of the eonneil died, They

were dispatched from Knunanwina to the South Australian Museum,

LITHRATURE.

dia Se (1904) = Native ‘lribes of South-Rast Anatralia, p S9R (after Gason) and pp.

98-800,

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS! (LEPIDOPTERA

HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART V.

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Sahyadrassus Tindale 1941.

Sahyadrassus Tindale, 1941, p. 26 (footnote).

Antennae tapering, cylindrical, short, sparsely ornamented with hairs, composed of

about twenty segments. Mouth much reduced, labial palpi short, two-segmented, each

segment spherical and subequal in length. Traces of mandibles present as circular

discs at base of hypopharynx; traces of feebly chitinized maxillary palpi visible in

microscope mounts. Posterior legs of male with tabiae clothed with a tuft of

specialized orange coloured hairs. Forewings with Sc, absent; Rg from before middle;

R, and R; short-stalked; R, from R,; before r-m vein. Cu, obsolete in distal half. Pcu

anastomosed with Cu, to well beyond cuf, then Y-forking with 1V. Hindwings with

Sc, absent ; Pcu obsolete in male except for traces at base; 1V and 2V present, but the

latter reduced (in some species 1V and 2V may be approximated at base and 2V much

reduced); in females all three vannal veins Pcu, 1V and 2V are usually present.

REVISION or tox GHOST MOTHS’ (LEPIDOPTERA

HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)

PART V,

By NORMAN B, TINDALE, B.Sc., Sout AusrraniAn Muséum.

Plates ix-xi, and Text Figs. 1-30.

Saryaprassus Tindale 1941.

Sohyadrassus Tindale, 1941, p. 26 (footnote).

Antennae tapering, eylindrieal, short, sparsely ornamented with hairs, eom-

posed of about twenty segments. Mouth mueh reduced, labial palpi short, two-

seemented, cach seement spherical and subequal in leneth, Traces of mandibles

present as circular dises at base of hypopharynx; traces of feebly ehitinized maxil-

laty palpi visible in microscope mouuts. Posterior legs of male with tabiae clothed

with a tuft of specialized orange ecolonred hairs. Forewings with Se; absent; Ng

from before middle; Ry and Ry short-stalked; Ry from R; before r-m vem. Cn

obsolete in distal half, Pou anastomosed with Cus to well beyond euf, then

Y-forkine with 1V, Hindwines with Se; absent; Peu obsolete in male except for

traces at base; 1V and 2V present, but the latter reduced (in some species 1V and

2V may he approximated at base and 2V much reduced) ; in females all three vannal

veins Peu, 1V and 2V are usually present.

Genotype: Phissus malabarieus Moore,

Differs from Lndoclita in the absence of vein Sez in the forewing, in the num-

ber of vannal veins of hindwing, and in the mouth parts.

The genus was briefly defined in a footnote lo a previous page of these stidies,

The absence of Se, in all the principle Hepialids of this group from the

Western Ghats and its presence in all members living in the Himalayan subregion

is of some theoretical interest.

8. nulubaricus seems to represent most closely the archetype of the present

venus, and shows relationships with Rudoclita chalybeata, its parallel form in the

Himalayan subregion. It may therefore be considered to be an old continental

Indian specialization of the more generalized genus Mndoclita,

Some members of Salyadrassus have developed enrious modifications of wing

form ; these reach their extreme in the male of 8. albofasciatus in which the apical

portions of the wing have become elonvated, and the posterior halves dilated, The

venation is similar to that found in the genotype,

The distribution of Hepialids in the Western Ghats appears to he strongly

governed by rainfall. Not only does a high summer rainfall seem necessary for

their existence, hut the continnanee of some measure of rain is also required in the

eritical periods November to December, and March to May, when the imagines

appear. The area ocenpied by these inseets therefore, does not extend much Further

north than Mangalore or south of Cochin, Within this high rainfall belt species

are known from about sea level to 8,000 fect elevation.

The species of Sahyadrassus may be readily keyed by means of characters of

the genitalia :

(1) Pt, IV was published in these Reeords VIL, No. 1, Oct. 27th, 1941, pp. 15-46,

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kry To tH Spacima of SAHYADRABSUS.

nm Males,

be Tegumer with strongly chitinized processes mueting in the mid-line.

ce, Posterior extremity of toguimen with posteriorly dirceted lateral spine malabarieus

ce, Posterior extremity of tegumen with spine directed towards mid-line magaus

bb. Tegurien with efrungly chitinizod processes nof meeting in mid-line,

da. Tognmen with margin spine-like , = ie ne -» -. albafasciatus

dd. Tegomen with margin not spine-lke ,, ns ie nn ve Mtridts

6. Teguininal margin broadly triangular when viewed from below — slrobilanthes

ee, Teguimen rounded when viewed from below ome =_ -- utridis

uit. Females,

£. Kighth sternite with posterior extremity notehed.

g. Eighth sternite upturned at extremity .. os oF -. -. malabarious

gg. Wighth sternite not upturned at apex .. 4 iv i ., atbofasciatus

fF, Bighth sternite with posterior extremity not notched —., ee -» ¥brobilanthor

SAHYADRASSUS MALABARTOUS (Moore).

Plate ix, fig, 78-79, Plate x, fig. 81, and Text fig. 1-3, 5-6.

Phassus malabaricus Moore, Proe, Zool, Soc., 1879, p, 412.

Phassus malabaricus Hampson, 1892, Panna Brit. Ind., Moths, 1, p. 821.

3 Head, thorax and legs dull brown, posterior legs with tibiae clothed with

dense orange hairs; abdomen pale brown with fawn pubescence whieh has a pink

tingeat base. Morewings dill brown with whilish-fawn suffusions and bands; vosta

brownish, ornamented with about nine irregularly spaced, semilunate, and ovate

small black spots, ¢ach margined with pale fawn; a large obliquely plaved sub-

rectangular brown patel in middle of wing, its inner angle terminated by a lumate

creamy-white spot, surrounded by brown, its distal extremity at r-m vein also

marked by a pair of white spots, a series of subterminal fawn sulfitsions from near

apex to hind margin at two-thirds; between these two is a rather well defined

brown fascia, slightly bent outwards at R5 and bearing traces of darker markings

hetween the veins; hind margin broadly suffused with pale fawn, with slizhtly

darker clougate, ovate marks between the veins. [lindwings dull fawn with a pink

linge. Expanse 78 mm,

2 Much larger, markings paler, minch more suffused than in male, buat with

same general pattern, Expanse 128 mm.

Loc, North Kanara: Karwar 6,7. Sirey (type, a male, t. Moore) Yellapur 6,

South Nanara: Mangalore (400 ft.) 6, Barkuy 6. Coorg: Tithimatli Reserve 4;

Mereara 4,000 ft, 5, Nilgivi Hills: Coonoor, Ootacamund (allotype female, expanse

126 iwm., labelled “Ooty, Nugiris, Dr. Day, Moore Col., 94:106’’ in British

Museum), South Malabar: Nilambir 6, 6 males, 8 fentales,

The type male (from Sirey in North Kanara) is missing [rom the Moore Col-

lection at the British Museum, but the allotype female from Ootacamnni is pre-

served anc has been studied.

Females are variable in size; the smallest examined is a well-marked example

from North Kanara expanding only 67 mm. while the largest, fvom Yellapur

measures 130 mm. Large examples are generally daller in coloim aud less well-

marked than smaller ones, which usually bear a close resemblance to the males.

The male deseribed, which in the absence of the type specimen may be rewarded

as the neotype, is a typical example from Coorg.

The male genitalia have been drawn from the dissection of an example from

Mangalore (text fig. 3), The eighth sternite is strongly and rather evenly concave,

the vinevim is of the rather familiar triangular form; the tezumen has a strongly

vhitinized median prolongation which runs in an oblique direction towards the

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 153

mid-line. In the undissected specimen this appears as a keeled ridge obliquely

directed towards the middle and bearing series of minute and obscure serrations.

The posterior extremity of the tegumen is drawn out into a posteriorly directed

spine; the harpe is a simple club-shaped process.

male

“SEvineulum

| labial palp ;

male

Fig. 1-4: 1-3 Suhyadrassus malabarieus Moore, male, South Mangalore; 1. labial palpi;

2. venation; 3. male genitalia, dissected; 4. S. albofascialus Moore, venation of male.

The female genitalia, drawn from the described example from Yellapur (text

fig. 5-6) have the seventh sternite sub-vectangular, with the posterior margin

straight. The eighth sternite, viewed from below, is a swollen, posteriorly notehed,

process which is upturned near the apex; the anterior gonapophyses are triangular

plates ; the posterior gonapophyses are rather smooth, rounded, obliquely disposed

processes overlying the eighth sternite; the inner fold of the penultimate tergite

bears a curious irrezularly notched subrectangular projection; this divides the

space enveloped by the hood-like tergite and presents what becomes almost a cir-

cular posterior aperture for the oviporus.

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This species has a wide distribution within the areas of higher rainfall in South

India, oceurring not only in evergreen forested areas of high equable temperatures

and hieh rainfall (116 inches) as at Karwar headland, but also in the deciduous

forests and on the plateau of the Western Ghats up to 6,500 feet above sea level,

where the temperatures and rainfall are lower (rainfall 63-67 inches), and there

is a cry period from December to April.

In common with Endoclita chalybeata this species is a pest of teak. Its list of

known host plants is much longer than in chalybeata, so that it may be regarded

as a general feeder.

The following series of specimens (most of them reared) have been submitted

for identification by the Forest Research Institute at Dehra Dun.

No. SEX. Date, Hosv TREE.

4 8. Mangalore Male 7th June, 1930 Gmelina sp.

6 Tithimatti ” 2nd May, 1923 ‘fon leat’?

3 8. D. Kanara n 19th May, 1923 Macarange tomentosa

2 8. D. Kanara Female 10th May, 1924 Macaranga tomentosa

5 Mereara + 11th May, 1933 Macaranga Rowburghia

1 Nilambur - 5th June, 1933 Tectona grandis

T am indebted to Mr, T. R. Bell for some material of this species from North

Kanara. Specimens are to be found in the British, Harvard University and South

Australian Museums.

SAHYADRASSUS MAGNUS sp. Nov.

Text fig. 7.

3 Head, thorax, legs and abdomen ochreous, the abdomen at base clothed

with dull pmk hairs, posterior legs ornamented with large tufts of ochreous-pink

hairs. Forewings rather uniformly dull golden-yellow with traces of transverse

markings like watermarks, between the veins; veins prominent, costa with obsenre

dull watermarkings ; a silvery-white semilunate mark above and just beyond base

of M, + Mz and traces of two others at r-m vein. Hindwings dusky ochreous pink,

veins prominent. Hxpanse 116 mm.

Fig, 5-7, 5-6: Sahyadrassus malabarieus Moore; 5. female genitalia, ventral aspect; 6. ditto

lateral aspeet; 7.8. magnus Tindale, male, Palni Hills, genitalia, ventral aspect,

Loc. South India: Palni Hills (type, a male, unique, |. 18936 in South Aus-

trahan Museum).

This is a distinctive species because of its large size, dull golden-yellow fore-

wings and pink-tinged hindwings, If the usual sex ratios for size hold in this

TINDALE —REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 155

species, we may expect the female to measure upwards of 160 mm. in expanse, and

to be one of the largest of Indian ITepialids.

The environment of this species is among the grass covered downs and thickly

wooded valleys of the plateau of the Palni Hills, where the annual rainfall of 65

inches is rather evenly distributed throughout the year.

The male genitalia, examined without dissection in the unique type, have (text,

fiz, 7) the posterior margin of the eighth sternite evenly concave; the tegumen,

partly concealed beneath this sternite, runs obliquely to the mid-line, where its

strongly chitinized posterior margin is rather evenly notched and joined to its

opposite member; the aedeagus appears below it (in ventral view) ; a stout and

long spine-like process, doubtless corresponding to the similarly situated and

posteriorly directed spine of 8S. ma/abaricus, is present towards the anal extremity,

it is directed towards the middle where it almost touches its fellow from the other

side.

SATYADRASSUS ALBOFASCTATUS (Moore),

Text fig. 4, 8-9.

Phassus albofaseiatus Moore, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1879, p, 413, pl. 34, fig. 8,

Phassus albofasciatus Hampson, Il, Lep. Tet. Brit. Mus., vii, 1891, p. 67,

Phassus albofasciatus Wampson, Fauna Brit. Ind., Moths., i, 1892, p. 321,

Phassus albofasciatus Gaede, in Seitz Macrolep., x, 1933, p, 843.

‘ ‘

‘ +

‘ ?

' i

| ‘

.

’

‘

Fig. 8-0. Sahyadrassus albofasctatus Moore: 8. male, Nilgiri Mills, genitalia, ventral aspect ;

9, fomale, Anshi, genitalia, ventral aspect,

2 Head, thorax, and anterior and median legs dull umber brown, abdomen

paler; posterior legs gaily clothed with long golden-yellow tibial plumes. Fore-

wings elongated, narrow, basal half of hind margin dilated, costal margin irregu-

larly coneave at two-thirds, pale umber brown, slightly darker along costa and with

traces of a broken longitudinal median fascia bearing white scales; margins, par-

ticularly near apex and along termen, marked with a line of fine black dots, a few

others internally from the apex. Hindwings subhyaline, narrow, basal half of hind

margin somewhat dilated, pale greyish-umber with traces of two minute black

specks on costal margin just before apex. Expanse 65 mm,

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

@ Similar to male, but larger, abdomen more ochreous-coloured, posterior

legs not.ornamented with yellow tibial plnmes, Forewing not quite so narrow and

basal half less dilated, markings somewhat as in male; the longitudimal fascia less

apparent, but traces of numerous faint labyrinthine black markings slightly more

evident over the wing, Hindwings with basal half of hind margin dilated as in

male, doll ereyish-amber without markings, Expanse 76 im,

Loc, Nilgiri 1ills (type, a male, exp. 65 mim,, labelled ‘‘Nilgiris /. Moore

Coll.’' and allotype female, exp. 84 mm. labelled “Nilgiri plgteat 7,000-8,000

feet’? in British Museum), North Kanara: Aushi 2.

The examples deseribed have heen compared with the lypes in the British

Museum. The allotype female is an example deseribed by Hampson in 1892

Moore’s figure of the type is an excellent one.

The male genitalia, examined without dissection (text fig. 8) have the eighth

steriute deeply notched, with armimded projeetion in the midcle; the tegumen has

strongly chitinized, vertically produced and slightly anteriorly directed spinous

processes, Whose acute apices are Hot joined in the mid-line,

The female genitalia, when viewed from below (text. fig.) have the posterior

margin of the seventh sternite rather transverse aul slightly but evenly concave;

the eighth sternite is prodtced into a large. rounded, terminally bifureate member,

whose ventral surface is raised in a broad keel; the auterioy gonapophyses are

irregularly shaped flat plates, one on ech side of the eighth sternite,

Examples of this strange species are preserved in the British, Tring, and South

Australian Museum Collections.

SAHVADEASSUS viRIDIs (Swinhoe).

Text fig, 10-11,

Phassus viridis Swinhoe, Cat. ep, Oxford, 7, 1892, p. 291 (November),

Phassus viridis Hampson, Fauna. brit. Ind., Moths, i, 1892, p, 321 (December),

Vhassus viridis Plitener and Guede, Seitz Macrolep., x, ». 1983, p. B43,

Hhassus viridis Tindale, S. Aust. Naturalist, xix, 1988, p. 6. fig.

é tlead. thorax, anteriov and median legs green; posterior legs somewhat

recluced, with tibial tuft of ovange-vellow hairs; abdomen greyish-brown, Wore-

wing rather wuoiformly doll green, with veins and ciliae distinetly indicated; a

white quadrate spot at lower internal extremity of rm vein, aud a smaller one

externally, Ilindwings sublivaline, wiiformly greyish-browia. Expanse 88 mm.

Loc. Nilgiri (ills (ype, a male, expanse $8 mun, labelled ‘*Nlehy Ms. No.

1350" in Oxtord University Museum), 2 males.

The type example has heen examined, [his the same one deseribed by Hamp.

son, who recorded the expanse as 861m, There is a second male example from the

Noulwiri TOs ti dhe British Museum (1M, 1926—465), If was eolleeted by Lit,

Cold. CO. Prazer and expands 76 yi. Both exainples are closely sinilar in volour.

The venation agrees elosely with that of S. malabarious.

The male genitalia of the type, drawn wilhout dissection, are seen to haye

the hind marvin of the eighth sternite rather strongly concave, while the t feoidmen

is an evenly rounded and strongly chitinized lateral process; the lwo sides do not

Meet i the mid-line (text fig. 10-11). The extremity of the abdomen of the type

could not be examined, lit the form of ihe lewimien alone will enable it 16 be dis-

linguished from all iis known congeners, while the green colour of the forewings

is nique in this section of the Hepialidae, Nothing is known abont the life history,

and rom the rarity of this anil other species in vollections, it seems evident that

the Lhepialic fauna of the Wester Ghats has us yel been unperfecily gathered.

TINDALE —REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS 157

H

t I

Fig, 10-11. Sahyadrassus viridis (Swinhoe), male, Nilgiri Hills: 10, genitalia, ventral

aspect; 11. ditto lateral aspect, from frechand sketehes of type.

SAHYADRASSUS STROBILANTHES Sp. Noy.

Plate x, fig. 82-83 and Text fig. 12-13.

é@ Head, thorax and abdomen pale greyish-fawn, legs slightly ochreous fawn,

posterior tibiae with a small tutt of ochreous hairs. Forewings with costa straight

or slightly concave and termen continuously rounded with hind margin brown

with paler suffusions, a dull greyish-white fascia from costa at three-fourths to

fork of Cuz, and Cuz) thence in an obscure band to base of wing; traces of a faint

fascia parallel to termen from near apex to near hind margin where it is obsolescent.

Hindwines subhvaline, brownish-fawn. Expanse 36 mm.

¢ Larger than male, forewings subhyaline, longer than in male, apex slightly

more rounded, colour similar but with pale markings larger, more diffused, and

with paler suffused areas more marked, Expanse 48 mm.

Loc. North Kanara: Anshi (1,800 ft.) 6. (Type, a male, 20th June, 1907,

and allotype female, 28rd June, 1909, T, R, Bell, in British Museum, paratypes I,

18941 in South Australian Museum). 4 males, 5 females.

This is the smallest member of the genus. The males range from 36 mm. to

46 nun. while the females expand from 48 mm. to 60 mm. The wings are elongated

as in 8. albofasciatus but the hind margin is not expanded as in that species. A

brown form of the male in which the forewing markings are almost suppressed and

suffused with pale brown, is taken with the typical one; this may be known as

f. brunneus (type, a male, expanse 44 mm., 9th June, 1909, T. R, Bell, in Br.

Museum). Structurally the two forms are identical.

158 RECORDS OF THE S.A. Museum

The species has been bred by Mr. Bell froma gregarious shrub, Strobilanthes

neesianus, and [am indebted to him for material for study and deseription, At

his request the types have been placed in the British Museum Collection.

The male genitalia have the seventh sternite with posterior margin evenly con-

cave (text fig, 12) ; the terumen in ventral view broadly triangular with the margin

strongly chitinized and smooth; there is also a longitudinal lateral carina, widest

anteriorly; the harpe is visible as a short, simple, digitiform lobe.

Big. 12-13. Sahyadrassue strobilanthes Tindale; 12, type, male, Anshi, genitalia, ventral

aspect; 13. allotype female, Anshi, genitalia, ventral aspect,

The female genitalia (text fig. 13) have the seventh sternite harrow, concave

on the anterior margin, and transverse and wide on the posterior; the eighth

sternite is a shovel-shaped process, ventrally rather feebly grooved, and with the

posterior marein transverse; the anterior gonapophyses are smooth, shining,

rounded plates; the ultimate tergite is rather eouplexly folded on the yentral

surface, and the penultimate one has ventral spinous prolongations whieh nearly

meet in the mid-line,

Pavrrrer Hampson.

Palpifer Hampson, Fauna Brit. Ind., Moths, i, 1892, p. 316.

Palpifer Gaede, Seitz Macrolep., x, 1933, p. $44.

Antennae (text fig. 17) short, subcylindrical, somewhat subescent, composed

of abont 38 segments, towards apex with traces of inci pient unipectination. Labial

palpi well developed, densely clothed in pubescence and carried at an angle of

45° away from mid-line; apparently three-segmented, two basal spherical segments

and a third, greatly elougated one, whieh bears an ill-defined suture near its apex

(text fig. 18). Maxillary palpi not observed. Forelegs with moderate strigil-like

fold at base of tibia. Median and posterior lees unarmed. Forewings with Se,

present; Ry from Rs before middle; R. and Ry sbort-forked, Ry from Rs after tn

vein ; inm'cross vein after forking of M, and Ma; Cus reduced, not extending to

margin, Peu apparently obsolete, 1V in male bearing a large scent gland near

base. Hindwings with traces of Se; ; Ry from Rg before middle; Ry and Rg forked ;

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHosT MOTHS 159

Ry from BR, after rm vein; i-m cross vein very shortly atter, or at, forking of

M, and My.

Genotype; Palpifer sexnolalus Moore, designated by Hampson (1892).

The strigil-tike fold at base of Vibia is probably not homologous with the true

strigil uf many heteroneurous Lepidoptera. There is a enrious scent sac situated

on the base of 1V of forewing. 'lhis appears Lo be formed as an invagination from

the dorsal surface of the wing on the line of 1V. Peu in this insect is obsolete

beyond the basal area unless it is represented by the vein, mterpreted by Tillyard

us the crossvein cu-a, Which runs up to meet Cuy, just beyond cut. It would appear

that the strong vein running to the margm is 1V while 2V is represented by a sumple

vein, This interpretation approaches that of Comstock and runs counter to the

views of Tillyard, who regarded the strong analis vein as 1A, ‘The interpretation

of the origins of 1A differs however from that of Comstock who considered LA to be

fused with eu right from the base. The preseut view appears to reconcile the

opposing theories of these two workers and seems to account for apparent anomalies

such as the supposed entire disappearance of 3A (2V) from the forewing of the

ilepialidae. It also makes possible a clearer injerpretation of the venation of the

forewing of some species of the genus Sukyadrassus whose venations are also dis-

eussed jn this paper.

Material is seanty Lor several of the Indian species of this genus, two species

are ouly known from badly preserved type specimens, and another one was de-

scribed from a single type sample, the present location of which is unknown. The

tollowing key is, of necessity, based on obvious, superficial features. Wu more

material the characters of the male genitalia should provide clear cut distinetions

for, in the species studied, and in numerous Far Eastern forms, not yet described,

they ave highly characteristic.

Palpifer minutus Hampson, formerly referred to this genus, belongs to the

hiomonenrous family Palaeosetidae and has been placed by Issiki and Stringer

(Stylops, i, 1942, pp. 71 and 73) as the ty pe of a genus Genustés.

KEY TO SOME Sprcms or Papier,

4a, Winga opaque, well sealed,

b. Tlindwings with basal portion brightly vehravns, outer half dark brown..

« Forewings with several creamy yellow spots -, he ole » seenotahus

ee, Forewings without creamy spots (side Hampson) ‘ .. baveyaniun

bb. Hindwings with busal portion of wing dark, purplish-brown, and con-

volorous with rest of wing,

d. Base of ahdomen and portion of thorax ochreous, apex of abdomen

dark brown 7 _ ‘ ss a6 ad .. taprobanus

dd, Base of abdomen purplish-brown, and concolorous with apex of

abdomen.

ce. Forewings with moderately large white spot between rf and mf marinus

ec, Forewings with white spot reduced or absent ne {. -. pelliria

ua. ‘Wangs subbysline, rather poorly sealed . - ca i: ‘es — ce temeb rine

Paupirur suxxorarus (More),

Plate xi, fig. 84-85 and Text fig, 14-18, 22-25.

Hepialus sexnotatus Moore, Proe. Zool. Soc. 1879, p. 413,

Palpifer seanotalus Hampson, Fauna Brit, India, Moths, i, 1892, p. $16, fig. 217.

Palpifer sexnotatus Pfitgner, Seitz Maerolep., viii, 1912, p. 457, pl 54d,

3 Heal, antennae, thorax, legs and greater part of abdomen dayk brown, a

dense clothing of hair at base of abdomen and on metathorax, dull yellowish-

oehreous, Forewing dull rusty-brown with some eight white spots, two small

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MusEUM

subcostal ones faintly ochreous tinged at two-thirds and four-fifths, one at r-m

vein, a group of three, one rather large and silvery-white, in basal fourth, traces

of asmaller one near inner margin ; a minute marginal black spot between C typ and

the analis vein, Hindwings with hasal half bright ochreous-yellow, apical half

and inner margin purplish-brown except for a subrectangular dull yellow terminal

spot between veins M, and Ms. Expanse 25 min,

forewing

Fig. 14-17. Palpifer sexnotatus Moore, male, Nainital: 14. antenna; 15. anterior aspect of

head to show labial palpi; 16. venation; 17. base of forewing, ventral aspect, to show scent gland.

® Larger than male; dense clothing of hair at base of abdomen and on meta-

thorax brightly ochreous. Forewings rusty-brown with two rows of subterminal

dark brown spots in outer half of wing; basal series of white spots well defined,

black spot at posterior margin well defined. Tlindwings with basal third bright

ochreous yellow, rest of wine dark brown, with traces of terminal yellow spot

between M, and Ms as in male. Expanse 38 mm.

Loe. Sikkim: Darjiling, 7 (twpe, a female, abdomen missing, expanse 38 mun,

labelled ‘‘Darjiling, Moore Coll, 94-106’" in British Museum), Gopaldara, Mirilk,

Bhutan; Buxar, 8.

A female specimen in the Sonth Australian Museum, from the type locality,

agreeing closely with the type example, and a male from the Khasia Mills (pl. xi,

fig. $4) have been used in drawing up the above description. Another female, from

Khasia, has been figured (pl. xi, fig, 85),

Specimens are to be found at the British, Tring, Senckenberg and South

Australian Museums.

P. murinus and P. taprobanus have been included in the synonymy of this

species by some authors, but a close examination of the types ancl eenitalia studies

indieate that. they are distinct.

The male genitalia have a broadly four-sided vineulum with straight anterior

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS lol

and posterior margins, The harpe has a large, expanded, and flattened hood-lke

gacculnusand along slender digitiform cneullus ; the tegument ; is strongly chitinized

with round, poiuted antero-ventral extremity and double-spined posterior pr'o-

jection, Text tig. 18 has been drawn from a slide preparation.

The female genitalia (text fig. 22-23) drawn, without dissection, for compart-

son with a-similar sketeh of the type of P. wnbrinus, shows a complicated process

furnied from what is probably the eighth sternite.

Pacemer Tavoyanus (Moore).

Nepialus lavoyanus Moore, Journ, Asiat. Soc. Beng., v, 1886, p. 98.

Pulpifer lavotanus Tampsou, Fauna Brit. Tnd., Moths, i, 1892, p. 317.

¢ Pale, vinous brown, after-marein of metathorax and first sexment of abdo-

men elothed with ochreous hairs, Forewing with some dark quadrate costal marks,

others in and below the cell; an irregular medial band with dentate margin; a

series of small marginal Innules and a black spot above outer angle; all these

markings with narrow ochreous edges. Tindwing dark viniois brown, at base;

viliae ochreous from My, to posterior angle (after Tampson). Expanse 77 mm,

Loc. Gower Burma: Tavoy.

This species is not represented in any of the collections examimed and the

type has not been traced, The specimen is said to be a male; if corvect this species

should have a female even larger in size and thus much larger than any of the

other known species. The generie placing may be in error.

Paurirer TAPROBANUS (Moore),

Plate xi, fig, 87 and Text fig. 20-21,

Hepialus taprobanus Moore, Lup, Ceyl,, iii, 1887, p. 545, pl. cexti, fig, 6,

Palpifer sexnotatus Hampson (nee Moore), Fanma Brit. Lud., Moths, 7, 1892, p. 317.

Palpifer sexnotutus form laprobunus Gaede, Seitz Macrolep., x, 1933, (part), p. 845,

2 Head, palpi, thorax, abdomen and legs purplish-brown, a bright orange-

eoloured band of hairs at base of abdomen, Forewitigs purplish brown with a

wrey tinge, hase densely clothed with darker brown scales, the distal area anossed

hy faint traces of darker brown broken zig-zag bands followed by a marginal row of

spots; a Single white spot above aml and a clearly defined black spot at margin

between veins On,), and TV, Tindwings purplish-hrown ; costal margin and the

ciliate tinged ovhreous; the base clothed with orange-coloured haivs, Expanse

5O mm,

Loe. Ceylon; Wattegama & (type, a female, expanse 43 mm.,, labelled

“OW eama, March, 1884. Moore Coll, 94-106”, ut British Maser): Kelavawa 11,

Madiulsima 11, 4 females.

The type in the British Museum has heen examined, but it was not possible to

stndy the genitalia, The ove deseribed, from Madulsima, is somewhat larger.

The species is quite distinet from P, scxnalaluss the bright orange at the base

of abdomen, the single white discoidal spot, which is smaller in the deseribed

specitnen than in the type, and the black spot at the hinder angle of forewings

are characteristic, Unlike sexnolates the brown markings of forewing are dis-

tributed all over the wine and are not confined fo fwo subparallel bards aud there

is also 0 orange-yellow terminal mack between M, and My of hindwings.

The female genitalia (text fig. 20-21) have the eighth sternite produced into a

elurious process, awl-shaped in ventral view, while what may be the penultimate

tergite is in the form of a curiously lipped seoop; the homologies are ineertain.

162 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PALPIFER MURINUS (Moore),

Plate xi, fig. 86 and Text, fig, 19.

Hepialus murinus Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1879, p. 413

Pp it

Palpifer sexnotaius Hampson (nec Moore), Fauna Brit. Ind., Moths, i, 1892,

p. 317 (part).

Pa'pifer caerulescens Swinhoe, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ( 6), xiv, 1894, p. 440 (new

synonymy).

Palpifer caerulescens Hampson, Fauna Grit. Ind., Moths iv, 1896, p. 473,

Palpifer coerulescens Pfitzner and Gaede, Seitz Macrolep., x, 1938, p. 845, pl.

Ixxy B.

sacculus

cucullus

”

tegumen

vinculum**

20

Pig. 18-21. 18. Palpifer sernotatus Moore, male, Nainital, genitalia, ventral aspect of dis-

sected example; 19, P. murinws Moore, male, Khasia Hills, genitalia, ventral aspect of dissected

example. 20-21. P. taprobanus Moore, female, Madulsima: 20. genitalia, ventral aspect;

21. lateral aspect somewhat oblique.

TINDALE—REVISION OF THE GHOsT MOTHS 163

g Antennae pale brown ; head, thorax aud leas pale chocolate brown, abdomen

somewhat darker. Forewing chocolate brown with abseure darker chocolate spots

forming two indistinet lines parallel to termen; a creamy white spot below radial

fork. Lindwings dark chocolale brown with slightly opalescent lustre when viewed

from one oblique direction, a dull white terminal quadrate spot continued into the

cilia between M, and My, Esxpanse 29 num,

Loc, Jalandbay: Dharmsala (ype, a male, expanse 29 mm., abdomen lacking,

labelled ‘‘Dharmsala, Moore Coll. 94-106’ in British Museum). Assam: Khasia

Hills 4, 5, 10; Cherrapunji. 20 males.

The above deseription is based on a male from the Khasis taken in May, which

agrees rather well with the type, This specimen has also been compared and found

toagree in great detail wilh the type of eaenmescens Swinhoe (type, a male, 26 mm.

im expanse, labelled Cherrapunji, Khasis, 96-121'', in British Museum).

The male genitalia (text fig. 19) have the tezumen irregular in form, with the

posterior marein thiekened aud folded and produced anteriorly into a spine, its

median portion is produced into a hammermshaped member and the posterior part

into a hair-beset flagellum; the harvpe has a large digitiform cneullus and a small

spinu-like saceulus.

PALPIFER PELLICIA Swinhoe,

Palyifer pellicia Swinhoe, Ann, May, Nat, Hist. (7), xv, 1905, p. 152.

& Head, thorax, and abdomen dull amiform brown, legs brown, elothed with

shehtly reddish-tinged hairs. Forewings sparsely clothed in scales, dull brown, a

single small white spot between rf antl mf (absent in same examples), Hindwine's

rather uniformly dull brown; a moderately large subrectangular marginal yellow

spot on outer margin. Expanse 22 min.

@ Similar to male. Mxpanse 28 mm,

Loc, Assam: Khasia Hills! (type, a male, expanse 22 mm., lahelled ‘ Khasis,

Nat. Coll, 1905-657"; allotype female, expanse 28 mm.,, in British Museum). Cher-

rapunji. 5 males, 1 female.

This species is nearest to P. mwrinus from whieh it differs in its smaller size

and obseure markings, Specimens are present in the British Museum and at Tring;

it has not yet been possible to study the genitalia,

PaLPirer UmprInus (Moore).

Text fie, 24-25,

Tepalus wnhrinus Moore, Dese. new Ind. Lep. Ins. Coll. Atkinson, Caleutta, 1879,

p. 88,

2 Head with antennae and palpi, (horax except posterior margin, abdomen

and legs dark umber brown, posterior margin of thorax ochreous, Forewings hya-

line, rather sparsely scaled, pale, umber brown with vinons tint externally and

sparsely invorated with dark brown seales; fringe af base of wing ochreous, costal

margin and eiliae dark purplish-brown with a darker row of lunular spots on outer

margins, Hindwings hyaline, sparsely sealed, colour as in forewing costal margin

and ciliae dark purplish-brown. Expanse 51 mn.

Loe, Sikkim: Darjeeling (type, a female, labelled ‘* Darjiling Coll, Atkinson,

Staudinger K. 740’? in Berlin Museum). 1 female.

The unique type has been exammed, Tt ts a female, rather worn, and the

venation is conspicuous owing to the feebleness of the sealing. When fully clothed

the wings were probably a subhyaline aud opalescent dark brown with dull golden